625537

Dethleffs 2010 Motorhome Manual

255
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/286
Next page
Instruction manual
Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
© 2009 Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG, Isny
Instruction manual
Congratulations
We congratulate you on your new motorhome and would like to thank you for choosing a quality product from
Dethleffs.
Whether you want to enjoy your holidays on good or bad roads, whether you want to have your "holiday home"
out in the country, at the seaside or in the mountains: Your Dethleffs motorhome will always make sure that
you can enjoy your holidays because the Dethleffs team has been building caravans for more than seventy
years and knows what is important. This experience shows itself in the well thought-out, cosy and yet highly
functional equipment as well as in the outstanding driving characteristics.
Each Dethleffs vehicle is manufactured with great care and the quality is closely checked. This ensures that
our products have a long service life. In view of these strict requirements, we guarantee top quality of our prod-
ucts and grant you a six year leakage guarantee of the body in accordance with our guarantee conditions (see
section 1.2).
This instruction manual deals primarily with the body of your motorhome. It will give you all important informa-
tion and tips so that you can enjoy all technical advantages of your Dethleffs motorhome to the full. We have
also included a chapter on maintenance – and thus on the conservation of value.
In addition, you will find the documents on the base vehicle and the various built-in appliances.
For maintenance work or whenever you need some help, please always get in touch with your authorised spe-
cialist workshop. They know your motorhome best of all, and will meet all your requests fast and reliably.
In the event of chassis-related problems with Dethleff vehicles, authorised workshops of the base vehicle man-
ufacturer are able to provide assistance. If you encounter problems on the Fiat chassis, please call the phone
number 00800 34281111.
We wish you a lot of fun with your motorhome, a relaxing holiday and safe driving at all times.
Your Dethleffs team
Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Instruction manual
3Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Contents
1 Guarantee. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1 Guarantee certificate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2 Guarantee conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.3 Inspection records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.4 Inspection plan for
annual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.5 Inspection plan for
water ingress test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.2 Environmental tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.1 Fire prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.1.1 Avoidance of fire risks. . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.1.2 Fire-fighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.1.3 In case of fire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.3 Road safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.4 Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.5 Gas system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.5.1 General instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.5.2 Gas bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.6 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.7 Water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4 Before the journey . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.1 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.1.1 Model A and T, bus, Van. . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.1.2 Model I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.2 Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.3 Payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.3.1 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.3.2 Calculating the payload. . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.3.3 Loading the vehicle correctly. . . . . . . . 30
4.3.4 Roof load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.3.5 Rear garage/rear storage space . . . . . 32
4.3.6 Double floor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.3.7 Sliding drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.3.8 Bike rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.3.9 Load rack, extendable. . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.4 Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.5 Entrance step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.5.1 Mechanically operated
entrance step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.5.2 Electrically operated
entrance step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.6 PVC-floor covering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4.7 Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4.8 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.9 Road safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
5 During the journey . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.1 Driving the motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.2 Driving speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5.3 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5.4 Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5.4.1 Fastening the seat belt correctly . . . . . 45
5.4.2 Adjusting the seat belt correctly. . . . . . 45
5.5 Driver's seat and front
passenger's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5.5.1 Seats (Aguti) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5.5.2 Seats (ISRI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5.6 Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
5.7 Backrest adjustment
mechanism for bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.8 Seating arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.9 Branch block (model I). . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
5.10 Electrical window
winders (model I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
5.11 Electrically adjustable
external mirrors (model I). . . . . . . . . . . 51
5.12 Roman shades for windscreen,
driver's window and front
passenger's window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
5.13 Writing and reading rest . . . . . . . . . . . 52
5.14 Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
5.14.1 Model I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5.14.2 Fortero, Van. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5.15 Filliing with washer fluid (model I) . . . . 54
5.16 Checking the oil level (model I) . . . . . . 54
5.17 Filling up with diesel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
6 Pitching the motorhome. . . . . . 57
6.1 Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
6.2 Entrance step. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
6.3 Wheel chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
6.4 Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
6.4.1 General instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
6.4.2 Steady legs (SAWIKO) . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
6.4.3 Steady legs (AL-KO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
6.5 240 V connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
6.6 Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
7Living . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.1 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.1.1 Conversion door, outside . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.1.2 Conversion door, outside
(with recessed handle). . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
7.1.3 Conversion door, outside (Hartal) . . . . 62
7.1.4 Conversion door, inside (with knob) . . 63
7.1.5 Conversion door, inside
(with locking lever) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7.1.6 Conversion door, inside (Hartal) . . . . . 64
7.1.7 Driver's door, outside. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
7.1.8 Driver's door, inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7.1.9 Insect screen door, can be
folded out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7.1.10 Insect screen on the
conversion door, extendable . . . . . . . . 66
7.1.11 Window of conversion door
(Hartal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Contents
4 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
7.2 External flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
7.2.1 Flap lock with recessed handle . . . . . . 67
7.2.2 Flap lock, elliptical-shaped. . . . . . . . . . 67
7.2.3 Sliding drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
7.3 Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7.4 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7.4.1 Sliding window with lock . . . . . . . . . . . 70
7.4.2 Sliding window without lock . . . . . . . . . 70
7.4.3 Hinged window with rotary hinges . . . . 70
7.4.4 Hinged window with
automatic hinges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
7.4.5 Blind and insect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
7.4.6 Roman shade and insect screen . . . . . 74
7.4.7 Roman shades for windscreen,
driver's window and front
passenger's window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
7.5 Skylights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
7.5.1 Skylight with snap latch (variant 1) . . . 76
7.5.2 Skylight with snap latch (variant 2) . . . 77
7.5.3 Hinged skylight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
7.5.4 Heki skylight (mini and midi) . . . . . . . . 79
7.5.5 Wind-up skylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
7.6 Rotating seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.7 Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.7.1 Suspension table with fold-out leg . . . . 81
7.7.2 Suspension table
(bar seating group). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7.7.3 Swivel table for the round
seating group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
7.7.4 Fixed table (movable table-top) . . . . . . 85
7.7.5 Fixed table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
7.7.6 Lift-off table for the round
seating group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
7.8 Television. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
7.9 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
7.10 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
7.11 Extending the seating group . . . . . . . . 89
7.11.1 Extending the central
seating group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
7.12 Beds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
7.12.1 Overcab bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
7.12.2 Pull-down bed (model I). . . . . . . . . . . . 91
7.12.3 Pull-down bed (model T) . . . . . . . . . . . 93
7.12.4 Bunk bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
7.12.5 Bunk bed (side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
7.12.6 Fixed bed (gas-pressure springs) . . . . 96
7.13 Converting seating groups
for sleeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
7.13.1 Central seating group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
7.13.2 Central seating group
with extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
7.13.3 Facing seating unit with extension. . . . 99
7.13.4 Central seating group with divan . . . . 100
7.13.5 Round seating group
(without slatted frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
7.13.6 Round seating group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
7.13.7 Front bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
7.13.8 Front bench seat with divan . . . . . . . .104
7.13.9 Front bench seat with divan
(extendable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
7.13.10 Front bench seat with
lengthwise seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
7.13.11 Front seating group . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
7.13.12 L-seating group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
7.13.13 Individual seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
8 Gas system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
8.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
8.2 Gas bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
8.3 Gas consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
8.4 Changing gas bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
8.5 Gas isolator taps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
8.6 Hose break guard
(crash protection unit). . . . . . . . . . . . .115
8.7 External gas connection . . . . . . . . . .115
8.8 Duomatic switching facility . . . . . . . . .116
8.9 DuoControl switching facility . . . . . . .118
9 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . .121
9.1 General safety instructions . . . . . . . . .121
9.2 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
9.3 12 V power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
9.3.1 Living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
9.4 Charging the living area battery
and starter battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
9.4.1 Charging using a
240 V power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
9.4.2 Charging using the vehicle engine . . .124
9.4.3 Charging with an external charger . . .124
9.5 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 99) . . . . . .125
9.5.1 Battery cut-off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
9.5.2 Battery selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . .127
9.5.3 Battery monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
9.5.4 Charging the battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
9.6 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 101) . . . . .128
9.6.1 Battery cut-off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
9.6.2 Battery selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . .129
9.6.3 Battery monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
9.6.4 Charging the battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
9.7 Panel IT 20-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
9.7.1 V/tank gauge for battery voltage
and water or waste water levels . . . . .131
9.7.2 Battery alarm for the living
area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
9.7.3 12 V main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
9.7.4 12 V indicator lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
9.7.5 240 V indicator lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
9.8 Panel IT 992 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
9.8.1 V/tank gauge for battery voltage
and water or waste water levels . . . . .133
9.8.2 Battery alarm for the
living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
9.8.3 Current gauge for charging/discharging
the living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
5Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Contents
9.8.4 12 V main switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
9.8.5 12 V indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
9.8.6 240 V indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
9.8.7 Switch for water pump. . . . . . . . . . . . 137
9.9 Panel MP 20-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
9.9.1 240 V indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
9.9.2 12 V main switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
9.9.3 Batteries gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
9.9.4 Tank gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
9.9.5 Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
9.9.6 Temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
9.9.7 Clock gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
9.9.8 Switch for tank heater . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
9.10 240 V power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
9.10.1 240 V connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
9.10.2 Power cable for external
240 V connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
9.11 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
9.11.1 12 V fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
9.11.2 240 V fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
10 Appliances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
10.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
10.2 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
10.2.1 Models with waste gas vent on the
right-hand side of the vehicle . . . . . . 150
10.2.2 To heat properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
10.2.3 Truma Combi hot-air heater . . . . . . . 151
10.2.4 Trumatic C hot-air heater . . . . . . . . . 153
10.2.5 Alde hot-water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
10.2.6 Arizona auxiliary heat exchanger . . . 159
10.2.7 Independent vehicle heater . . . . . . . 159
10.2.8 Heater for waste water tank
and waste water pipes
(winter comfort package). . . . . . . . . . 160
10.2.9 Electrical floor warming unit . . . . . . . 161
10.3 Air conditioning unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
10.3.1 Dometic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
10.3.2 Truma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
10.4 Boiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
10.4.1 Models with waste gas vent on the
right-hand side of the vehicle . . . . . . 166
10.4.2 Truma Combi boiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
10.4.3 Trumatic C boiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
10.4.4 Alde boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
10.5 Cooker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
10.5.1 Gas cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
10.5.2 Gas oven (Spinflo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
10.5.3 Gas oven (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
10.5.4 Microwave oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
10.5.5 Extractor hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
10.6 Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
10.6.1 Refrigerator ventilation grill . . . . . . . . 177
10.6.2 Operation (Dometic 7 series,
automatic ignition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
10.6.3 Operation (Dometic 7 series
with automatic power selection
and frame heater) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
10.6.4 Operation (Dometic 8 series). . . . . . . 182
10.6.5 Operation (Dometic 8 series with
manual power selection MES) . . . . . . 183
10.6.6 Operation (Dometic 8 series with
automatic power selection) . . . . . . . . 185
10.6.7 Operation (Thetford) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
10.6.8 Refrigerator door locking
mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
11 Sanitary fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
11.1 Water supply, general . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
11.2 Switch for water pump
(winter comfort package) . . . . . . . . . . 194
11.3 Water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
11.3.1 Drinking water filler neck with cap . . . 194
11.3.2 Water drainage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
11.3.3 Filling with water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
11.3.4 Draining water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
11.4 Waste water tank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
11.4.1 Waste water tank
(models with double floor) . . . . . . . . . 197
11.4.2 Waste water tank
(models without double floor) . . . . . . 198
11.4.3 Odour seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
11.5 Filling the water system . . . . . . . . . . . 199
11.6 Emptying the water system . . . . . . . . 200
11.7 Toilet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
11.7.1 Pull-out toilet compartment . . . . . . . . 203
11.7.2 Vario toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
11.8 Toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
11.8.1 Swivel toilet (Thetford). . . . . . . . . . . . 205
11.8.2 Toilet with fixed seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
11.8.3 Toilet (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
11.8.4 Vacuum toilet (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . 209
11.8.5 Removing the cassette . . . . . . . . . . . 210
11.8.6 Emptying the cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
12 Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
12.1 External care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
12.1.1 Washing with a
high-pressure cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
12.1.2 Washing the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
12.1.3 Windows of acrylic glass . . . . . . . . . . 214
12.1.4 Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
12.1.5 Waste water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
12.1.6 Entrance step. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
12.1.7 Driver's cabin insulation mat
(model I). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
12.2 Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
12.3 Water system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
12.3.1 Cleaning the water tank . . . . . . . . . . . 216
12.3.2 Cleaning the water pipes . . . . . . . . . . 216
12.3.3 Disinfecting the water system . . . . . . 217
Contents
6 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
12.4 Extractor hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
12.5 Toilets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
12.5.1 Toilet with separate water tank . . . . . 218
12.5.2 Vacuum toilet (Dometic). . . . . . . . . . . 219
12.6 Winter care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
12.6.1 Preparations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
12.6.2 Winter operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
12.6.3 At the end of the winter season . . . . . 220
12.7 Lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
12.7.1 Temporary lay-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
12.7.2 Winter lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
12.7.3 Starting up the vehicle after
a temporary lay-up or after
lay-up over winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
13 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
13.1 Inspection work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
13.2 Maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
13.3 Alde hot-water heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
13.3.1 Checking the fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . 226
13.3.2 Topping up heating fluid. . . . . . . . . . . 226
13.3.3 Bleeding the heating system . . . . . . . 227
13.4 Independent vehicle heater . . . . . . . . 227
13.5 Air conditioning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
13.5.1 Truma. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
13.5.2 Dometic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
13.6 Replacing bulbs and
fluorescent tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
13.6.1 Ceiling lamp (cover with screws) . . . . 229
13.6.2 Ceiling lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
13.6.3 Halogen spotlight
(with glass shade) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
13.6.4 Halogen spotlight (movable) . . . . . . . 230
13.6.5 Room lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
13.6.6 Living area lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
13.6.7 Recessed halogen light
with housing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
13.6.8 Recessed halogen light (flat) . . . . . . . 232
13.6.9 Surface-mounted halogen
light driver's cabin (model I) . . . . . . . . 232
13.6.10 Wardrobe light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
13.7 Changing the battery of the
wardrobe light with LED. . . . . . . . . . . 233
13.8 AL-KO rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
13.9 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
13.10 Vehicle identification plate . . . . . . . . . 235
13.11 Warning and information stickers. . . . 236
14 Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
14.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
14.2 Tyre selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
14.3 Tyre specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
14.4 Handling of tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
14.5 Changing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
14.6 Spare wheel support. . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
14.6.1 Spare wheel support under
the vehicle (Renault). . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
14.7 Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
15 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
15.1 Braking system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
15.2 Electrical system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
15.3 Gas system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
15.4 Cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
15.4.1 Gas cooker/gas oven . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
15.4.2 Microwave oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
15.5 Heater/boiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
15.5.1 Heater/boiler Truma . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
15.5.2 Alde heater/boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
15.6 Refrigerator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
15.6.1 Dometic refrigerator without AES . . .249
15.6.2 Thetford refrigerator without SES
(error diagnostics). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
15.6.3 Refrigerator Dometic 7 series
with AES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
15.6.4 Dometic 8 series with MES. . . . . . . . .252
15.6.5 Dometic 8 series with AES . . . . . . . . .253
15.7 Air conditioning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
15.7.1 Dometic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
15.7.2 Truma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
15.8 Water supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
15.9 Vacuum toilet (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . .256
15.10 Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
16 Special equipment . . . . . . . . . . .259
16.1 Weight details for
special equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
17 Helpful notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
17.1 Traffic rules in foreign countries . . . . .263
17.2 Help on Europe's roads . . . . . . . . . . .263
17.3 Speed limits and
permissible dimensions . . . . . . . . . . .265
17.4 Driving with low beam in
European countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
17.5 Sleeping in the vehicle away
from camping areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
17.6 Gas supply in
European countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
17.7 Toll regulations in
European countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
17.8 Tips on staying overnight
safely during travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
17.9 Tips for winter campers . . . . . . . . . . .271
17.10 Travel checklists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
7Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Guarantee
1
1Guarantee
1.1 Guarantee certificate
We reserve the right to alter the construction, equipment and the scope of
delivery. Special equipment is also listed that is not included in the standard
scope of delivery. The descriptions and illustrations in this brochure do not
relate to a particular version. For all details, only the respective equipment list
is valid.
1.2 Guarantee conditions
1. In addition to the legal guarantee and product warranty rights due to the
customer, Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG may also grant a guarantee of six
years that the vehicles constructed by the company are sealed in such a
manner that moisture cannot penetrate from the outside into the interior of
the vehicle.
The guarantee obligations do not apply if the leakage is a result of improper
handling of the windows, doors and skylights or damage that has not been
properly repaired. Damage that is caused by forces of nature (e.g. flooding)
is not covered by the guarantee. The guarantee extensions include only the
correct repair work. Conversion or diminution as well as travelling
expenses or other indirect costs are not covered by the guarantee.
2. When dealing with a case of leakage covered under the conditions of this
guarantee, Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG is obliged to rectify the defective
vehicle part concerned by repairing it free of charge or replacing the part,
depending on what is necessary to immediately to repair the damage.
Defects are to be rectified by Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG or by an author-
ised specialist workshop in accordance with the guidelines of
Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG.
Vehicle data
Model:
Car manufacturer/type of engine:
Serial number:
Initial registration:
Purchased from company:
Expiry of the guarantee period:
Key number:
Chassis number:
Customer Address
Surname, Christian name:
Street, No.:
Postal code, town:
Dealer's stamp and signature
8 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Guarantee
1
3. The prerequisite for this guarantee is that the vehicle must be presented
once a year to an authorised specialist workshop for an inspection. The
presentation must take place 2 months at the latest after the anniversary of
the initial registration (or delivery).
If the inspection is not carried out according to schedule, this will nullify your
warranty. It cannot be renewed by carrying out an inspection at a later time.
As proof that the inspection has been completed, there are designated cou-
pons in the Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG guarantee booklet where inspection
stamps are to be glued and endorsed by a stamp, the date and the signa-
ture of a respective Dethleffs dealer.
4. The guarantee begins on the day of the initial registration or delivery of the
vehicle to the customer, 1 year at the latest after delivery to the dealer, and
is valid while the vehicle is in use, for 6 years at the longest. If initial regis-
tration of the vehicle precedes taking delivery, the warranty commences on
the vehicle's initial registration date (warranty qualifying date). A change of
ownership of the purchased object has no effect on the guarantee obliga-
tions. The guarantee expires if the terms outlined in paragraph 3 are not
complied with. The performance of guarantee work does not increase the
guarantee period.
5. Parts installed to rectify faults are also guaranteed under the terms of the
guarantee until the guarantee period expires.
6. If leakage occurs, the owner must notify Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG or a
Dethleffs dealer of this in writing within 15 days of its detection. The guar-
antee certificate and the corresponding guarantee stamps must be
included with the notification. If notification of leakage does not occur within
the time limit stated, no claims can be made under the terms of the guar-
antee.
Remedying of leakage will take place after approval has been given by
Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG.
If no agreement is reached about the type, extent and result of the repairs,
Dethleffs GmbH & Co. KG or the Dethleffs dealer will consult a neutral
expert whose decision is binding for all parties involved.
7. The costs of the inspection are to be paid by the party covered by the guar-
antee.
8. As far as legally permissible, the court responsible for Isny will be agreed
upon as the venue for jurisdiction.
9Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Guarantee
1
1.3 Inspection records
Should it be determined during an inspection that additional work is necessary,
then the carrying out of this work is dependent on the customer commissioning
this to be done. Please also adhere to the service intervals stipulated by the
manufacturers of the individual equipment. Information is included in the
service documents enclosed.
Delivery
Date:
Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs
dealer:
1st year Water ingress test
Date:
Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs
dealer:
Paste inspection
stamp here.
Water ingress test 1st year
Water ingress test 1st year
No defects found
Found defects:
10 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Guarantee
1
Should it be determined during an inspection that additional work is necessary,
then the carrying out of this work is dependent on the customer commissioning
this to be done. Please also adhere to the service intervals stipulated by the
manufacturers of the individual equipment. Information is included in the
service documents enclosed.
2nd year Water ingress test
Date:
Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs
dealer:
Paste inspection
stamp here.
Water ingress test 2nd year
Water ingress test 2nd year
No defects found
Found defects:
3rd year Water ingress test
Date:
Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs
dealer:
Paste inspection
stamp here.
Water ingress test 3rd year
Water ingress test 3rd year
No defects found
Found defects:
11Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Guarantee
1
Should it be determined during an inspection that additional work is necessary,
then the carrying out of this work is dependent on the customer commissioning
this to be done. Please also adhere to the service intervals stipulated by the
manufacturers of the individual equipment. Information is included in the
service documents enclosed.
4th year Water ingress test
Date:
Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs
dealer:
Paste inspection
stamp here.
Water ingress test 4th year
Water ingress test 4th year
No defects found
Found defects:
5th year Water ingress test
Date:
Signature and stamp of the Dethleffs
dealer:
Paste inspection
stamp here.
Water ingress test 5th year
Water ingress test 5th year
No defects found
Found defects:
12 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Guarantee
1
1.4 Inspection plan for annual inspection
We reserve the right to modify the inspection plan.
1.5 Inspection plan for water ingress test
Pos. Component Activity Interval
1 Skylights Remove the inside
frame of the skylights
and tighten the screw
connections of the se-
curing clips
1. year
2 Auxiliary support Lubrication Annually
3 Joints, hinges Lubrication Annually
4 Refrigerator, heater, boiler,
cooker, lighting, storage flap
and door closures, toilet, seat
belts
Function check Annually
5 Windows, skylights Function check, water
ingress test, applying
talc to the rubber seals
Annually
6 Upholstery, curtains, blinds Visual check Annually
7 Sealing strips, edges, rubber Check for damage Annually
8 Water supply Water ingress test Annually
9 Hot-air system Function check, clean
fan wheel as necessary
Annually
10 Underbody protection, floor
skirt attachment
Visual check Annually
11 Pull-down bed suspension Function check Annually
12 Electrical system Function check Annually
13 Gas system Official gas inspection Every
two years
14 Connections between the
chassis and body
Check Every
two years
15 Underbody Visual check, repair un-
derbody protection as
necessary
Every
two years
Pos. Component Activity
1.1 Wheel housing Visual check
1.2 Rear wall floor plateau connection Visual check
1.2.1 Side wall in the direction of travel left connection Visual check
1.2.2 Side wall in the direction of travel right connec-
tion
Visual check
1.3 Front wall floor plateau connection Visual check
1.3.1 Side wall in the direction of travel left connection Visual check
1.3.2 Side wall in the direction of travel right connec-
tion
Visual check
1.4 Side wall floor plateau right connection Visual check
13Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Guarantee
1
We reserve the right to modify the inspection plan.
1.5 Side wall floor plateau left connection Visual check
1.6 Connection to driver's cabin Visual check
1.7 Base frame with base frame cut-outs Visual check
1.8 Check the status of the outer metal sheets Visual check
1.9 Check the status of the window rubbers, expan-
sion joints, sealing joints
Visual check
2.1 Measure the floor plateau at this connection
point with a moisture measuring device, write
down the corresponding values with the date of
the assessment. Prescribed maximum values –
up to 20 % normal.
If the values are above 20 % check if it is due to
accumulated condensation.
Measuring
2.2 Measure inside the vehicle (walls, window sec-
tions, roof, etc.), note changes in the colour of
the decor. Prescribed maximum values – up to
20 % normal.
If the values are above 20 % check if it is due to
accumulated condensation.
Measuring
3.1 Wheel housing Spray with Dethleffs
special weatherproof
solution
3.2 Rear wall floor plateau connection Spray with Dethleffs
special weatherproof
solution
3.3 Front wall floor plateau connection Spray with Dethleffs
special weatherproof
solution
3.4 Side wall floor plateau right connection Spray with Dethleffs
special weatherproof
solution
3.5 Side wall floor plateau left connection Spray with Dethleffs
special weatherproof
solution
Pos. Component Activity
14 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Guarantee
1
15Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Introduction
2
2Introduction
Please read this instruction manual completely before
using the vehicle for the first time!
Always keep this instruction manual in the vehicle. Also inform all other users
of the safety regulations.
With your Dethleffs motorhome you will receive a file with the following vehicle
manuals and documents:
Dethleffs documents
Instruction manual and service book (housing body)
List of Dethleffs dealers
Additional documents
Operating and installation instructions of various appliances
Complete set of documents from the chassis manufacturer
Test certificate for the gas system in accordance with German regulations
This instruction manual contains sections which describe model-spe-
cific equipment or special equipment. These sections are not specially
marked. It may be that your vehicle has not been fitted with this special
equipment. In some cases, the actual equipment of your vehicle may
therefore be different from that shown in some illustrations and descrip-
tions.
However, your vehicle may be fitted with other special equipment not
described in this instruction manual.
Special equipment is described when an explanation is required.
Adhere to the instruction manuals which are separately enclosed.
Should the vehicle be subjected to damage due to a failure to follow the
instructions in this instruction manual, then the guarantee claim is deemed
invalid.
Our vehicles are subjected to continuous development. Please understand
that we reserve the right to alter the form, equipment and technology. There-
fore, no claims can be made against the manufacturer as a result of the con-
tents of this instruction manual. The equipment which was known and included
at the time of going to press is described.
The non-observance of this symbol can lead to personal injury.
The non-observance of this symbol can lead to damage being caused to,
or inside the vehicle.
This symbol indicates recommendations or special aspects.
This symbol indicates actions which lead to environmental awareness.
The details "right", "left", "front" and "rear" always refer to the vehicle in
direction of travel.
All dimensions and weight details are "approximate".
The metric specifications are binding for physical dimensions.
16 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Introduction
2
The reprinting, translation and copying, including extracts is not permitted
without prior written authorisation from the manufacturer.
2.1 General
The vehicle is constructed in accordance with the latest technology and the
recognised safety regulations. Nevertheless, personal injury may result and
the vehicle may be damaged if the safety instructions in this instruction manual
are not followed.
Only use the vehicle in a technically impeccable condition. Follow the instruc-
tions in the instruction manual.
Malfunctions which impair the safety of persons or the vehicle should be
immediately remedied by qualified personnel. To avoid further damages,
observe the duty to avert, minimize or mitigate loss for the user during faults.
Have the vehicle's braking and gas systems inspected and repaired by an
authorised specialist workshop only.
Alterations to the body are only to be carried out with the authorisation of the
manufacturer.
The vehicle is designed for the exclusive transport of persons. Luggage and
accessories may only be transported up to the maximum permissible gross
weight.
Observe the test and inspection periods stipulated by the manufacturer.
2.2 Environmental tips
Be considerate of the environment.
Remember that: All kinds of waste water and household waste are not to
be disposed of in drains or in the open countryside.
On board, collect waste water only in the waste water tank or – if
necessary – in other containers designed for that purpose.
Only empty the waste water tank and toilet cassette or sewage tank at dis-
posal stations at the camping or caravan sites, which are especially pro-
vided for this purpose. When stopping in towns and communities, observe
the instructions at caravan sites or ask where there are disposal stations.
Empty waste water tank as often as possible, even when it is not com-
pletely full (hygiene).
If possible, flush out waste water tank and, if necessary, drainage pipe with
fresh water every time it is emptied.
Never allow the toilet cassette or sewage tank to become too full. Empty
the toilet cassette or sewage tank frequently, at the latest as soon as the
level indicator lights up.
Separate household waste according to glass, tin cans, plastic and wet
waste also when on a journey. Enquire at the town or community authority
about disposal points. Household waste is not to be disposed of in waste
paper baskets which are situated at car parks.
Empty waste bins as often as possible into the containers provided for this
purpose. This helps to avoid unpleasant smells and an accumulation of
rubbish on board.
17Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Introduction
2
When parked, do not allow the engine to run more than necessary. When
running idle, a cold engine releases more contaminants than usual. The
running temperature of the engine is achieved more quickly whilst the
vehicle is in motion.
Use an environmentally-friendly WC chemical agent for the WC which can
also be biologically degraded and only use small doses.
When staying in towns and communities for long periods, search for
parking areas which are specially reserved for motorhomes. Enquire at the
town or community authority about parking spaces.
Always leave the parking places in a clean condition.
18 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Introduction
2
19Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Safety
3
3Safety
Chapter overview
This chapter contains important safety instructions. The safety instructions are
for the protection of persons and property.
The instructions address the following topics:
fire prevention and what to do in case of fire
general care of the vehicle
road safety of the vehicle
towing
gas system of the vehicle
electrical system of the vehicle
water system of the vehicle
3.1 Fire prevention
3.1.1 Avoidance of fire risks
3.1.2 Fire-fighting
3.1.3 In case of fire
All windows and doors which meet the following requirements are considered
as emergency exits:
Never leave children in the vehicle unattended.
Keep flammable materials clear of heating and cooking appliances.
Lights can get very hot. When the light is switched on, there must always
be a safety distance of 30 cm between light and flammable objects. Fire
hazard!
Never use portable heating or cooking appliances.
Only authorised qualified personnel may make changes to the electrical
system, gas system or appliances.
Always carry a dry powder fire extinguisher in the vehicle. The fire extin-
guisher must be approved, tested and close at hand.
The fire extinguisher is not included in the scope of delivery.
Have the fire extinguisher tested at regular intervals by authorised qual-
ified personnel. Observe the date of testing.
Always keep a fire blanket near the cooker.
Evacuate all passengers.
Cut off the electrical power supply and disconnect from the mains.
Close regulator tap on the gas bottle.
Sound the alarm and call the fire brigade.
Fight the fire if this is possible without risk.
Acquaint yourself with the position and operation of the emergency exits.
Keep escape routes clear.
Observe the fire extinguisher instructions for use.
20 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Safety
3
Open to the outside or can be shifted in horizontal direction
Opening angle at least 70°
Minimum diameter of clearance = 450 mm
Maximum distance from the vehicle floor = 950 mm
3.2 General
3.3 Road safety
The oxygen in the vehicle interior is used up by breathing and the use of
gas operated appliances. That is why the oxygen needs to be replaced
on a constant basis. For this purpose, forced ventilation options (e.g.
skylights with forced ventilation, mushroom-shaped vents or floor vents)
are fitted to the vehicle. Never cover or block forced ventilations from the
inside or outside with objects such as e.g. a winter mat. Keep forced ven-
tilations clear of snow and leaves. There is a danger of suffocation due
to increased CO
2
levels.
Observe the headroom of the doors.
As far as the fitted appliances (heater, cooker, refrigerator, etc.) and the
base vehicle (engine, brakes, etc.) are concerned, the instruction manuals
are authoritative. It is imperative that they be observed.
Fitting accessories or special equipment can alter the dimensions, weight
and road behaviour of the vehicle. Some of the parts must be entered in
the vehicle papers.
Only use wheel rims and tyres which are approved for the vehicle. Informa-
tion concerning the size of the approved wheel rims and tyres is included
in the vehicle documents or can be obtained from authorised dealers and
service centres.
Firmly apply the handbrake when parking the vehicle.
If the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle exceeds 4 tonnes,
wheel chocks must be used when parking on gradients. The wheel chocks
are provided as standard for vehicles with a maximum permissible gross
weight exceeding 4 tonnes.
When leaving the vehicle, it is imperative that all doors, external flaps and
windows are closed.
Carry a hazard warning triangle and a first-aid kit and/or flashing hazard
warning light when this is required by law.
The vehicle may only be driven by drivers who hold a driving licence which
is valid for the respective vehicle class.
When selling the vehicle, hand over all instruction manuals for the vehicle
and the fitted appliances.
Before commencing the journey, carry out a functional check of indi-
cating and lighting equipment, the steering and the brakes.
If the vehicle has been stationary for a long period (approx. 10 months)
have the braking and gas systems checked by an authorised specialist
workshop.
Before commencing the journey and after short interruptions of the
journey, ensure that the entrance step is completely retracted.
21Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Safety
3
Before commencing the journey, secure the hinged pull-down bed.
Before commencing the journey, open and secure the shades on the
windscreen and on the driver's and front passenger's windows.
Before commencing the journey, rotate all swivel seats in the direction
of travel and lock in position. During the journey, the swivel seats must
remain locked in place in the direction of travel.
Before commencing the journey, remove the television from the support
and store it securely.
Before commencing the journey, place the television console in the
alcove to secure it from turning.
Before commencing the journey, place and secure the flat screen and
screen support in the initial position. If the screen holder is installed in a
TV cabinet: Close TV cabinet.
During the journey, persons are only to sit on the permitted seats (see
chapter 5). The authorised number of seats is stipulated in the vehicle
documents.
Seat belts must be worn by all passengers.
Fasten your seat belts before the beginning of the journey and keep
them fastened during the journey.
It is not permitted to stay in the alcove during the journey.
Always secure children with the children safety equipment prescribed for
the respective height and weight.
Factory-set three-point safety belts must be used when attaching child
restraint systems.
The base vehicle is a commercial vehicle (small truck). Adjust your
driving technique accordingly.
In case of underpasses, tunnels or similar obstacles, note the total
height of the vehicle (including the roof load).
In winter, the roof must be free of snow and ice before commencing the
journey.
Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre
pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre
burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.
Do not operate the independent vehicle heater at petrol stations. Danger
of explosion!
Do not operate the independent vehicle heater in closed spaces. Danger
of suffocation!
Before commencing the journey, distribute the payload evenly within the
vehicle (see chapter 4).
When loading the vehicle and when taking a rest from driving, in order to
load luggage or food, for example, observe the maximum permissible
gross weight and axle loads (refer to vehicle documents).
Before commencing the journey, ensure that all cupboard doors, the toilet
compartment door and all drawers and flaps are secure. Engage the refrig-
erator door securing device.
Before commencing the journey, lower the table and fix it to the holder on
the floor of the vehicle.
Before commencing the journey, close windows and skylights.
22 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Safety
3
3.4 Towing
3.5 Gas system
3.5.1 General instructions
Before commencing the journey, close all external flaps and lock them.
Before commencing the journey, remove the external supports and retract
the corner steadies or steady legs, which are fitted to the vehicle.
Before commencing the journey, put the antenna in park position.
During the initial journey and each time after changing a wheel, re-tighten
the wheel bolts/wheel nuts after 50 km (30 miles). Subsequently inspect
them at regular intervals in order to ensure that they are firmly seated.
Tyres may not be older than 6 years as the material becomes brittle over
time (see chapter 14).
When using snow chains, the tyres, wheel suspension and steering are
subjected to an additional load. When using snow chains, drive slowly
(maximum speed 50 km/h) and only on streets which are completely cov-
ered with snow. Otherwise the vehicle could be damaged.
Care is to be taken when connecting and detaching a trailer. Risk of acci-
dent and injury!
No persons are to be between the towing vehicle and the trailer during
positioning for connecting and detaching.
Before commencing the journey, when leaving the vehicle or when gas
equipment is not in use, close all gas isolator taps and the main isolator
tap on the gas bottle.
No appliance operated by a naked flame (e.g. heater or refrigerator) may
be in operation when filling the tank, on ferries or in the garage. Danger
of explosion!
Do not use appliances operated with a naked flame in closed spaces
(e.g. garages). Danger of poisoning and suffocation!
Only have the gas system maintained, repaired or altered by an author-
ised specialist workshop.
Have the gas system checked by an authorised specialist workshop
according to the national regulations before commissioning. This also
applies for not registered vehicles. For modifications to the gas system
have the gas system immediately checked by an authorised specialist
workshop.
The gas pressure regulator and exhaust gas pipes must also be
inspected. The gas pressure regulator has to be replaced after 10 years
at the latest. The vehicle owner is responsible for seeing that this is car-
ried out.
In case of a defect of the gas system (gas odour, high gas consumption)
there is danger of explosion! Close regulator tap on the gas bottle imme-
diately. Open doors and windows and ventilate well.
If the gas system is defective: Do not smoke; do not ignite any open
flames, and do not operate electric switches (light switches etc.).
Before using the cooker make sure that there is sufficient ventilation.
Open windows or the skylight.
23Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Safety
3
3.5.2 Gas bottles
Do not use the gas cooker or gas oven for heating purposes.
If there are several gas devices, each gas device must have its own gas
isolator tap. If individual gas devices are not in use, close the respective
gas isolator tap.
Ignition safety valves must close within 1 minute after the gas flame has
extinguished. A clicking sound is audible. Check function from time to
time.
The built-in gas devices are exclusively meant for use with propane or
butane gas or a mixture of both. The gas pressure regulator as well as
all built-in gas devices are designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.
Propane gas is capable of gasification up to -42 °C, whereas butane gas
gasifies at 0 °C. Below these temperatures no gas pressure is available.
Butane gas is unsuitable for use in winter.
Regularly inspect the gas tube fitted to the gas bottle connection for
tightness. The gas tube must not have any tears and must not be
porous. Have the gas tube replaced by an authorised specialist work-
shop no later than ten years after the manufacturing date. The operator
of the gas system must see to it that the parts are replaced.
Due to its function and construction, the gas bottle compartment is a
space which is open to the exterior. Never cover or block up the standard
forced ventilations. Otherwise gas that is emitted can not be diverted to
the outside.
Do not use the gas bottle compartment as storage space as it is not
moisture-proof.
Secure the gas bottle compartment against unauthorised access. To do
this, lock the compartment.
The regulator tap on the gas bottle must be accessible.
Only connect gas-operated devices (e.g. gas grill) which have been
designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.
The exhaust gas pipe must be fitted tightly to the heating system and to
the vent and must be sealed. The exhaust gas pipe must not show any
evidence of damage.
Exhaust fumes must be able to escape into the atmosphere unhindered
and fresh air must be able to enter unhindered. For this reason, keep the
exhaust pipe and intake openings clean and unobstructed (e.g. free from
snow and ice). For this reason, no snow walls or aprons may lie against
the vehicle.
Gas bottles are only to be transported within the designated gas bottle
compartment.
Place the gas bottles in vertical position in the gas bottle compartment.
Fasten the gas bottles so that they are unable to turn or tilt.
If the gas bottles are not connected to the gas tube, always place the
protective cap on top.
Close the regulator tap on the gas bottle before the gas pressure regu-
lator or gas tube are removed from the gas bottle.
The gas pressure regulator or the gas tube must only be secured with a
suitable gas spanner (Do not overtighten).
24 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Safety
3
3.6 Electrical system
3.7 Water system
Only use special gas pressure regulators with a safety valve designed
for vehicle use. Other gas pressure regulators are not permitted and
cannot meet the demanding requirements.
Use the gas pressure regulator defroster if the temperature falls below
5°C.
Use only 11 kg or 5 kg gas bottles. Camping gas bottles with built-in
check valve (blue bottle with max. 2.5 or 3 kg content) are can be used
in exceptional cases with a safety valve.
Use the shortest possible tube lengths (150 cm max.) for external gas
bottles.
Never block the floor ventilation openings below the gas bottles.
Only allow qualified personnel to work on the electrical system.
Prior to carrying out work on the electrical system, switch off all devices
and lights, disconnect the battery and disconnect the vehicle from the
mains.
Only use original fuses with the stipulated values.
Only replace defective fuses when the cause of the defect is known and
has been remedied.
Never bridge or repair fuses.
Water left standing in the water tank or in the water pipes becomes
undrinkable after a short period. Therefore, before each use of the
vehicle, thoroughly clean the water pipes and the water tank. After each
use of the vehicle completely empty the water tank and the water pipes.
In the case of lay-ups lasting more than a week disinfect the water
system before using the vehicle.
If the vehicle is not used for several days or if it is not heated when there is
a risk of frost, empty the entire water system. Leave the water taps on in
central position. Leave the safety/drainage valve (if there is one) and all
drain cocks open. Frost damage to appliances, frost damage to the vehicle
and deposits in water-carrying components can be avoided in this way.
25Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Before the journey
4
4Before t he journey
Chapter overview
This chapter contains important information which has to be noted before com-
mencing your journey or carrying out any tasks before the journey.
The instructions address the following topics:
keys
registration
calculating the payload
correct loading of the vehicle
towing
retracting and extending the entrance step
PVC-floor covering
storing the television
using snow chains
At the end of the chapter there is a checklist which once again summarises the
most important points.
4.1 Keys
The following keys are included with your vehicle:
4.1.1 Model A and T, bus, Van
Two keys for
ignition lock
driver's and passenger's doors
fuel tank
Two keys for
conversion door of the body
drinking water filler neck (only with external drinking water filler neck)
external flaps
Always deposit a replacement key outside the vehicle. Make a note of the key
number. Our authorised dealers and workshops can offer assistance in case
of loss.
4.1.2 Model I
Two keys for
ignition lock
Two keys for
driver's door
fuel tank
conversion door of the body
drinking water filler neck
external flaps
Always deposit a replacement key outside the vehicle. Make a note of the key
number. Our authorised dealers and workshops can offer assistance in case
of loss.
26 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Before the journey
4
4.2 Registration
Your motorhome is a vehicle which must be registered. Observe national reg-
ulations on registration.
Please remember that certain countries require a separate national code
sticker in addition to the EU plate.
4.3 Payload
On loading, make sure that the payload's centre of gravity is as low as possible
(directly above the floor of the vehicle). Otherwise this may affect the driving
characteristics of the vehicle.
Overloading the vehicle and wrong tyre pressure can cause tyres to
burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.
Only the maximum permissible gross weight and the mass in a ready-to-
drive condition, not the actual weight of the vehicle, is stated in the
vehicle documents. For your own safety, we recommend that you have
your loaded vehicle (with all passengers, luggage and personal objects)
weighed on a public weighbridge before you set out on your journey.
Adapt the speed to the payload. The stopping distance is increased if the
payload is high.
Do not exceed the maximum permissible gross weight stated in the vehicle
documents by the payload.
Built-in accessories and special equipment reduce the payload.
Adhere to the axle load stated in the vehicle documents.
Description Load (kg)
Maximum permitted
payloads
Motorhome roof rack 100
Bike rack Triple 50
Quadruple 60
Motorcycle rack 150
Sliding drawer 40
Rear garage and rear storage space (A5831) 150
Rear garage and rear storage space (A5881, A6971,
A6981, A6991, A7071)
250
Rear garage and rear storage space (all other models) 200
Overcab bed 200
Pull-down bed model I 200
Rear bed 200
Bunk beds 100
Folding beds 50
27Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Before the journey
4
4.3.1 Terms
Maximum permissible
gross weight in a laden
condition
The maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition is the weight that
a vehicle may never exceed.
The maximum permissible overall weight in laden condition consists of the
mass in ready-to-drive condition and of the payload.
In the vehicle documents, the manufacturer has specified the maximum per-
missible gross weight in a laden condition.
Permitted mass The permitted mass is the weight specified by the manufacturer for issuing the
type approval. The permitted mass must never exceed the maximum permis-
sible gross weight of the loaded vehicle.
Mass in ready-to-drive
condition
The mass in ready-to-drive condition is the weight of the ready-to-drive
standard vehicle.
The mass in ready-to-drive condition is made up as follows:
Unladen weight (mass of the empty vehicle) with factory-installed standard
equipment
Driver's weight
Basic equipment weight
Unladen weight includes lubricants such as oils and coolants which have been
filled, the on-board tool set, the spare wheel and a fuel tank which has been
filled up to 90 %.
75 kg are calculated for the weight of the driver, regardless of how much the
driver really weighs.
Basic equipment includes all equipment and fluids required for safe and proper
vehicle use. The weight of the basic equipment includes:
Water system filled up to 90 % (water tank and pipes)
Gas bottles filled up to 90 %
A full heating system
A full toilet flushing system
The power cables for the 240 V power supply
The installation kit for an auxiliary battery if an auxiliary battery can be used
The waste water and sewage tanks are empty.
In the vehicle documents, the manufacturer specifies the mass in ready-to-
drive conditions.
Technically speaking, the term "mass" has now replaced the term "weight".
However, "weight" is still the term more frequent in common use. For better
understanding, "mass" is therefore only used in the following sections for
fixed formulations.
All specifications according to EU norm DIN EN 1646-2.
Example for calculating
the basic equipment
Water tank with 120 l 120 kg
Gas bottles (2 x 11 kg
gas
+ 2 x 14 kg
bottle
) + 50 kg
Boiler with 12 l + 12 kg
240 V power cable + 4 kg
Installation kit for auxiliary battery + 20 kg
Total = 206 kg
28 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Before the journey
4
Payload The payload is made up as follows:
Conventional load
Additional equipment
Personal equipment
You will find explanations on the individual components of the payload in the
following text.
Conventional load The conventional load is the weight specified by the manufacturer for the pas-
sengers.
Conventional load means: 75 kg are calculated for every seat specified by the
manufacturer, regardless of how much the passengers actually weigh. The
driver's seat is already included as part of the mass in ready-to-drive condition
and must not be calculated as part of the conventional load.
In the vehicle documents, the manufacturer specifies the number of seats.
Additional equipment Additional equipment includes accessories and special equipment. Examples
of additional equipment include:
Caravan coupling
Awning
Bike or motorcycle rack
Satellite unit
Chapter 16 lists the weights of the various items of special equipment; they
may also be obtained from the manufacturer.
Personal equipment Personal equipment includes all items in the vehicle that are not included in
the conventional load or in the additional equipment. For example, personal
equipment can include the following:
Foodstuffs
Crockery
Television
Radio
Clothes
Bedding
Toys
Books
Toiletries
No matter where kept, personal equipment also includes:
Animals
Bikes
Boats
Surfboards
Sports equipment
For the personal equipment, according to the applicable regulations, the man-
ufacturer must use a minimum weight that is determined according to the fol-
lowing formula:
Formula Minimum weight M (kg) = 10 x N + 10 x L
The vehicle's payload can be increased by reducing the weight in a ready-
to-drive condition. To do this, it is allowed for example to empty the fluid
containers or to remove the gas bottles.
29Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Before the journey
4
Explanation N = maximum number of people including the driver, as stated by the manu-
facturer
L = total length of the vehicle in metres
4.3.2 Calculating the payload
The payload (see section 4.3.1) is the difference in weight between
Maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition and
Vehicle mass complete in a ready-to-drive condition.
The calculation of the payload from the difference between the maximum per-
missible gross weight in laden condition and the mass specified by the manu-
facturer in ready-to-drive condition is however only a theoretical value.
Only if the vehicle is weighed with full tanks (fuel and water), full gas bottles
and complete additional equipment on a public weighbridge, can the actual
payload be determined.
To do this, proceed as follows:
First only drive the vehicle on to the weighbridge with the front wheels and
have it weighed.
Then drive the vehicle on to the weighbridge with the back wheels and have
it weighed.
The individual values give the current axle loads. These are important for the
correct loading of the vehicle (see section 4.3.3). The sum of these values is
the current weight of the vehicle.
The actual payload is the difference between the maximum permissible gross
weight in laden condition and the weighed vehicle weight.
The payload calculation at the factory is partly based on all-inclusive
weights. For safety reasons, the maximum permissible gross weight in
a laden condition must not be exceeded.
Only the maximum permissible gross weight and the mass in a ready-to-
drive condition, not the actual weight of the vehicle, is stated in the
vehicle documents. For your own safety, we recommend that you have
your loaded vehicle (with all passengers, luggage and personal objects)
weighed on a public weighbridge before you set out on your journey.
Mass in kg to be
calculated
Calculation
Example for calculating
the payload
Maximum permissible gross weight ac-
cording to vehicle documents
3500
Vehicle mass in a ready-to-drive condi-
tion, including basic equipment according
to vehicle documents
- 3070
This results in a permissible payload
of
430
Conventional load e.g.: 3 persons each
weighing 75 kg
- 225
Additional equipment - 40
For the personal equipment this re-
sults in
= 165
30 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Before the journey
4
This can be used to determine the weight that remains for the personal equip-
ment:
Determine the weight of the passengers and subtract it from the value for
the actual payload.
The result is the weight that is permitted for the actual load of the personal
equipment.
4.3.3 Loading the vehicle correctly
Large storage spaces, such as the rear garage, also have room for heavy
objects (e.g. motorcycle). This might mean that the axle load on the rear axle
is exceeded.
However, the individual axles may not be overloaded under any circum-
stances. That is why it is important, at which distance to the axles the load is
stored.
To distribute the load correctly, you will need a scale, a tape measure, a cal-
culator and some time.
Two simple formulas are needed to calculate the effect of the weight of the
load on the axles:
Formulas A x G : R = weight on the rear axle
Weight on the rear axle – G = weight on the front axle
Explanation A = distance between storage compartment and front axle in cm
G = weight of the load in the storage compartment in kg
R = wheelbase of the vehicle (distance between axles) in cm
For safety reasons, never exceed the maximum permissible gross
weight in a laden condition.
Distribute the load evenly on the left and right sides of the vehicle.
Distribute the load evenly on both axles. In doing so, observe the axle
loads specified in the vehicle documents. Observe the permissible load-
carrying capacity of the tyres (see chapter 14).
Heavy loads behind the rear axle can reduce the load on the front axle
due to the leverage effect ( ). This applies especially to long rear
extensions, if a motorbike is transported on the rear carrier or if there is
a heavy load in the rear storage space. The release of the front axle neg-
atively affects the driving quality, especially for front-driven vehicles.
Store all objects in such a way that they cannot slip.
Store heavy objects (awning, tin cans, etc.) close to the axles. Low-lying
storage compartments whose doors do not open in the direction of travel
are particularly suited for storing heavy objects.
Stack light objects (laundry) in the roof storage cabinets.
Load the bike rack with bicycles only (max. four units).
Measure the external distances horizontally from the centre of the front
wheel to the centre of the storage compartment or to the centre of the back
wheel.
31Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Before the journey
4
Calculating axle loads: Multiply the distance between storage compartment and front axle (A) with
the weight of the load in the storage compartment (G) and divide the result
by the wheelbase (R). The result is the weight of the load in the storage
compartment on the rear axle. Make a note of this weight and of the storage
compartment.
In a second step, subtract the weight in the storage compartment (G) from
the weight calculated beforehand. If the result is a positive value
(example 1), this means that the load on the front axle is reduced by this
value. If the result is a negative value (example 2), this means that the load
on the front axle is increased. Make a note of this value, too.
Calculate all storage compartments of the vehicle in the same way.
In a last step, add all weights calculated for the rear axle to the rear axle
load and add (or subtract) all weights calculated for the front axle to (from)
the front axle load.
How to determine rear axle load and front axle load is described in
section 4.3.2.
If the calculated value exceeds the permissible axle load, the load must be dis-
tributed in a different way.
If the load on the front axle is too low, the grip of the tyres on the road is
reduced (traction). This applies in particular to vehicles with front wheel drive.
In this case, the load must be redistributed, too.
4.3.4 Roof load
Example 1 Example 2
Example calculation
Distance to the front axle A (A1) 450 (cm) (A2) 250 (cm)
Weight in the storage compartment G x 100 (kg) x 50 (kg)
Wheelbase of the vehicle R ÷ 325 (cm) ÷ 325 (cm)
Load on the rear axle
(add to the axle load)
138.5 (kg) 38.5 (kg)
Weight in the storage compartment - 100 (kg) - 50 (kg)
Load relief to the front axle
(subtract from the axle load)
38.5 (kg)
Load on the front axle
(add to the axle load)
-11.5 (kg)
Access the roof only when a roof rail has been fitted. Always use the
ladder at the rear to climb onto the roof.
Take care when stepping onto the ladder. There is danger of slipping
when the ladder is moist or icy.
Take care when stepping onto the roof. There is danger of slipping when
the roof is moist or icy.
Do not overload the roof. Road behaviour and brake reaction deteriorate
as the roof load increases.
If the vehicle is equipped with a roof rail, load racks can be mounted on the
roof rail for roof loads (e.g. for surfboards, rubber boats or light canoes).
Special girder systems are available as accessory. The authorised dealer
or service centre will be happy to advise you.
The maximum permissible roof load is 100 kg.
32 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Before the journey
4
Rear ladder
Folding downwards:
Insert the key into the locking cylinder (Fig. 1,2) of the rear ladder lock
(Fig. 1,1) and turn it a quarter turn until the key is in a vertical position.
Hold the foldable part of the rear ladder (Fig. 1,4) and swing out the
securing bracket (Fig. 1,5).
Pull out the key and fold the rear ladder downwards.
Folding upwards:
Fold the rear ladder upwards and hold it firmly.
Insert the key into the locking cylinder (Fig. 1,2) of the rear ladder lock
(Fig. 1,1).
Swivel the securing bracket (Fig. 1,5) inward around the tube of the fixed
part of the rear ladder (Fig. 1,3).
Turn the key a quarter turn until it is in a horizontal position.
Check the rear ladder lock: Slightly pull on the rear ladder.
4.3.5 Rear garage/rear storage space
The vehicle roof is not suitable for localised load. Before stepping on to the
roof, extensively cover the area you will be treading on. Materials with a
smooth or soft surface are suitable, for example, a thick polystyrene panel.
Secure roof loads with tension belts. Do not use rubber expanders.
Observe the overall height of the vehicle when the roof rack is loaded.
The driver's cabin should have a clearly visible notice stating the overall
height. This eliminates the need for calculations at bridges and thorough-
fares.
Fig. 1 Rear ladder lock
Observe the permissible axle loads and maximum permissible gross
weight when loading the rear garage/the rear storage space.
Depending on the model, the maximum permissible load for the rear
garage / rear storage space is between 150 kg and 250 kg. Do not
exceed the permissible rear axle load.
Observe: If the rear garage or (depending on the model) the rear storage
space is loaded to its maximum capacity, this will reduce the load on
the front axle due to the levering action. The driving quality is impaired.
33Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Before the journey
4
Moving the clamping
eyelets:
Turn the clamping eyelet (Fig. 2,1) half a turn in an anticlockwise direction.
Push the clamping eyelet into the clamping rail (Fig. 2,2) to the desired
position.
Give clamping eyelet one half turn in a clockwise direction. The clamping
eyelet sits tightly in the clamping rail again.
Check that the clamping eyelet is tight.
4.3.6 Double floor
4.3.7 Sliding drawer
Depending on the vehicle equipment, clamping rails with clamping eyelets
are mounted in the rear garage or in the rear storage space. Always secure
loads onto the clamping eyelets. Always use tightening straps or lashing
nets for securing the load, never rubber expanders.
When clamping loads, always check that the clamping eyelets are placed
tightly in the clamping rails. If the clamping eyelet is not anchored tightly in
the clamping rail, the load may slide or loosen during forcible movements
of the steering wheel or when braking.
Distribute the load evenly. Excessive spot loads can lead to damages of
the floor covering.
Fig. 2 Clamping eyelets rear garage
1 Clamping eyelet
2 Clamping rail
Observe the permissible axle loads and maximum permissible gross
weight when loading the double floor.
Distribute the load evenly. Excessive spot loads can lead to damages of
the floor covering.
Do not place loads weighing more than 40 kg into the sliding drawer.
34 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Before the journey
4
4.3.8 Bike rack
Loading the bike rack with
bicycles
When loading the bike rack, observe the centre of gravity. The centre of gravity
of the bicycles must be as close as possible to the rear wall of the vehicle. The
bike rack should always be loaded from the inside to the outside.
Loading the bike rack correctly:
Depending on the model, fold the bike rack down or pull it out.
Place the heaviest bicycle directly against the rear wall.
Place the lightest bicycles in the centre or on the outside of the bike rack.
Secure the front and rear wheels of each bicycle with the retaining straps
on the bike rack.
In addition, fasten the outermost bicycle depending on the model of the
bike rack on the retaining clip or the retaining bracket and to the spacer
respectively.
If the bike rack is only loaded with one bicycle, position the bicycle as closely
as possible to the rear wall.
4.3.9 Load rack, extendable
Observe the permissible axle loads and maximum permissible gross
weight when loading the bike rack.
Bicycles may not jut out beyond the maximum width of the vehicle.
Adjust the attachments for the bikes accordingly.
Load the bike rack with bicycles only (max. four units).
Check the secure attachment of the bicycles on the bike rack after the
first 10 km and then at each break in the journey.
The identification plate and rear lights must not be covered.
Driving with a folded out bike rack without bicycles is not permitted.
Before every journey, check:
Is the bike rack without bicycles folded in correctly?
Are the bicycles securely fastened to the bike rack using the bike rack
belts?
Do not exceed the rear axle load.
Heavy loads behind the rear axle can reduce the load on the front axle
due to the leverage effect ( ). This applies especially to long rear
extensions, if a motorbike is transported on the rear carrier or if there is
a heavy load in the rear storage space. The release of the front axle neg-
atively affects the driving quality, especially for front-driven vehicles.
Always make sure to store the load roadworthy and secure it against
falling.
The load may not jut out beyond the maximum width of the vehicle. The
lighting and the official licence plate on the load rack may not be covered
by the load.
Always push in and secure the load rack after use.
35Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Before the journey
4
The load rack permits transport of a load (e.g. a motor scooter or up to four
bicycles) weighing up to 150 kg.
Different attachments are available to transport the load. Our authorised
dealers and service centres will be happy to advise you.
Pulling out: Turn the spring latch (Fig. 3,1) on both sides half a turn and allow to engage
in the locking position (Fig. 3).
Pull load rack (Fig. 3,2) out straight as far as it will go.
Turn the spring latch on both sides back half a turn and allow to engage
(Fig. 4).
Loosen knurled screws (Fig. 5,2) on both sides.
Fold up lamp holder (Fig. 5,1).
Retighten the knurled screws.
Connect the electrics between the load rack and the vehicle.
Pushing in:
Disconnect the electrics between the load rack and the vehicle.
Loosen knurled screws (Fig. 5,2) on both sides.
Fold in lamp holder (Fig. 5,1).
Retighten the knurled screws.
The load rack and caravan coupling may not be used simultaneously.
The load rack has a EG type approval number.
Observe the country-specific regulations.
Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.
Fig. 3 Lock on extension, released Fig. 4 Lock on extension, locked
Fig. 5 Lamp holder lock
36 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Before the journey
4
Turn the spring latch (Fig. 4,2) on both sides half a turn and allow to engage
in the locking position (Fig. 3).
Push load rack (Fig. 4,1) in straight as far as it will go.
Turn the spring latch on both sides back half a turn and allow to engage.
4.4 Towing
4.5 Entrance step
Care is to be taken when connecting and detaching a trailer. Risk of acci-
dent and injury!
No persons are to be between the towing vehicle and the trailer during
positioning for connecting and detaching.
Observe the permissible nose weight and rear axle load of the towing
vehicle. Nose weight and rear axle load must not be exceeded. The
values of the nose weight and rear axle load are included in the docu-
ments of the vehicle and the caravan coupling.
Trailer with an overrun brake: Do not connect or detach trailer with the
overrun brake on.
Caravan coupling with detachable ball neck: If the ball neck is mounted
incorrectly, there is the danger of the trailer breaking away. Observe the
instruction manual for the caravan coupling.
Before commencing the journey and after short interruptions of the
journey, ensure that the entrance step is completely retracted.
Do not stand in the direct range of the entrance step while it is being
retracted or extended.
Do not step on the entrance step until it has extended completely. There
is a risk of injury.
Do not under any circumstances raise or lower persons or loads with the
entrance step.
Take note of the different step heights and make certain that the ground is
firm and even when exiting.
Do not grease or lubricate the pivot bearing and joints of the entrance step
(see chapter 12).
37Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Before the journey
4
4.5.1 Mechanically operated entrance step
Pulling out: Pull the entrance step forwards (Fig. 6,2) until it latches into place.
Pushing in:
Slightly lift the entrance step (Fig. 6,1).
Push the entrance step as far as it will go under the base of the vehicle
(Fig. 6,3). Ensure that the entrance step latches in place (Fig. 6,4).
4.5.2 Electrically operated entrance step
Before stepping on the entrance step, fully extend it (Fig. 7).
Operating switch The switch to operate the entrance step is located on the inside of the vehicle
in the area of the conversion door.
If the entrance step has not been properly retracted and locked into place,
a warning tone is heard when the ignition is switched on.
Fig. 6 Mechanically operated
entrance step
If the entrance step has not been properly retracted and locked into place,
a warning tone is heard when the ignition is switched on.
Follow the warning notice on the entrance step.
Fig. 7 Warning notice for entrance
step
38 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Before the journey
4
Extending: Press the rocker switch (Fig. 8,1) down until the entrance step has
extended completely.
Retracting:
Press the rocker switch (Fig. 8,1) up until the entrance step has retracted
completely.
Emergency operation If the electric drive of the entrance step fails, follow the directions below to
manually retract the entrance step:
Pull out the securing splint from the connection to the engine.
Release the rectangular connection to the engine using a suitable object
(e.g. a screwdriver).
Push in the entrance step by hand and secure it using a suitable device
(e.g. a string).
Contact customer service.
4.6 PVC-floor covering
4.7 Television
Fig. 8 Operating switch entrance
step
Shoes with pointed heels can leave permanent impressions in the PVC-
floor covering. Never wear shoes with pointed heels in the vehicle.
Rubber mats or long exposure to ketchup, carrot juice, ink, blood or lipstick
can discolour the PVC-floor covering. If possible, remove stains from the
floor immediately.
Before commencing the journey, remove the television from the support
and store it securely.
Before commencing the journey, place and secure the flat screen and
screen support in the initial position. If the screen holder is installed in a
TV cabinet: Close TV cabinet.
Before commencing the journey, ensure that the antenna is in park posi-
tion. Danger of accidents! Park position means: The antenna points
towards the back, is fully lowered and is locked in this position.
Further information on positioning the flat screen can be obtained from
chapter 7.
39Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Before the journey
4
Storing the television in the
TV cabinet:
Rotate the television to its initial position (Fig. 9) and lock it into place.
Use handle (Fig. 9,1) to push the holder for the flat screen backwards. The
latch (Fig. 9,2) will engage.
Close TV cabinet.
4.8 Snow chains
The use of snow chains is subject to the legal regulations of the individual
countries.
Always mount snow chains to the drive wheels.
After a few metres, check the tension of the snow chains.
4.9 Road safety
Fig. 9 Television (flat screen) Fig. 10 Alternative: Television (flat
screen)
Only mount snow chains if there is a clearance of at least 50 mm between
the tyres and the vehicle body.
When using snow chains, the tyres, wheel suspension and steering are
subjected to an additional load. When using snow chains, drive slowly
(maximum speed 50 km/h) and only on streets which are completely cov-
ered with snow. Otherwise the vehicle could be damaged.
Observe the fitting instructions issued by the manufacturer of the snow
chains.
Only use snow chains approved by the manufacturer.
Do not fit snow chains on alloy wheel rims.
If the drive axle of the vehicle has twin tyres (2 tyres next to each other),
mount the the snow chains to the outer tyres.
For vehicles manufactured by Ford with front-wheel drive: Snow chains are
only permitted if tyres of the size 195/75 R16 are mounted.
Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre
pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre
burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.
40 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Before the journey
4
Before commencing the journey, work through the checklist:
No. Checks Checked
Base vehicle
1 All vehicle documents are on board
2 Tyres in proper condition
3 Vehicle lighting, brake lights and reversing lights function
4 Oil levels for engine, gearbox and power steering controlled
5 Coolant and fluid for windscreen washers filled up
6 Brakes function
7 Brakes react evenly
8 When braking, the vehicle remains in the lane
Housing body, outside
9 Awning completely retracted
10 Roof free of snow and ice (in winter)
11 External connections and lines disconnected and stored away
12 External supports removed
13 Fitted steady legs retracted and fixed in place
14 Wheel chocks removed and stored away
15 Entrance step retracted (observe warning tone)
16 External flaps closed and locked
17 Conversion door locked
18 Overall height of the vehicle including roof rack when loaded
measured and noted. Keep the height information close at
hand in the driver's cabin
Housing body, inside
19 Windows and skylights closed and locked
20 Television secured in the TV cabinet or removed from the sup-
port and stored securely
21 Television antenna retracted (if one is built in)
22 Loose parts stored away or fixed in position
23 Open storage spaces empty
24 No gas cartridges or other easily flammable materials stored in
the roof cupboard of the awning light
25 Refrigerator door secured
26 Refrigerator set to 12 V operation
27 All drawers and flaps closed
28 Living area doors and sliding doors secured
29 Pull-down bed secured
30 Swivel seat locking device for driver's seat and front passen-
ger's seat locked
31 Children's seats mounted to seats with three-point safety belts
32 Shades in the driver's cabin opened and secured
41Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Before the journey
4
Gas system
33 Gas bottles firmly fixed in the gas bottle compartment so that
they are unable to turn
34 Protective cap set on top of the gas bottle
35 Regulator tap on the gas bottle and gas isolator taps are
closed
Electrical system
36 Check the battery voltage of the starter and living area battery
(see chapter 9). If the panel indicates that the battery voltage
is too low, the respective battery will need to be recharged.
Observe the notes and instructions in chapter 9
Commence journey with fully charged starter and
living area batteries.
No. Checks Checked
42 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Before the journey
4
43Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
During the journey
5
5During t he journey
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions on how to drive the motorhome.
The instructions address the following topics:
driving speed
brakes
seat belts
seats and headrests
the backrest adjustment mechanism for the bench
seating arrangement
branch block
electrical window winders
electrically adjustable external mirrors
Roman shades in the driver's cabin
writing and reading rest
bonnet
windscreen washer fluid container
checking the oil level
filling the tank
5.1 Driving the motorhome
The base vehicle is a commercial vehicle (small truck). Adjust your
driving technique accordingly.
Before commencing the journey and after short interruptions of the
journey, ensure that the entrance step is completely retracted.
During the journey, seat belts should always be worn at the seats that
have seat belts mounted.
Never open your seat belts when travelling.
Passengers must remain in the seats provided.
The doors must remain locked.
Avoid braking with a jerk.
If a navigation system is used, only change the destination when the
vehicle is stationary. Drive to a car park or stop in a safe area when
changing the destination.
Do not play DVDs using the monitor of the navigation system during the
journey.
Drive slowly on poor roads.
Take extreme care when driving onto ferries, crossing uneven roads and
driving in reverse. Because of the relatively large overhang, larger vehicles
might swing out and "touch ground" in unfavourable conditions. This can
cause damage to the underbody or to parts fitted there.
If an accident occurs as a result of these instructions not being observed,
the manufacturer will not be responsible for damages caused.
The safety measures stipulated in chapter 3 have to be observed.
If a reversing camera is installed in the vehicle, the camera is automatically
switched on when driving in reverse gear.
44 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
During the journey
5
5.2 Driving speed
5.3 Brakes
Before each journey Before each journey, check by means of a braking test:
Do the brakes function?
Do the brakes react evenly?
Does the vehicle remain in the lane when braking?
5.4 Seat belts
The vehicle is equipped with automatic three-point safety belts in the living
area on the seats for which seat belts are compulsory by law. National regula-
tions apply seat-belt fastening.
The vehicle is equipped with a powerful engine. This means there are
sufficient reserves in difficult traffic situations. This high power enables
a high maximum speed and requires above-average driving ability.
The vehicle provides a large contact surface for wind. A sudden cross-
wind can be especially dangerous.
Uneven or one-sided loading affects road performance.
Driving on unknown streets, you may encounter hazardous road condi-
tions and unexpected driving situations. Therefore, in the interest of
safety, make sure your driving speed is appropriate to any given driving
situation and environment.
Adhere to the national legal speed limits.
Have defects on the braking system immediately remedied by an author-
ised specialist workshop.
Avoid block brakings. Block braking gives the tyres "brake plates" of var-
ying strength. This reduces driving comfort. It might even make the tyres
unserviceable.
Fasten your seat belts before the beginning of the journey and keep
them fastened during the journey.
Do not damage or trap belts. Have damaged seat belts changed by an
authorised specialist workshop.
Do not alter the belt fixing devices, automatic seat belt winders and the
belt clips.
Inspect the screwed connections of the seat belts from time to time in
order to ensure that they are correctly seated.
Only use one seat belt for one adult person.
Do not belt in objects together with persons.
Seat belts are not sufficient for persons who are less than 150 cm tall. In
these cases use additional restraining devices. Observe test certificate.
Factory-set three-point safety belts must be used when attaching child
restraint systems.
45Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
During the journey
5
5.4.1 Fastening the seat belt correctly
The seat belt is fastened correctly when a fist can be passed between the body
and the seat belt.
5.4.2 Adjusting the seat belt correctly
Before setting off, adjust the seat belts so that the shoulder belt passes
between the neck and shoulder joint.
Adjusting the belt guide
downwards:
Firmly press down the belt column (Fig. 11,2) with both hands and then
release it.
The belt column remains at the desired height.
Adjusting the belt guide
upwards:
Press on the marked area (Fig. 11,1) of the cushion.
The lock releases itself. The belt column moves up.
Release the marked area when the desired height is reached.
The belt column remains at the desired height.
5.5 Driver's seat and front passenger's seat
After an accident, replace the seat belts.
During the journey, do not tilt the backrest too far backwards. Otherwise
the functionality of the seat belt is no longer guaranteed.
Do not twist the belt. The belt must be positioned smoothly against the
body.
When fastening the seat belt, adopt the correct sitting position.
The seat belts are not adjustable for all models.
Fig. 11 Seat belt, bench
Before commencing the journey, rotate all swivel seats in the direction
of travel and lock in position.
The seats must remain fixed in position during the journey and are not
to be rotated.
The driver's and front passenger's seat are a part of the base vehicle,
depending on model and vehicle equipment. In this case the adjustment of
the seats is described in the operating instructions of the base vehicle.
46 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
During the journey
5
5.5.1 Seats (Aguti)
Rotating seats into
driving position
The seats can be rotated in any direction. The seats can only be locked in posi-
tion in the direction of travel.
Push both armrests upward.
Push the driver's seat/front passenger's seat backwards or into the central
position.
Rotate the seat in the direction of travel and lock in position.
Adjusting the armrest The height of the armrests is infinitely adjustable.
Turn the knurled wheel (Fig. 12,2) in an anticlockwise direction (when
viewed from the front). The latch of the armrest is released by this.
Move the armrest to the desired position.
Turn the knurled wheel as far as possible in a clockwise direction.
Adjusting an appropriate
seating position
The position of the driver's and front passenger's seats can be adjusted. The
handles which are required for this purpose are positioned to the front, right or
left of the seat.
Pull the handle (Fig. 12,1). The seat can be moved forward or backward.
Turn the knurled knob (Fig. 12,4). The angle of the backrest can be
adjusted.
Fig. 12 Driver's and front passenger's
seats (Aguti)
1 Lengthways adjustment
2 Armrest adjustment
3 Rotating
4 Backrest adjustment mechanism
Rotating the seats in the pitched vehicle is described in chapter 7.
Move the seats all the way down before turning. Otherwise, the seats
cannot be turned.
47Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
During the journey
5
Adjusting the seat height Depending on the model, the height of the seat is infinitely adjustable.
Pull the lever (Fig. 13,1) upwards.
Take pressure off or apply pressure to seat. The seat moves up or down.
Release lever when the desired position is reached. The seat is locked.
5.5.2 Seats (ISRI)
Rotating seats into
driving position
The seats can be rotated in any direction. The seats can only be locked in posi-
tion in the direction of travel.
Push both armrests upward.
Push the driver's seat/front passenger's seat backwards or into the central
position.
Rotate the seat in the direction of travel and lock in position.
Adjusting the armrest The height of the armrests is infinitely adjustable.
For ease in handling, first move the armrest slightly upward.
For fine adjustments, turn the handwheel (Fig. 14,1) upwards or down-
wards.
Adjusting an appropriate
seating position
Both the height and the position of the driver's and front passenger's seats can
be adjusted. The handles which are required for this purpose are positioned to
the front, right or left of the seat.
Fig. 13 Seat height adjustment
Fig. 14 Driver's and front passenger's
seats (ISRI)
1 Armrest adjustment
2 Lengthways adjustment
3 Height adjustment
4Rotating
5 Backrest adjustment mechanism
Rotating the seats in the pitched vehicle is described in chapter 7.
48 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
During the journey
5
Pull the handle (Fig. 14,2). The seat can be moved forward or backward.
Pull the handle (Fig. 14,5). The angle of the backrest can be adjusted.
Pull the handle (Fig. 14,3). The seat can be lifted or lowered toward the
front.
5.6 Headrests
Before commencing the journey, adjust the headrests (Fig. 15,1) so that the
back of the head is supported at approximately ear height. Push the headrests
upwards or downwards by hand.
The backrest is under strong spring tension. If there is no resistance to
the backrest, it quickly moves forward after unlocking.
If the backrest quickly moves forward uncontrolled it can damage the seat-
belt lock.
The headrests are not adjustable for all models.
Fig. 15 Bench headrests
49Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
During the journey
5
5.7 Backrest adjustment mechanism for bench
The inclination of the backrest can be adjusted with the backrest adjustment
mechanism "Travel Lounge".
Pull or press the bar (Fig. 16,1) under the seat (Fig. 16,3) upwards and
hold it in this position.
Push the seat on the rails (Fig. 16,2) to the desired position or carefully pull
it forwards as far as it will go.
Let go of the bar and move the seat forwards or backwards slightly until the
seat can be heard to lock into place.
5.8 Seating arrangement
Seats which may be used during travel are equipped with a sticker (Fig. 17).
If the vehicle is equipped with the backrest adjustment, the bench cannot
be converted into a bed.
Fig. 16 Backrest adjustment mecha-
nism for bench
During the journey, persons are only to sit on the permitted seats. The
authorised number of seats is stipulated in the vehicle documents.
During the journey sitting on the divans is not permitted.
Seat belts must be worn by all passengers.
Fig. 17 "Seat" symbol
50 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
During the journey
5
5.9 Branch block (model I)
The sliding regulator (Fig. 18,2) for the branch block (Fig. 18,1) is located on
the outside left of the dashboard.
Vehicle heating is coupled with room heater by the sliding regulator. Therefore
the windscreen is heated when the vehicle is at a standstill.
During mobile operation, close the branch block (slide the sliding regulator all
the way down) so that the complete power of the vehicle heater can reach to
the front and side panes.
5.10 Electrical window winders (model I)
There is an electrical window winder (Fig. 19) on the driver's side of the
vehicle.
Opening:
Press lower part of the switch (Fig. 19,2).
Closing:
Press upper part of the switch (Fig. 19,1).
Fig. 18 Branch block
Remove hands and other objects from the window before closing.
Even if you leave your vehicle just briefly, remove the ignition key from
the steering lock. Otherwise children may be able to operate the window
winder and injure themselves.
Fig. 19 Switch for electrical window
winder
51Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
During the journey
5
5.11 Electrically adjustable external mirrors (model I)
Depending on the model, the vehicle is equipped with two electrically adjust-
able and heated external mirrors. The switches for external mirror adjustment
and the mirror heater are on the dashboard.
Adjusting:
Select the mirror to be adjusted. To do so, turn the rotary switch (Fig. 20,1)
to the left or right.
Adjust the mirror by pressing the switch (Fig. 20,1) in the appropriate direc-
tion.
Switching on the heater:
Press the switch (Fig. 20,2). The switch indicator lamp shows it is in oper-
ation.
5.12 Roman shades for windscreen, driver's window and
front passenger's window
Securing the Roman shade
for the windscreen:
Use the handle (Fig. 21,2 and Fig. 22,1) to pull the two halves of the
Roman shade for the windscreen outwards as far as they will go.
Push the locking knobs (Fig. 21,1) upward or downward. If the red dot is
visible, the lock is open.
Fig. 20 Switch for electrically adjust-
able external mirrors and
mirror heater
While travelling, the Roman shades for the windscreen, driver's window
and front passenger's window must be open, in a fixed position and
secured.
Fig. 21 Lock for the Roman shade of
the windscreen
Fig. 22 Lock for the Roman shade of
the windscreen (model I)
52 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
During the journey
5
Securing the Roman shade
for the driver's / front
passenger's window:
On the Roman shades for the driver's and passenger's window, push the
handle (Fig. 23,1) onto the cap. The Roman shade is secured.
5.13 Writing and reading rest
Depending on the model, the motorhome is equipped with a writing and
reading rest (Fig. 24).
5.14 Bonnet
Fig. 23 Locking mechanism for Roman
shades on driver's/front pas-
senger's windows
During the journey the writing and reading rest must be closed.
If there is a passenger airbag, the writing and reading rest is locked so it
cannot be opened.
Fig. 24 Writing and reading rest
When the bonnet is open, there is a risk of injury in the engine compart-
ment.
Even if the engine was switched off some time ago, it might still be hot.
Danger of burns!
Do not work in the engine compartment while the engine is running.
The bonnet must be kept firmly closed and locked during the journey.
After closing, check whether the lock has engaged. In order to carry this
out, pull on the bonnet.
53Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
During the journey
5
5.14.1 Model I
Opening: Pull the lever (Fig. 25,1) situated on the left-hand side of the vehicle on the
dashboard. The bonnet opens as far as the safety hook allows.
Reach under the bonnet with one hand and actuate the safety hook
(Fig. 26,1). Do this by reaching behind the plate (Fig. 26,2) and pulling it
forward.
Move the bonnet in an arch forwards and upwards.
Closing:
Move the bonnet in an arch downwards and backwards until the latch locks
audibly in place.
Check whether the bonnet is locked correctly. In order to carry this out, pull
on the bonnet.
5.14.2 Fortero, Van
Opening: Insert the ignition key (Fig. 27,3) in the locking cylinder (Fig. 27,1) in the
radiator grille (Fig. 27,2).
Press in the ignition key and turn it one quarter turn in an anticlockwise
direction. The bonnet is unlatched.
Turn the ignition key back in a clockwise direction past the central position.
The bonnet is open and swings upward.
Turn the ignition key back to the central position (Fig. 27) and remove it.
Closing:
Move the bonnet downwards until the catch lock engages audibly.
Check whether the bonnet is locked correctly. In order to carry this out, pull
on the bonnet.
Fig. 25 Release knob on the inside of
the bonnet
Fig. 26 Release knob on the outside of
the bonnet
Fig. 27 Bonnet release mechanism
Fortero, Van
54 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
During the journey
5
5.15 Filliing with washer fluid (model I)
Unlock and open the bonnet.
Remove the lid (Fig. 28,1) from the filler neck of the washer fluid container.
Slowly fill in washer fluid.
Push the lid onto the filler neck of the washer fluid container.
5.16 Checking the oil level (model I)
The oil dipstick (Fig. 29,1) is located behind the front crossbeam. The oil dip-
stick is marked in red.
5.17 Filling up with diesel
The fuel filler neck is situated on the exterior of the vehicle, at the front left.
Fig. 28 Washer fluid container filler
neck
Fig. 29 Oil dipstick (I model)
1Oil dipstick
No appliance operated by a naked flame (e.g. heater or refrigerator) may
be in operation when filling the tank, on ferries or in the garage. Danger
of explosion!
The cap for the fuel filler neck and for the drinking water filler neck are
very similar. Before filling the tank, always check the label.
The fuel filler neck is labelled with the word "Diesel".
55Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
During the journey
5
Opening: Insert the key in the locking cylinder (Fig. 30,1) and turn it in an anticlock-
wise direction.
Remove cap.
Closing:
Place the cap on the fuel filler neck.
Turn key in a clockwise direction.
Remove the key.
Check that the cap is fastened securely on the fuel filler neck.
Fig. 30 Cap for the fuel filler neck
56 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
During the journey
5
57Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Pitching the motorhome
6
6Pitching the motorhome
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions on how to pitch the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
handbrake
entrance step
wheel chocks
operation of the supports
240 V connection
refrigerator
6.1 Handbrake
Firmly apply the handbrake when parking the vehicle.
6.2 Entrance step
In order to exit the vehicle, first fully extend the entrance step.
6.3 Wheel chocks
When parking the vehicle on slopes or inclines use the wheel chocks.
If the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle exceeds 4 tonnes,
wheel chocks must be used when parking on gradients. The wheel chocks are
provided as standard for vehicles with a maximum permissible gross weight
exceeding 4 tonnes.
6.4 Supports
6.4.1 General instructions
Pitch the vehicle so that it is as horizontal as possible. Secure the vehicle
to prevent it from rolling.
Animals (especially mice) can cause great damage to the interior of the
vehicle. To prevent this from happening, regularly check the vehicle for
damages or animal traces after pitching.
If there is any risk of frost, release the handbrake every now and then and
apply it again. This will prevent it from freezing or rusting. Prior to releasing
the handbrake, secure the vehicle so that is cannot roll away.
Do not use the fitted supports as a vehicle jack. They supports are only for
stabilising the parked vehicle to prevent the rear axle from bottoming out.
When pitching the vehicle, ensure that the supports are evenly loaded.
Before driving away, wind up the supports as far as they can go, fully retract
and secure them.
When the ground is soft, place a pad or block under the supports in order
to prevent the vehicle from sinking into the ground.
58 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Pitching the motorhome
6
6.4.2 Steady legs (SAWIKO)
In order to ensure their correct function, clean and grease the interior tubes of
the steady legs regularly.
The length of the steady legs can be adjusted according to the model.
Extending:
Place the socket spanner on the hexagon nut (Fig. 31,1) and rotate until
the steady leg is in a perpendicular downward position.
If the length of the steady leg can be adjusted, remove the splint (Fig. 31,4)
out of the support foot extension (Fig. 31,5).
Pull out the support foot extension until it has reached the required length.
Insert the splint in the support foot extension.
Rotate the hexagonal nut until the steady leg rests completely on the
ground and the vehicle is in a horizontal position.
Retracting:
Place the socket spanner on the hexagon nut (Fig. 31,1) and rotate until
the steady leg is clear of the ground.
If the length of the steady leg can be adjusted, remove the splint (Fig. 31,4)
out of the support foot extension (Fig. 31,5).
Push in the support foot extension (Fig. 31,5) and insert the splint
(Fig. 31,4) in the drilled hole in the support foot extension.
Rotate the hexagonal nut (Fig. 31,1) until the steady leg has swung
upwards and the guide (Fig. 31,2) has reached the very end of the slot
(Fig. 31,3).
6.4.3 Steady legs (AL-KO)
In order to ensure their correct function, clean and grease the interior tubes of
the steady legs regularly.
The length of the steady legs can be adjusted according to the model.
Depending on the model, the hexagonal nut has a joint, which can be used
to bring the attached socket spanner into a more convenient position for
turning.
Fig. 31 Steady leg
Before commencing the journey, observe the following: Are all steady legs
and support foot extensions retracted completely and secured with the
splint?
Depending on the model, the hexagonal nut has a joint, which can be used
to bring the attached socket spanner into a more convenient position for
turning.
59Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Pitching the motorhome
6
Extending: Place the socket spanner on the hexagon nut (Fig. 32,1) and rotate until
the steady leg is in a perpendicular downward position.
Remove the splint (Fig. 32,4) out of the support foot extension (Fig. 32,5).
Extend the support foot extension until it has reached the required length.
Insert the splint in the support foot extension.
Rotate the hexagonal nut until the steady leg rests completely on the
ground and the vehicle is in a horizontal position.
Retracting:
Place the socket spanner on the hexagon nut (Fig. 32,1) and rotate until
the steady leg is clear of the ground.
Remove the splint (Fig. 32,4) out of the support foot extension (Fig. 32,5).
Push in the support foot extension (Fig. 32,5) and insert the splint
(Fig. 32,4) in the drilled hole in the support foot extension.
Rotate the hexagonal nut (Fig. 32,1) with the socket spanner until the
steady leg has swung upwards and the guide disc (Fig. 32,3) has com-
pletely retracted into the notch (Fig. 32,2).
6.5 240 V connection
The vehicle can be connected to a 240 V power supply (see chapter 9).
6.6 Refrigerator
The 12 V operation of the refrigerator is only possible when the vehicle engine
is running. When the vehicle engine is switched off, switch the refrigerator to
240 V operation or gas operation.
Fig. 32 Steady leg
Before commencing the journey, observe the following: Are all steady legs
and support foot extensions retracted completely and secured with the
splint?
60 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Pitching the motorhome
6
61Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7Living
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions about living in the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
opening and closing the doors and external flaps
ventilation of the vehicle
opening and closing the windows and blinds
opening and closing the skylights
rotating the seats
modifying the table surfaces
converting tables
positioning the television
adjusting the halogen spotlights
light switches
extending the seating groups
use of the beds
7.1 Doors
7.1.1 Conversion door, outside
Opening: Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 33,1) and turn until the door lock is
unlatched.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
Pull on the handle (Fig. 33,2). The door is open.
Only drive with locked doors.
Locking the doors can prevent them from opening of their own accord, e.g.
during an accident.
Locked doors also prevent forced entry, e.g. when waiting at traffic lights.
However, in an emergency, locked doors make it more difficult for helpers
to enter the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always lock the doors.
Depending on the model, the locks of the driver's and the front passenger's
doors are part of the base vehicle. In this case, the opening and closing of
the driver's door and the front passenger's door is described in the oper-
ating manual of the base vehicle.
Fig. 33 Door lock of conversion door,
outside
62 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
Locking: Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 33,1) and turn until the door lock is
engaged.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
7.1.2 Conversion door, outside (with recessed handle)
Opening: Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 34,1) and turn until the door lock is
unlatched.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
Pull on the handle (Fig. 34,2). The door is open.
Locking:
Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 34,1) and turn until the door lock is
engaged.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
7.1.3 Conversion door, outside (Hartal)
Opening: Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 35,2) and turn until the door lock is
unlatched.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
Pull on the handle (Fig. 35,1). The door is open.
Locking:
Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 35,2) and turn until the door lock is
engaged.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
Fig. 34 Door lock of conversion door,
outside
Fig. 35 Door lock of conversion door,
outside
63Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.1.4 Conversion door, inside (with knob)
Opening: Turn the knob in an anticlockwise direction (Fig. 36,1). The door lock is
unlatched.
Locking:
Turn the door knob approx. 45° in a clockwise direction (Fig. 36,2) and
leave in this position (Fig. 37).
7.1.5 Conversion door, inside (with locking lever)
Opening: Pull on the handle (Fig. 38,1). The door lock is unlatched. The locking lever
(Fig. 38,2) jumps out automatically.
Locking:
Press the locking lever (Fig. 38,2).
Fig. 36 Door lock of conversion door,
inside, open
Fig. 37 Door lock of conversion door,
inside, locked
Fig. 38 Door lock of conversion door,
inside
64 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.1.6 Conversion door, inside (Hartal)
Opening: Pull on the handle (Fig. 39,1). The door lock is unlatched.
Locking:
Turn the safety knob (Fig. 39,2) in a clockwise direction.
7.1.7 Driver's door, outside
Opening: Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 40,1) and turn until the door lock is
unlatched.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
Pull on the handle (Fig. 40,2). The door is open.
Locking:
Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 40,1) and turn until the door lock is
engaged.
Return the key to the central position and remove it.
Fig. 39 Door lock of conversion door,
inside
Fig. 40 Door lock of driver's door, out-
side
65Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.1.8 Driver's door, inside
Opening: Pull on the handle (Fig. 41,2). The door lock is unlatched. The locking lever
(Fig. 41,1) jumps out automatically.
Locking:
Press the locking lever (Fig. 41,1).
7.1.9 Insect screen door, can be folded out
An insect screen door is integrated in the conversion door. The insect screen
door can be opened outward. In the process the conversion door stays open.
Extending:
Fully open the conversion door and fix to the exterior wall.
Depending on the model, turn the latch (Fig. 42,1 or Fig. 43,3) a quarter
turn or push it back.
Open the insect screen door.
Push rail (Fig. 43,1) in the direction of the arrow for stabilisation.
Fully close insect screen door and push latch (Fig. 43,3) in the direction of
the arrow.
Retracting:
Unlatch insect screen door. To do this, push the latch (Fig. 43,3) in the
opposite direction of the arrow.
Open insect screen door.
Push rail (Fig. 43,1) in the opposite direction of the arrow.
Fold in the insect screen door. The latching (Fig. 43,2) engages.
Press the insect screen door on the conversion door and, depending on the
model, (Fig. 42,1 or Fig. 43,3) turn the latch one quarter turn or slide it into
the holder on the frame.
Fig. 41 Door lock of driver's door,
inside
Fig. 42 Insect screen door, closed Fig. 43 Insect screen door, opened out
66 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.1.10 Insect screen on the conversion door, extendable
Closing: Pull out the insect screen completely by the bar (Fig. 44,1).
Opening:
Push the insect screen into its initial position by the bar (Fig. 44,1).
7.1.11 Window of conversion door (Hartal)
The conversion door window is fitted with a Roman shade.
Closing:
Grip the Roman shade (Fig. 45,2) in the middle of the bar (Fig. 45,1), pull
it upwards and then release it at the desired height. The Roman shade will
stay at this height.
Opening:
Grip the Roman shade in the middle of the bar and push it down.
Open the insect screen completely before closing the conversion door.
Fig. 44 Insect screen
Fig. 45 Roman shade
67Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.2 External flaps
The external flaps fitted to the vehicle are all fitted with identical locking cylin-
ders. Therefore, all locks can be opened with a single key.
7.2.1 Flap lock with recessed handle
Opening: Insert key into locking cylinder (Fig. 46,1) and turn a quarter turn. The flap
lock is unlatched.
Remove the key.
Pull on the lock handle (Fig. 46,2). The external flap is open.
Closing:
Firmly close the external flap.
Insert key into locking cylinder and turn a quarter turn. The flap lock is
locked.
Remove the key.
7.2.2 Flap lock, elliptical-shaped
Before commencing the journey, close all external flaps and lock them.
To open and close the external flap, open or close all locks that are fitted
to the external flap.
When leaving the vehicle, close all external flaps.
To open the external flap, pull all the lock handles fitted to that particular
external flap at the same time.
Fig. 46 Flap lock with recessed handle
During rain, water can penetrate the opened flap lock. Therefore close the
lock handle.
68 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
Opening: Insert key into locking cylinder (Fig. 47,1) and turn a quarter turn in an anti-
clockwise direction. The lock handle (Fig. 47,2) snaps out.
Remove the key.
Turn lock handle one quarter turn in an anticlockwise direction. The flap
lock is open.
Closing:
Firmly close the external flap.
Turn lock handle in a clockwise direction until it is horizontal. The flap lock
is now engaged but not locked.
Insert key into locking cylinder.
Press down lock handle with key inserted and turn key a quarter turn in a
clockwise direction. The lock handle will stay bolted.
Remove the key.
7.2.3 Sliding drawer
Opening: Open the flap lock (Fig. 48,2) as described above.
Pull out the sliding drawer.
Loosen the tension belts (Fig. 48,1).
Fig. 47 Flap lock, elliptical-shaped,
closed
Do not place loads weighing more than 40 kg into the sliding drawer.
Always fasten the boxes with the tension belts before commencing the
journey.
Fig. 48 Sliding drawer
69Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.3 Ventilation
Condensation Ensure that there is a continuous exchange of air by providing frequent and
efficient ventilation. This is the only method for ensuring that condensation and
resulting mould is not formed during cool weather. During the colder season,
a pleasant living climate is created if heating output, air distribution and venti-
lation are synchronized. To avoid draft close the air outlet nozzles on the dash-
board and set the air distribution of the base vehicle to air circulation.
If the vehicle is laid up for a longer period, occasionally ventilate it well, espe-
cially in summer as heat accumulation can occur. Do not only air the interior,
but also the storage compartments which are accessible from the outside. Air
the parking place as well if the vehicle is parked in a closed space (e.g.
garage). The occurrence of condensation could lead to the formation of mould.
7.4 Windows
The oxygen in the vehicle interior is used up by breathing and the use of
gas operated appliances. That is why the oxygen needs to be replaced
on a constant basis. For this purpose, forced ventilation options (e.g.
skylights with forced ventilation, mushroom-shaped vents or floor vents)
are fitted to the vehicle. Never cover or block forced ventilations from the
inside or outside with objects such as e.g. a winter mat. Keep forced ven-
tilations clear of snow and leaves. There is a danger of suffocation due
to increased CO
2
levels.
Although sufficient ventilation is provided, in certain weather conditions,
condensation can form on metal objects (e.g. screwed connections in the
floor).
Additional cold spots can occur at thermal "bridges" (e.g. mushroom-
shaped vents, skylight edges, sockets, filler necks, flaps, etc.).
The windows are fitted with a blind or Roman shade and with an insect
screen or folding insect screen. After the latch has been released, the blind
and insect screen automatically spring back to the initial position by tensile
force. In order not to damage the tension mechanics, hold onto the blind or
insect screen and allow it to slowly return to the initial position. The Roman
shade and folding insect screen are made of thin woven fabric. In order not
to damage the Roman shade or the insect screen, grasp the respective
handle and carefully return it to the initial position.
Do not keep blinds closed over a longer period of time as that can cause
increased material wear.
If the blind or the Roman shade is completely closed, exposure to direct
sunlight can cause heat to accumulate between the blind/the Roman shade
and the glass window. The window could be damaged. For that reason,
close the blind/Roman shade only 2/3 of the way in direct sunlight.
Before commencing the journey, close the windows.
Depending on the weather, close the windows far enough to prevent mois-
ture from entering.
To open and close the hinged window, open or close all catch levers which
are fitted to the hinged window.
70 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.4.1 Sliding window with lock
Opening: Pull out the lock (Fig. 49,1).
Press handle (Fig. 49,2) and push it forward or backward at the same time.
Open window half up to the required position.
Closing:
Close the window as far as it can go.
Push in the lock.
7.4.2 Sliding window without lock
Opening: Press handle (Fig. 50,1) and push or pull it forward or backward at the
same time.
Open window half up to the required position.
Closing:
Close the window as far as possible and let the handle lock in place.
7.4.3 Hinged window with rotary hinges
When leaving the vehicle, always close the windows.
In extreme weather conditions or if the temperature fluctuates strongly, a
light condensation film can form on the double-glazed acrylic glass. The
glass is designed in such a way that condensation can evaporate when the
external temperature increases. There is no danger of the double-glazed
acrylic glass being damaged by condensation.
Fig. 49 Sliding window with slide lock
Fig. 50 Sliding window
When opening the hinged windows, ensure that there are no torsional
forces. Open and close the hinged windows evenly.
71Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
Opening: Turn the catch lever (Fig. 51,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the
window.
Open the hinged window until the required position has been reached and
use knurled knob (Fig. 52,1) to secure in position.
The hinged window remains locked in the required position.
Closing:
Turn knurled knob (Fig. 52,1) until the latch is released.
Close the hinged window.
Turn the catch lever (Fig. 51,3) a quarter turn towards the window frame.
The locking catch (Fig. 51,2) is located on the inside of the window catch
(Fig. 51,1).
Continuous ventilation With the catch lever, the hinged window can be placed in 2 positions:
"Continuous ventilation" (Fig. 53)
Firmly closed (Fig. 51)
To place the hinged window into the "continuous ventilation" position:
Turn the catch lever (Fig. 53,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the
window.
Lightly open the hinged window outwards.
Return the catch lever to its initial position. The locking catch (Fig. 53,2)
has to be moved into the recess of window catch (Fig. 53,1).
During the journey, the hinged window may not be in "continuous ventilation"
position.
If it rains, the "continuous ventilation" hinged window position could lead to
splashing water penetrating the living area. Therefore, close the hinged win-
dows completely.
Fig. 51 Catch lever in "closed" position Fig. 52 Hinged window with rotary
hinges, open
Fig. 53 Catch lever in the "continuous
ventilation" position
72 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.4.4 Hinged window with automatic hinges
Opening: Turn the catch lever (Fig. 54,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the
window.
Open the hinged window to the desired latched position. The automatic
hinge (Fig. 55,1) locks in place automatically.
The hinged window remains locked in the required position.
Closing:
Open the hinged window as wide as necessary until the latch releases.
Close the hinged window.
Turn the catch lever (Fig. 54,3) a quarter turn towards the window frame.
The locking catch (Fig. 54,2) is located on the inside of the window catch
(Fig. 54,1).
Continuous ventilation With the catch lever, the hinged window can be placed in two positions:
"Continuous ventilation" (Fig. 56)
Firmly closed (Fig. 54).
Open the window completely, to release the lock. If the locking device is
not released and the window is closed nevertheless, there is the danger of
the window breaking due to the massive counter-pressure.
When opening the hinged windows, ensure that there are no torsional
forces. Open and close the hinged windows evenly.
Fig. 54 Catch lever in "closed" position Fig. 55 Hinged window with automatic
hinges, open
Fig. 56 Catch lever in the "continuous
ventilation" position
73Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
To place the hinged window into the "continuous ventilation" position:
Turn the catch lever (Fig. 56,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the
window.
Slightly open the hinged window outwards.
Turn the catch lever a quarter turn towards the window frame. The locking
catch (Fig. 56,2) has to be moved into the recess of window catch
(Fig. 56,1).
During the journey, the hinged window may not be in "continuous ventilation"
position.
If it rains, the "continuous ventilation" hinged window position could lead to
splashing water penetrating the living area. Therefore, close the hinged win-
dows completely.
7.4.5 Blind and insect screen
The windows are fitted with a blind and an insect screen. The blind and insect
screen are adjusted separately.
Blind The blind is located in the upper blind box.
Closing:
Pull blind at the handle (Fig. 57,2) downwards. If the blind is to be com-
pletely closed, it is suspended into the locking devices (Fig. 57,3) situated
on both sides of the window frame.
Opening:
If the blind is completely closed: Press handle (Fig. 57,2) downwards and,
at the same time, tilt it slightly inward. The blind can be taken out of the
locking devices situated on both sides of the window frame.
If the blind is in an intermediate position: Pull the handle (Fig. 57,2) slightly
downwards until the locking device releases.
Use handle to return blind slowly to its initial position.
Insect screen The insect screen is located in the upper blind box.
Closing:
Pull insect screen at the handle (Fig. 57,1) down and hang it into the
locking devices (Fig. 57,3) situated on both sides of the window frame.
Open blinds before commencing the journey. When the blinds are closed,
vibrations can damage the spring shaft.
Fig. 57 Hinged window
74 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
Opening: Press handle (Fig. 57,1) downwards and, at the same time, tilt it slightly
inward. The insect screen can be taken out of the locking devices situated
on both sides of the window frame.
Use handle to return the insect screen slowly to its initial position.
7.4.6 Roman shade and insect screen
Roman shade The Roman shade (Fig. 58,3) is permanently connected to the insect screen
(Fig. 58,1).
Closing:
Hold the Roman shade in the centre of the bottom rod (Fig. 58,4) and care-
fully draw it downwards.
Release the Roman shade at the desired position. The Roman shade will
stay in that position.
Opening:
Slowly return the Roman shade to its initial position with the bottom rod
(Fig. 58,4).
Insect screen The insect screen is permanently connected to the Roman shade. When the
insect screen is opened, the Roman shade is opened along with it.
Closing:
Hold the insect screen at the centre of the bottom rod (Fig. 58,2) and care-
fully pull it downward as far as it goes.
Opening:
Slowly return the insect screen on the bottom rod of the Roman shade
(Fig. 58,4).
Fig. 58 Sunroof
75Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.4.7 Roman shades for windscreen, driver's window and front
passenger's window
Closing: On the Roman shade for the windscreen, push the locking knobs
(Fig. 59,1) upwards or downwards. If the red dot is visible, the lock is open.
Grasp the handle (Fig. 59,2 and Fig. 60,2) of the Roman shades and draw
carefully until the magnetic catch keeps the Roman shades closed.
Opening:
Using the handle, carefully push back the Roman shades.
On the Roman shade for the windscreen, push the locking knobs upwards
or downwards. As long as the red dot is visible, the lock is open.
On the Roman shades for the driver's and passenger's window, push the
handle (Fig. 60,2) onto the cap (Fig. 60,1). The Roman shade is secured.
7.5 Skylights
Depending on the model, skylights with or without forced ventilation are fitted
to the vehicle. If a skylight is fitted without forced ventilation, the forced venti-
lation is performed using mushroom-shaped vents.
Fig. 59 Roman shade for the wind-
screen
Fig. 60 Roman shades for driver's
window and front passenger's
window
The apertures for forced ventilation must always be kept open. Never
cover or block forced ventilations with objects such as e.g. a winter mat.
Keep forced ventilations clear of snow and leaves.
The skylights are fitted with a blind or Roman shade and with an insect
screen or folding insect screen. After the latch has been released, the blind
and insect screen automatically spring back to the initial position by tensile
force. In order not to damage the tension mechanics, hold onto the blind or
insect screen and allow it to slowly return to the initial position. The Roman
shade and folding insect screen are made of thin woven fabric. In order not
to damage the Roman shade or the insect screen, grasp the respective
handle and carefully return it to the initial position.
Do not keep blinds closed over a longer period of time as that can cause
increased material wear.
If the blind or the Roman shade is completely closed, exposure to direct
sunlight can cause heat to accumulate between the blind/the Roman shade
and the skylight. The skylight could be damaged. For that reason, close the
blind/Roman shade only 2/3 of the way in direct sunlight. Open the skylight
slightly or move it to ventilation position.
76 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.5.1 Skylight with snap latch (variant 1)
Depending on the model, there is a skylight built in with forced ventilation
(Fig. 61,1) in the living area and in the toilet compartment.
The skylight can be pushed upwards either from one side or from both sides.
Opening:
Pull on the handle (Fig. 62,2).
Fold insect screen (Fig. 62,1) downward.
Push the spring-loaded latch (Fig. 63,2) towards the inside of the skylight.
At the same time use the handle (Fig. 63,1) to press the skylight upwards.
Swing insect screen upwards (Fig. 62,1) until it latches in place.
Closing:
Pull on the handle (Fig. 62,2).
Fold insect screen (Fig. 62,1) downward.
Depending on the weather, close the skylights far enough to prevent mois-
ture from entering.
Do not climb on the skylights.
Before commencing the journey, close the skylights.
Before commencing the journey, check that the skylights are closed and
locked.
Before commencing the journey, open the blinds or Roman shades.
Apply talc to the rubber seals of the skylights at least once a year.
When leaving the vehicle, always close the skylights.
Fig. 61 Forced ventilation
Fig. 62 Insect screen Fig. 63 Skylight, handle
77Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
Using both handles (Fig. 63,1), pull down the skylight with force until the
two snap latches lock into place.
Swing insect screen upwards (Fig. 62,1) until it latches in place.
Blind To close and open the blind:
Closing:
Pull the blind (Fig. 64,1) using the handle (Fig. 64,2) and hook the hooks
(Fig. 64,3) in the opening (Fig. 64,4).
Opening:
Pull the hooks (Fig. 64,3) out of the opening (Fig. 64,4) and guide the blind
back.
7.5.2 Skylight with snap latch (variant 2)
The skylight can be pushed upwards either from one side or from both sides.
Opening:
Pull down the insect screen (Fig. 65,2) with the handle (Fig. 65,1). The
insect screen folds down.
Press the skylight up using both handles (Fig. 65,3).
Fold up the insect screen and latch it in the frame (Fig. 65,4).
Closing:
Pull down the insect screen (Fig. 65,2) with the handle (Fig. 65,1). The
insect screen folds down.
Pull down the skylight with force using both handles (Fig. 65,3).
Fold up the insect screen and latch it in the frame (Fig. 65,4).
Fig. 64 Blind
Fig. 65 Skylight with snap latch
(variant 2)
78 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.5.3 Hinged skylight
The hinged skylight may be opened on one side only. Three inclination angles
and a ventilation position are available.
An extension hook is included as standard equipment.
Opening:
Turn the lever (Fig. 66,1 or Fig. 67,3) one quarter turn.
Grip lever and push hinged skylight upwards.
Closing:
Grip lever and pull hinged skylight downwards.
Turn the lever one quarter turn. The latch (Fig. 66,4) must slide into the
lower aperture (Fig. 66,3).
Locking in the ventilation
position:
Grip lever and pull hinged skylight downwards.
Turn the lever one quarter turn. The latch (Fig. 66,4) must slide into the
upper aperture (Fig. 66,2).
Roman shade The Roman shade may be closed at any position, either with the hinged sky-
light open or closed.
Closing:
Pull out Roman shade (Fig. 67,1) and release in the required position. The
Roman shade will stay in that position.
Opening:
Slowly push the Roman shade at the handle to its initial position.
Insect screen
Closing:
Pull insect screen (Fig. 67,2) out until it engages with the latch on the oppo-
site side.
Opening:
Slightly push up insect screen along the strip. The latch is released.
Slowly return insect screen into its initial position.
Fig. 66 Hinged skylight, lock Fig. 67 Hinged skylight
If it rains and the hinged skylight is in ventilation position, that could lead to
water penetrating the living area. Therefore close hinged skylight com-
pletely.
The insect screen may be damaged if it is closed with the hinged skylight
closed. Therefore only close the insect screen when the hinged skylight is
open.
79Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.5.4 Heki skylight (mini and midi)
The Heki skylight is opened on one side only.
Opening:
Press the safety knob (Fig. 68,2) and pull the bar (Fig. 68,1) down with both
hands.
Pull the bar (Fig. 69,1) in the guides (Fig. 69,2) to the rearmost position
(Fig. 69,3).
Closing:
Use both hands to push the bar (Fig. 69,1) slightly upwards.
Push the bar back in the guides.
Push the bar upwards with both hands until it is above the safety knob
(Fig. 68,2).
Ventilation position The Heki skylight can be put in two ventilation positions: Bad weather position
(Fig. 70,1) and central position (Fig. 70,2). Depending on the model, the sky-
light can be locked in the central position with the latch (Fig. 71,1).
Press the safety knob (Fig. 68,2) and pull the bar (Fig. 68,1) down with both
hands.
Pull the bar in the guides (Fig. 69,2) to the desired position.
Push the bar slightly upwards and into the selected guide (Fig. 70,1 or 2)
and lock if necessary.
Roman shade To close and open the Roman shade:
Closing:
Pull out Roman shade at the handle and release in the required position.
The Roman shade will stay in that position.
Fig. 68 Safety knob on the Heki sky-
light
Fig. 69 Heki skylight, guide
Fig. 70 Heki skylight in ventilation
position
Fig. 71 Ventilation position locking
mechanism
80 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
Opening: Slowly push the Roman shade at the handle to its initial position.
Insect screen To close and open the insect screen:
Closing:
Pull the insect screen by the handle to the opposite handle of the Roman
shade.
Opening:
Press the rear part of the handle of the insect screen. The latch is released.
Use handle to return the insect screen slowly to its initial position.
7.5.5 Wind-up skylight
The wind-up skylight can be opened using the manual crank.
Opening:
Rotate the hand crank (Fig. 72,2) until a resistance can be felt (max.
opening angle 70°).
Closing:
Rotate the hand crank until the wind-up skylight is closed. The wind-up sky-
light can be locked after rotating two or three more times.
Check the locking mechanism. To do so, press your hand against the
acrylic glass.
Roman shade The Roman shade can be closed in any position, as desired. If the Roman
shade is locked with the insect screen, the insect screen is also moved along
on closing the Roman shade.
Closing:
Pull the handle of the Roman shade (Fig. 72,3) and release in the desired
position. The Roman shade will stay in that position.
Opening:
Slowly push the Roman shade at the handle to its initial position.
Insect screen If the insect screen is locked with the Roman shade, the Roman shade is also
moved along on closing the insect screen.
Closing:
Pull insect screen at the handle (Fig. 72,1) to the opposite handle of the
Roman shade (Fig. 72,3) and allow to engage.
Opening:
Press the handle of the insect screen (Fig. 72,1) at the back upwards and
detach the insect screen from the Roman shade (Fig. 72,3).
Slowly push insect screen at the handle to its initial position.
Fig. 72 Wind-up skylight
81Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.6 Rotating seats
Depending on the model, the lever for turning the seats is located at the front
of the seat or on the left or right side.
Turning:
Push both armrests at the driver's/front passenger's seat upward.
Push the driver's seat/front passenger's seat backwards or into the central
position.
Push or pull the lever (Fig. 73,3 or Fig. 74,4) to turn the seat. The seat is
released from the locking device.
The seats can be rotated in any direction. The seats can only be locked in posi-
tion in the direction of travel.
7.7 Tables
7.7.1 Suspension table with fold-out leg
The suspension table size can be enlarged by inserting a table-top extension.
Before commencing the journey, rotate all swivel seats in the direction
of travel and lock in position. During the journey, the swivel seats must
remain locked in place in the direction of travel.
Setting the position of the seats and armrests is described in chapter 5.
Move the seats all the way down before turning. Otherwise, the seats
cannot be turned.
Fig. 73 Driver's and front passenger's
seats (Aguti)
Fig. 74 Driver's and front passenger's
seats (ISRI)
Depending on the model, different table-top extensions and fold-out legs
are used. Therefore the table can deviate from the type shown here. The
principle of the conversion is the same for all tables.
Fig. 75 Extend suspension table
82 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
Extending: Undo the knurled screws (Fig. 75,2).
Lift the table-top slightly and pull out it out as far as possible. The table
extension (Fig. 75,1) is fully extended.
Set down the table.
Insert the table-top extension in the table extension.
Lift the table-top slightly and push it back as far as possible.
Tighten the knurled screws.
Reducing size:
Undo the knurled screws (Fig. 75,2).
Slightly lift the front of the table-top and pull out.
Remove the table-top extension and store it securely.
Lift the table-top slightly and push it back as far as possible. The table
extension (Fig. 75,1) is fully retracted.
Set down the table.
Tighten the knurled screws.
The table's fold-out leg enables it to be used as a bed foundation.
Conversion to bed
foundation:
Lift the front of the table-top (Fig. 76,1) by approx. 45°.
Fold the lower part of the fold-out leg (Fig. 76,3) by 90°. Depending on the
model, pull the lower part of the fold-out leg down or push the release knob.
Press the release knob (Fig. 77,1) on the lock (Fig. 76,4).
Swivel the table-top approx. 45° upward and remove the table from the
retainer.
Depending on the model, insert both additional support legs (Fig. 76,2) into
the holders (Fig. 76,5) on the bottom side of the table.
Insert the table into the lower retainer and lock it.
Fig. 76 Bed foundation Fig. 77 Lock
83Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.7.2 Suspension table (bar seating group)
The suspension table size can be enlarged by pulling out a table-top exten-
sion.
Extending:
Loosen knurled screw (Fig. 78,1).
Pull out the table-top extension (Fig. 78,2) as far as possible (Fig. 79).
Guide table-top extension (Fig. 79,1) upwards in a circular movement. The
table-top extension lies flush with the table-top.
Reducing size:
Pull table-top extension (Fig. 79,1) away from the table-top as far as it will
go and press downwards against the resistance of the retaining springs.
The table-top extension moves downwards in a circular movement
(Fig. 79).
Push in the table-top extension as far as it will go.
Tighten knurled screw (Fig. 78,1).
The table's fold-out leg enables it to be used as a bed foundation.
Conversion to bed
foundation:
Slightly raise the front of the table-top (Fig. 80,1).
Unlock table leg (Fig. 80,3) at the hinge and fold it in.
Push the table-top approx. 45° upwards and remove holders (Fig. 80,4)
from the upper mounting rail.
Depending on the model, insert both additional support legs (Fig. 80,2) into
the holders (Fig. 80,5) on the bottom side of the table.
Attach suspension table to the lower mounting rail and rest it onto the table
leg hinge.
Fig. 78 Lock for table-top extension Fig. 79 Table-top extension
Fig. 80 Bed foundation
84 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.7.3 Swivel table for the round seating group
Fastening to the floor: Place the swivel table next to the holder (Fig. 81,3) or on the holder
(Fig. 82,2).
Place the bar (Fig. 81,2) with the securing bolt (Fig. 81,1) over the table
leg.
Move the bar and possibly also the swivel table in such a way that the
securing bolt (Fig. 81,1 or Fig. 82,1) can be screwed into the holder
(Fig. 81,3 or Fig. 82,2).
Screw the securing bolt into the holder and tighten firmly.
The swivel table's swivel mechanism enables it to be used as a bed founda-
tion.
Conversion to bed
foundation (swivel table with
clamp):
Push the handle (Fig. 83,2) upwards.
Swivel the table-top (Fig. 83,1) down with a circular movement until the
handle locks into place.
Conversion to bed
foundation (swivel table
without clamp):
Rotate the handle (Fig. 84,2) into the horizontal position.
Swivel the table-top (Fig. 84,1) downward in a circular movement.
Turn the handle back to the vertical position. The swivel mechanism is
locked.
Before commencing the journey, reduce the size of the swivel table and
secure it.
Fig. 81 Lock for swivel table with
clamp
Fig. 82 Lock for swivel table without
clamp
Fig. 83 Lock for swivel table with
clamp
Fig. 84 Lock for swivel table without
clamp
85Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.7.4 Fixed table (movable table-top)
The top of the fixed table can be moved both lengthways and crossways.
Moving in a lengthways
direction:
Loosen knurled screw (Fig. 85,1).
Move table-top (Fig. 85,2) to the desired position.
Retighten the knurled screw.
Moving in a crossways
direction:
Loosen knurled screw (Fig. 85,3).
Move table-top (Fig. 85,2) to the desired position.
Retighten the knurled screw.
The fixed table cannot be used as a bed foundation.
7.7.5 Fixed table
Fastening to the floor: Place the fixed table with the perforated plate (Fig. 86,2) on to the holder
(Fig. 86,3).
Move the fixed table in such a way that the securing bolt (Fig. 86,1) can be
screwed into the holder (Fig. 86,3).
Screw the securing bolt into the holder and tighten firmly.
Fig. 85 Fixed table
Lock the fixed table in position before commencing the journey.
Fig. 86 Locking mechanism for fixed
table
86 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
The table-top of the fixed table can be moved lengthways or folded to the side.
Moving in a lengthways
direction:
Loosen the fixing screws (Fig. 87,2 and 3).
Shift the table-top.
Lock the table-top with the fixing screws.
Folding the table-top to the
side:
Remove the fixing screw (Fig. 87,1).
Fold the table-top to the side.
Depending on the model, the table top of the fixed table can be enlarged.
Extending:
Undo the knurled screws (Fig. 87,2 and 3).
Pull the table top apart.
Insert the table-top extension (Fig. 88,1).
Push the table top back together.
Tighten the knurled screws.
Reducing size:
Undo the knurled screws (Fig. 87,2 and 3).
Pull the table top apart.
Remove the table-top extension (Fig. 88,1) and store it securely.
Push the table top back together.
Tighten the knurled screws.
7.7.6 Lift-off table for the round seating group
Fig. 87 Fixed table (from below)
Fig. 88 Extending the fixed table
The lift-off table is not secured to the floor. Before the journey, lower the lift-
off table to the top limit and secure to the benches with the straps provided.
87Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
The lift-off table's lifting mechanism permits it to be used as a bed foundation.
Conversion to bed
foundation:
Swivel the catch lever (Fig. 89,3) to the left. The lock is open.
Press the table-top (Fig. 89,2) in the middle downwards to the desired stop
limit (Fig. 89,1 or 4) and hold it down.
Swivel the catch lever (Fig. 89,3) to the right. The lift-off table is locked.
7.8 Television
Flat screen in the TV
cabinet
The flat screen is attached to a console in the TV cabinet.
Pulling the television
console forward:
Press the release knob (Fig. 90,5) and pull the holder for the flat screen for-
ward as far as possible by the handle (Fig. 90,4).
Swivelling the television
console:
Pull the release knob (Fig. 90,1) and swivel flat screen (Fig. 90,2) to the
desired position.
Loosen knurled screw (Fig. 90,3).
Set the desired angle for the flat screen and re-tighten the knurled screw.
Fig. 89 Lift-off table for the round
seating group
Before commencing the journey, remove the television from the support
and store it securely.
Before commencing the journey, place and secure the flat screen and
screen support in the initial position. If the screen holder is installed in a
TV cabinet: Close TV cabinet.
Before commencing the journey, ensure that the antenna is in park posi-
tion. Danger of accidents!
Fig. 90 TV cabinet
88 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
Flat screen with jointed
arm
The flat screen is fastened to a jointed arm.
Positioning the flat screen
with jointed arm:
Pull on the fabric strip (Fig. 91,3) to unlock the jointed arm (Fig. 91,2).
Swivel flat screen (Fig. 91,1) into the required position.
Take hold of the flat screen at the top and bottom edge with both hands and
set the desired angle of inclination.
7.9 Lamps
Turning spotlight: Grasp the housing (Fig. 92,2) and turn it.
The housing can be turned in different directions:
To the left and to the right
Up and down
Shifting spotlight:
Grasp the holder (Fig. 92,1).
Push spotlight along the rail system to desired position.
Fig. 91 Flat screen with jointed arm
Bulbs and light fittings can be extremely hot.
Allow the light bulbs and lamp holders to cool down before touching
them.
If the light is switched on or still hot, there must always be a safety dis-
tance of at least 30 cm between stores or curtains and flammable
objects. Fire hazard!
Fig. 92 Spotlight
89Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.10 Light switch
Depending on the model, there is a light switch for lighting the entrance at the
bottom of the entrance area (Fig. 93,1).
7.11 Extending the seating group
7.11.1 Extending the central seating group
Extend the table (Fig. 94,3) (see section 7.7).
Pull on the handle (Fig. 94,8) and open the flap (Fig. 94,4).
Fold up bench seat extension (Fig. 95,7) and wedge together with the flap
(Fig. 95,4).
Place the back cushions (Fig. 95,1) and the seat cushions (Fig. 95,2) on
the bench seat extension.
Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 95,6) between the seat cushions and
the exterior wall.
Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 95,5) between the back cushions and
the exterior wall.
The light switches have different layouts according to the model. The light
switches are located either directly on the corresponding lamp or next to
the lamp, e.g. in the vicinity of the seating group.
Fig. 93 Light switch for lighting
entrance
Fig. 94 Before extending
Fig. 95 After extending
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Table
4Flap
5 Additional cushion
6 Additional cushion
7 Bench seat extension
8 Handle
90 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.12 Beds
7.12.1 Overcab bed
Access ladder Always use the access ladder (Fig. 96,4) provided as standard to access the
overcab bed.
Attaching:
Attach the ladder with the rails to the holder (Fig. 96,5) on the alcove panel.
Safety net The safety net (Fig. 96,3) is stored as standard between the mattress and
slatted frame. Only use the safety net if persons are already in the alcove.
Setting up:
Fasten the retaining straps (Fig. 96,1) to the holders on the ceiling
(Fig. 96,2).
Folding mechanism Depending on the model, the overcab bed can be folded upwards. This sim-
plifies passage from driver's cabin to living area.
The maximum permitted overcab bed load is 200 kg.
Only use the overcab bed, if the safety net is set up.
Never allow small children to remain in the overcab bed without super-
vision.
But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age,
users should ensure that they cannot fall out of the overcab bed.
Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.
Do not load the overcab bed without mattress. The plastic mould part can
break!
Fig. 96 Overcab bed
91Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
Folding upwards: Lift the mattress forwards and set it down on the panel.
Fold the front of the overcab bed (Fig. 97,1) upwards. The overcab bed is
kept in the upper position by gas-pressure springs.
Folding downwards:
Pull overcab bed downwards.
If necessary, push the mattress behind the panel.
7.12.2 Pull-down bed (model I)
Preparing the driver's
cabin
Depending on equipment, the driver's and front passenger's seats have to be
adjusted in different ways before lowering the pull-down bed.
Variant 1 The seats of the central seating group in opposite direction to the direction of
travel are not equipped with headrests (no safety package).
Turn the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat to the direction of
vehicle travel, lock them in place and move them backwards.
Fold the backrest back.
Close the shade in the driver's cabin.
Fig. 97 Overcab bed, folded upwards
The maximum permitted pull-down bed load is 200 kg.
The pull-down bed is not to be used for the storage of luggage. When
the bed is not being used, only place the bed linen which is required for
two persons in it.
Before commencing the journey, secure the pull-down bed to the roof
using the retaining belt. Tighten the retaining belt firmly.
Only use the pull-down bed, if the safety net is set up.
Never allow small children to remain in the pull-down bed without super-
vision.
But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age,
users should ensure that they cannot fall out of the pull-down bed.
Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.
Switch off the reading lamps on the underside of the pull-down bed when
the bed is lowered. Fire hazard!
Switch off the reading lamps in the pull-down bed before the bed is
pushed up. Fire hazard!
Depending on the seat model, the backrest is under strong spring ten-
sion. If there is no resistance to the backrest in these seats, it quickly
moves forward after unlocking.
92 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
Variant 2 The seats of the central seating group in opposite direction to the direction of
travel are equipped with headrests (safety package). The headrests on
driver's and front passenger's seats can be removed.
Remove the headrests.
Turn the driver's seat to the direction of travel, lock it in place and move it
backwards.
Fold the backrest of the passenger's seat back.
Push the front passenger's seat forwards and fold the backrest back com-
pletely.
Turn the front passenger's seat in the opposite direction to the direction of
travel, so that the pull-down bed can be lowered.
Close the shade in the driver's cabin.
Variant 3 The seats of the central seating group in opposite direction to the direction of
travel are equipped with headrests (safety package). The headrests on
driver's and front passenger's seats can not be removed.
Push the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat forwards and fold the
backrest back completely.
Turn the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat in the opposite direc-
tion to the direction of travel, so that the pull-down bed can be lowered com-
pletely.
Close the shade in the driver's cabin.
Lowering the pull-down bed:
Switch off the reading lamps on the underside of the pull-down bed.
Undo the retaining belt (Fig. 98,5) at the roof (Fig. 98,2).
Swing the pull-down bed down in a circle until it locks into place audibly.
Folding the pull-down bed
up:
Switch off the reading lamps on the ceiling above the pull-down bed.
Loosen the retaining straps of the safety net and lay the safety net under
the mattress.
Use both hands to push the pull-down bed upwards.
Secure the pull-down bed to the roof (Fig. 98,2) by means of the retaining
belt (Fig. 98,5).
Access ladder Always use the access ladder provided as standard to access the pull-down
bed.
Hook the access ladder to the pull-down bed by attaching both brackets
into the U-bolts (Fig. 98,4).
Fig. 98 Pull-down bed
93Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
Safety net The safety net is stored as standard between the mattress and slatted frame.
Only use the safety net if persons are already in the pull-down bed.
Setting up:
Fasten the retaining straps (Fig. 98,1) to the holders (Fig. 98,3) on the
ceiling.
7.12.3 Pull-down bed (model T)
The pull-down bed is located above the front seating group.
Opening the pull-down bed:
Switch off the lamps on the underside of the pull-down bed.
Push the catch lever (Fig. 99,1) up, pull it towards the middle of the vehicle
and guide it down again. The lock is released.
With both hands, pull the pull-down bed down as far as it will go.
Closing the pull-down bed:
Switch off the reading lamps in the pull-down bed.
Loosen the retaining straps of the safety net and lay the safety net under
the mattress.
Use both hands to push pull-down bed upwards as far as it will go.
Push the catch lever (Fig. 99,1) up, pull it towards the side of the vehicle
and guide it down again. Make sure that the catch pin (Fig. 100,1) engages
behind the holding block (Fig. 100,2) into the inner vehicle wall.
The maximum permitted pull-down bed load is 200 kg.
The pull-down bed is not to be used for the storage of luggage. When
the bed is not being used, only place the bed linen which is required for
two persons in it.
Before commencing the journey, secure the pull-down bed. To do this,
lock the pull-down bed.
Only use the pull-down bed, if the safety net is set up.
Never allow small children to remain in the pull-down bed without super-
vision.
But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age,
users should ensure that they cannot fall out of the pull-down bed.
Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.
Switch off the reading lamps on the underside of the pull-down bed when
the bed is lowered. Fire hazard!
Switch off the reading lamps in the pull-down bed before the bed is
pushed up. Fire hazard!
Fig. 99 Catch lever Fig. 100 Lock
94 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
Access ladder Always use the access ladder provided as standard to access the pull-down
bed.
Hook the access ladder to the pull-down bed by attaching both brackets
into the U-bolts (Fig. 101,1).
Safety net The safety net (Fig. 102,2) with the retaining straps is stowed under the mat-
tress. Only use the safety net if persons are already in the pull-down bed.
Setting up:
Fasten the retaining straps (Fig. 102,1) to the holders on the ceiling.
7.12.4 Bunk bed
Depending on the model, the rear area is fitted with a bunk bed. The bunk bed
can also be used as a rear garage.
Converting the bunk bed
into the rear garage:
Pull on the loop (Fig. 103,3) and release the latch (Fig. 103,1).
Pull the slatted frame (Fig. 103,2) together with the mattress forward until
it latches in place.
Fig. 101 Access ladder holder Fig. 102 Safety net holder
The maximum permitted bunk bed load is 100 kg.
Only use the bunk bed, if the safety net is set up.
Never allow small children to remain in the bunk bed without supervision.
But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age,
users should ensure that they cannot fall out of the bunk bed.
Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.
Fig. 103 Bunk bed (rear)
95Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
Access ladder Always use the access ladder provided as standard to reach the top bed.
Attaching:
Attach the access ladder with the rails to the holder (Fig. 104,3) on the
panel.
Safety net The safety net (Fig. 104,1) is stored as standard between the mattress and
slatted frame. Do not use the safety net until the person is already in bed.
Setting up:
Fasten the retaining straps (Fig. 104,2) to the holders on the ceiling.
7.12.5 Bunk bed (side)
Depending on the model, the side area is fitted with a bunk bed. The bunk bed
can also be used as a storage area.
Fig. 104 Safety net
The maximum permitted bunk bed load is 100 kg.
Only use the bunk bed, if the safety net is set up.
Never allow small children to remain in the bunk bed without supervision.
But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age,
users should ensure that they cannot fall out of the bunk bed.
Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.
Remove the mattress from the bottom bed and put it on the top bed before
converting the bunk bed into a storage compartment.
96 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
Converting the storage area
to a bunk bed:
Open the storage flap and fold out the support leg (Fig. 105,2) under the
bed.
Pull the loop (Fig. 105,1) and tilt the bed (Fig. 105,3) downwards.
Take the mattress (Fig. 106,3) off the top bed and place it on the bottom
bed.
Access ladder Always use the access ladder provided as standard to reach the top bed.
Attaching:
Attach the access ladder with the rails to the holder (Fig. 106,4) on the
panel.
Safety net The safety net (Fig. 106,1) is stored as standard between the mattress and
slatted frame. Do not use the safety net until the persons are already in bed.
Setting up:
Fasten the retaining straps (Fig. 106,2) to the holders on the ceiling.
7.12.6 Fixed bed (gas-pressure springs)
A storage compartment is underneath the bed. Lift up the slatted frame to
place items in the storage compartment or to empty it from the inside of the
vehicle.
Opening:
Lift the mattress forwards and set it down on the panel.
Lift slatted frame. The gas-pressure springs (Fig. 107,1) hold the slatted
frame open.
Closing:
Press the slatted frame downwards against the resistance of the gas-pres-
sure springs.
If necessary, push the mattress behind the panel.
Fig. 105 Supports and unlocking device Fig. 106 Bunk bed (side)
Fig. 107 Fixed bed
97Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.13 Converting seating groups for sleeping
7.13.1 Central seating group
Convert the table (Fig. 108,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.7).
Depending on the model, insert the bar (Fig. 108,4) or pull it inwards. The
bar is correctly positioned if it supports the table-top about 15 - 20 cm
behind the table leg.
Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 109,2) into the centre.
Insert the back cushions (Fig. 109,1) between the seat cushions and the
wall.
In the event of an accident, emergency braking or on uneven road sur-
faces, additional cushions with reinforced undersides can be thrown
through the vehicle and injure the occupants of the vehicle. Before set-
ting off, stow the additional cushions safely away or secure them with the
straps.
Depending on the model, the seating group can be different in shape and
position to the one shown here.
Depending on the model, an enclosed additional cushion must be inserted
between the seat cushions.
Fig. 108 Prior to conversion
Fig. 109 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Table
4Bar
5 Mounting rail
Depending on the model, instead of the second back cushion (Fig. 109,1)
an additional cushion must be inserted.
98 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.13.2 Central seating group with extension
Extend the table (Fig. 110,3) and convert it into a bed foundation (see
section 7.7).
Insert the bar (Fig. 110,7) or pull it inwards. The bar is correctly positioned
if it supports the table-top about 15 - 20 cm behind the table leg.
Pull on the handle (Fig. 110,8) and open the flap (Fig. 110,5).
Fold up the bench seat extension (Fig. 111,6) and wedge it with the flap.
Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 112,2) forwards and to the middle.
Insert the back cushions (Fig. 112,1) between the seat cushions and the
wall.
Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 112,9) between the back cushions and
the wall.
Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 112,10) between the seat cushions and
the wall.
Fig. 110 Prior to conversion
Fig. 111 During conversion
Fig. 112 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2Seat cushion
3Table
4 Mounting rail
5Flap
6 Bench seat extension
7Bar
8 Handle
9 Additional cushion
10 Additional cushion
Depending on the model, instead of the second back cushion (Fig. 112,1)
and the second additional cushion (Fig. 112,9) two smaller additional cush-
ions must be inserted.
99Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.13.3 Facing seating unit with extension
Extend the table (Fig. 113,3) and convert it into a bed foundation (see
section 7.7).
Remove the back cushion (Fig. 113,1) and lay it aside.
Pull the handle and open the flap (Fig. 113,6).
Fold up the bench seat extension (Fig. 114,7) and wedge it with the flap.
Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 115,2 and 4) forward and to the middle.
Place the back cushion (Fig. 115,5) between the seat cushion and the wall.
Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 115,8) between the seat cushion and the
wall.
Place the additional cushions (Fig. 115,9, 10 and 11) between the cushions
on the table and the seat base and the wall.
Fig. 113 Prior to conversion
Fig. 114 During conversion
Fig. 115 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3Table
4 Seat cushion
5 Back cushion
6Flap
7 Bench seat extension
8 Additional cushion
9 Additional cushion
10 Additional cushion
11 Additional cushion
100 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.13.4 Central seating group with divan
Convert the central seating group for sleeping (see section 7.13.2).
Pull out the slatted frame (Fig. 117,3).
Pull the seat cushion (Fig. 118,2) to the central seating group.
Remove the additional cushion (Fig. 118,1) from the back cushion
(Fig. 117,4). The additional cushion is fixed to the back cushion with Velcro
and can easily be separated.
Lay the back cushion aside.
Insert the additional cushion between the seat cushions and the exterior
wall.
Fig. 116 Prior to conversion
Fig. 117 During conversion
Fig. 118 After conversion
1 Additional cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Slatted frame
4 Back cushion
For model A 5831 a small additional cushion must be inserted on the divan
behind the front passenger's seat.
101Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.13.5 Round seating group (without slatted frame)
Convert the table (Fig. 119,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.7).
Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 120,2) into the centre.
Insert the back cushions (Fig. 120,1) between the seat cushions and the
exterior wall.
Remove the back cushions (Fig. 120,4 and 5) and lay them aside.
Fig. 119 Prior to conversion
Fig. 120 During conversion
Fig. 121 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Table
4 Back cushion
5 Back cushion
102 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.13.6 Round seating group
Convert the table (Fig. 122,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.7).
Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 123,2) into the centre.
Insert the back cushions (Fig. 123,1) between the seat cushions and the
exterior wall.
Remove the back cushions (Fig. 123,4) and lay them aside.
Fig. 122 Prior to conversion
Fig. 123 During conversion
Fig. 124 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3Table
4 Back cushion
103Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.13.7 Front bench seat
Turn the driver's seat (Fig. 125,4) and push it all the way forward.
Convert the table (Fig. 125,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.7).
Variant 1
If the vehicle has a guest bed foundation (Fig. 126,6), remove the back
cushion (Fig. 125,1) and the seat cushion (Fig. 125,2) and lay them aside.
Depending on the model, lay the included guest bed foundation
(Fig. 126,6) onto the table. Lay the front edge of the guest bed foundation
directly against the driver's seat or the brace on the driver's cabin.
Place the additional cushion (Fig. 126,5) on the driver's seat.
Place the seat cushion (Fig. 126,2) on the table.
Insert the back cushion (Fig. 126,1) between the seat cushion and the rear
wall. Observe the wedged form.
Variant 2
Place the additional cushion (Fig. 127,5) on the driver's seat.
Place the seat cushion (Fig. 127,2) on the table.
Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 127,7) between the seat cushion and the
rear wall.
Both variants
Push back the driver's seat (Fig. 126,4 or Fig. 127,4) again.
Fig. 125 Prior to conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Table
4 Driver's seat
5 Additional cushion
6 Guest bed foundation
7 Additional cushion
Fig. 126 After conversion (variant 1) Fig. 127 After conversion (variant 2)
If sport seats are fitted in the vehicle: Place a seat wedge on the driver's
seat before putting on the additional cushion.
104 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.13.8 Front bench seat with divan
Extend the table (Fig. 128,3) and convert it into a bed foundation (see
section 7.7).
Pull the handle and open the flap (Fig. 128,6).
Fold up the bench seat extension (Fig. 129,7) and wedge it with the flap.
Pull the seat cushion (Fig. 129,2) of the divan into the middle.
Place the back cushion (Fig. 129,1) of the divan between the seat cushion
and the wall.
Pull the seat cushion (Fig. 129,5) forwards onto the table.
Variant 1
Fold over the back cushion (Fig. 130,4) and pull it into the middle.
Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 130,8) between the back cushion
(Fig. 130,4) and the seat cushion (Fig. 130,5).
Variant 2
Remove the back cushion (Fig. 129,4) and lay it aside.
Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 131,10 and 11) between the seat
cushion (Fig. 131,5) and the wall.
Both variants
Place the additional cushion (Fig. 130,9 or Fig. 131,9) between the back
cushion (Fig. 130,1 or Fig. 131,1) and the seat cushion (Fig. 130,2 or
Fig. 131,2).
Fig. 128 Prior to conversion
1 Back cushion
2Seat cushion
3Table
4 Back cushion
5Seat cushion
6Flap
7 Bench seat extension
8 Additional cushion
9 Additional cushion
10 Additional cushion
11 Additional cushion
Fig. 129 During conversion
Fig. 130 After conversion (variant 1) Fig. 131 After conversion (variant 2)
105Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.13.9 Front bench seat with divan (extendable)
Extend the table (Fig. 132,4) and convert it into a bed foundation (see
section 7.7).
Pull the handle and open the flap (Fig. 132,7).
Fold up the bench seat extension (Fig. 133,8) and wedge it with the flap.
Pull out the bedding box extension (Fig. 133,3).
Pull the seat cushion (Fig. 133,2) of the divan into the middle.
Place the back cushion (Fig. 133,1) of the divan between the seat cushion
and the wall.
Pull the seat cushion (Fig. 133,6) forwards onto the table.
Variant 1
Fold over the back cushion (Fig. 134,5) and pull it into the middle.
Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 134,9) between the back cushion
(Fig. 134,5) and the seat cushion (Fig. 134,6).
Variant 2
Remove the back cushion (Fig. 133,5) and lay it aside.
Insert the additional cushions (Fig. 135,11 and 12) between the seat
cushion (Fig. 135,6) and the rear wall.
Both variants
Place the additional cushion (Fig. 134,10 or Fig. 135,10) between the back
cushion (Fig. 134,1 or Fig. 135,1) and the seat cushion (Fig. 134,2 or
Fig. 135,2).
Fig. 132 Prior to conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Bedding box extension
4Table
5 Back cushion
6 Seat cushion
7Flap
8 Bench seat extension
9 Additional cushion
10 Additional cushion
11 Additional cushion
12 Additional cushion
Fig. 133 During conversion
Fig. 134 After conversion (variant 1) Fig. 135 After conversion (variant 2)
106 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.13.10 Front bench seat with lengthwise seat
Extend the table (Fig. 136,3) and convert the extended suspension table
into a bed foundation (see section 7.7).
Pull the handle and open the flap (Fig. 136,6).
Fold up the bench seat extension (Fig. 137,7) and wedge it with the flap.
Remove the back cushion of the lengthwise seat (Fig. 137,1) and lay it
aside.
Pull the seat cushion of the lengthwise seat (Fig. 137,2) forwards as far as
the table.
Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 138,8) between the seat cushion of the
lengthwise seat and the rear wall.
Pull the seat cushion of the bench (Fig. 137,5) forwards onto the table.
Fold over the back cushion of the seat bench (Fig. 137,4) and pull it onto
the seat bench extension.
Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 137,9) between the seat cushion and the
back cushion.
Place the additional cushions (Fig. 137,10, 11 and 12) between the side
wall and the cushions on the table and the seat base.
Fig. 136 Prior to conversion
Fig. 137 During conversion
Fig. 138 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2Seat cushion
3Table
4 Back cushion
5Seat cushion
6Flap
7 Bench seat extension
8 Additional cushion
9 Additional cushion
10 Additional cushion
11 Additional cushion
12 Additional cushion
107Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.13.11 Front seating group
Convert the table (Fig. 139,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.7).
Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 140,2 and 4) into the centre.
Insert the back cushions (Fig. 140,1 and 5) between the seat cushions and
the exterior wall.
Place the additional cushion (Fig. 141,6) between the seat cushions
(Fig. 141,2 and 4).
Fig. 139 Prior to conversion
Fig. 140 During conversion
Fig. 141 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3 Table
4 Seat cushion
5 Back cushion
6 Additional cushion
108 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.13.12 L-seating group
Turn the driver's seat and push it all the way up.
Convert the table (Fig. 142,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.7).
Fold up and support the table top.
Pull the handle and open the flap of the seat bench extension.
Fold up the bench seat extension (Fig. 143,6) and wedge it with the flap.
Place the additional cushion (Fig. 144,7) on the table.
Lay the seat cushions (Fig. 144,4 and 5) onto the table behind the addi-
tional cushion.
Pull the seat cushion (Fig. 144,2) forwards.
Insert the back cushion (Fig. 144,1) between the seat cushion and the rear
wall.
Place the additional cushions (Fig. 144,8 and 9) between the side wall and
the cushions on the table and the seat base.
Push back the driver's seat as a retainer.
Fig. 142 Prior to conversion
Fig. 143 During conversion
Fig. 144 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3Table
4 Seat cushion
5 Seat cushion
6 Bench seat extension
7 Additional cushion
8 Additional cushion
9 Additional cushion
109Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
7.13.13 Individual seats
Remove the back cushions of the individual seats (Fig. 145,4) and lay them
aside.
Attach the attachable boards for the divan extension (Fig. 146,6) and place
on the corresponding cushions (Fig. 146,7 and 8).
Convert the table (Fig. 146,3) to a bed foundation (see section 7.7).
Fold up and support the table top.
Pull the handles and open the flap (Fig. 146,9) of the bench seat exten-
sions.
Fold up the bench seat extensions (Fig. 146,10) and wedge them with the
flaps.
Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 147,2) of the divans into the middle.
Insert the back cushions (Fig. 147,1) of the divans between the seat cush-
ions and the exterior wall.
Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 147,8) of the divan extension into the middle.
Insert the back cushions (Fig. 147,7) of the divan extension between the
seat cushions and the exterior walls.
Insert the additional cushion (Fig. 147,11) onto the table between the seat
cushions.
Place the additional cushions (Fig. 147,12) on the bench seat extensions.
Fig. 145 Prior to conversion
Fig. 146 During conversion
Fig. 147 After conversion
1 Back cushion
2 Seat cushion
3Table
4 Back cushion
5 Seat cushion
6 Divan extension
7 Back cushion
8 Seat cushion
9Flap
10 Bench seat extension
11 Additional cushion
12 Additional cushion
110 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Living
7
111Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Gas system
8
8Gas system
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions regarding the gas system of the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
safety
gas consumption
changing the gas bottles
gas isolator taps
hose break guard
external gas connection
automatic switching facility
The operation of the gas operation appliances of the vehicle is described in
chapter 10.
8.1 General
Before commencing the journey, when leaving the vehicle or when gas
equipment is not in use, close all gas isolator taps and the main isolator
tap on the gas bottle.
No appliance operated by a naked flame (e.g. heater or refrigerator) may
be in operation when filling the tank, on ferries or in the garage. Danger
of explosion!
Do not use appliances operated with a naked flame in closed spaces
(e.g. garages). Danger of poisoning and suffocation!
Only have the gas system maintained, repaired or altered by an author-
ised specialist workshop.
Have the gas system checked by an authorised specialist workshop
according to the national regulations before commissioning. This also
applies for not registered vehicles. For modifications to the gas system
have the gas system immediately checked by an authorised specialist
workshop.
The gas pressure regulator and exhaust gas pipes must also be
inspected. The gas pressure regulator has to be replaced after 10 years
at the latest. The vehicle owner is responsible for seeing that this is car-
ried out.
In case of a defect of the gas system (gas odour, high gas consumption)
there is danger of explosion! Close regulator tap on the gas bottle imme-
diately. Open doors and windows and ventilate well.
If the gas system is defective: Do not smoke; do not ignite any open
flames, and do not operate electric switches (light switches etc.).
Before using the cooker make sure that there is sufficient ventilation.
Open windows or the skylight.
Do not use the gas cooker or gas oven for heating purposes.
If there are several gas devices, each gas device must have its own gas
isolator tap. If individual gas devices are not in use, close the respective
gas isolator tap.
Ignition safety valves must close within 1 minute after the gas flame has
extinguished. A clicking sound is audible. Check function from time to
time.
112 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Gas system
8
8.2 Gas bottles
The built-in gas devices are exclusively meant for use with propane or
butane gas or a mixture of both. The gas pressure regulator as well as
all built-in gas devices are designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.
Propane gas is capable of gasification up to -42 °C, whereas butane gas
gasifies at 0 °C. Below these temperatures no gas pressure is available.
Butane gas is unsuitable for use in winter.
Regularly inspect the gas tube fitted to the gas bottle connection for
tightness. The gas tube must not have any tears and must not be
porous. Have the gas tube replaced by an authorised specialist work-
shop no later than ten years after the manufacturing date. The operator
of the gas system must see to it that the parts are replaced.
Due to its function and construction, the gas bottle compartment is a
space which is open to the exterior. Never cover or block up the standard
forced ventilations. Otherwise gas that is emitted can not be diverted to
the outside.
Do not use the gas bottle compartment as storage space as it is not
moisture-proof.
Secure the gas bottle compartment against unauthorised access. To do
this, lock the compartment.
The regulator tap on the gas bottle must be accessible.
Only connect gas-operated devices (e.g. gas grill) which have been
designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.
The exhaust gas pipe must be fitted tightly to the heating system and to
the vent and must be sealed. The exhaust gas pipe must not show any
evidence of damage.
Exhaust fumes must be able to escape into the atmosphere unhindered
and fresh air must be able to enter unhindered. For this reason, keep the
exhaust pipe and intake openings clean and unobstructed (e.g. free from
snow and ice). For this reason, no snow walls or aprons may lie against
the vehicle.
Gas bottles are only to be transported within the designated gas bottle
compartment.
Place the gas bottles in vertical position in the gas bottle compartment.
Fasten the gas bottles so that they are unable to turn or tilt.
If the gas bottles are not connected to the gas tube, always place the
protective cap on top.
Close the regulator tap on the gas bottle before the gas pressure regu-
lator or gas tube are removed from the gas bottle.
The gas pressure regulator or the gas tube must only be secured with a
suitable gas spanner (Do not overtighten).
Only use special gas pressure regulators with a safety valve designed
for vehicle use. Other gas pressure regulators are not permitted and
cannot meet the demanding requirements.
Use the gas pressure regulator defroster if the temperature falls below
5°C.
113Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Gas system
8
8.3 Gas consumption
Example A full 11 kg gas bottle is sufficient to:
Cook for 3 days using one flame,
Heat for 22 hours on full output or
Cool for 25 days.
8.4 Changing gas bottles
Use only 11 kg or 5 kg gas bottles. Camping gas bottles with built-in
check valve (blue bottle with max. 2.5 or 3 kg content) are can be used
in exceptional cases with a safety valve.
Use the shortest possible tube lengths (150 cm max.) for external gas
bottles.
Never block the floor ventilation openings below the gas bottles.
With some models, the gas bottle compartment is located right next to the
conversion door. With these models, only open the gas bottle compartment
when the conversion door is closed. Danger from damages.
For gas-operated units the gas pressure must be reduced to 30 mbar.
Connect gas pressure regulator complete with safety valve directly to bottle
valve.
The gas pressure regulator reduces the gas pressure in the gas bottle
down to the operating pressure of the gas devices.
For filling and connecting the gas bottles in Europe the accessories shops
have corresponding Euro filling sets and Euro bottle sets.
Information available at the dealers or service centre.
For information on the gas supply in Europe see chapter 17.
The data about gas consumption of the individual gas devices is standard
average values.
Appliances Gas consumption in grams/hour
Heater Approx. 170 - 490 g/h
Cooker, per cooker Approx. 140 - 165 g/h
Refrigerator Approx. 18 g/h
When changing gas bottles, do not smoke or create any open fire.
When you have changed the gas bottle, check whether gas escapes at
the connection points and unions. Use a leakage search spray to spray
the relevant connection point or union. These agents are available at the
accessories shop.
114 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Gas system
8
Depending on the model, the gas bottle holder can be pulled out of the gas
bottle compartment:
Open external gas bottle compartment (see section 7.2).
If there is a guard plate (Fig. 148,1), fold it down.
Unlock the slide (Fig. 148,3) using the handle (Fig. 148,2).
Pull out the slide (Fig. 148,3) as far as possible.
Turn back the handle (Fig. 148,2).
Close the regulator tap (Fig. 149,4) on the gas bottle. Pay attention to the
direction of the arrow.
Unscrew the gas pressure regulator (Fig. 149,2) from the gas bottle at the
hexagon nut (Fig. 149,3).
Remove the gas pressure regulator and the gas tube (Fig. 149,1) from the
gas bottle.
Release the fixing belts and remove the gas bottle.
Place a filled gas bottle in the gas bottle compartment.
Fix gas bottle in place with the fixing belts.
Position the gas pressure regulator (Fig. 149,2) and the gas tube
(Fig. 149,1) on the gas bottle and screw in tightly to the gas bottle at the
hexagonal nut (Fig. 149,3).
Unlock the slide (Fig. 148,3) using the handle (Fig. 148,2).
Push in the slide (Fig. 148,3) as far as possible, and turn back the handle
(Fig. 148,2).
If there is a guard plate (Fig. 148,1), fold it up.
Close the external flap (see section 7.2).
8.5 Gas isolator taps
Fig. 148 Gas bottle compartment Fig. 149 Gas bottle connection
Fig. 150 Symbols for the gas isolator
taps
1 Refrigerator
2Cooker
3 Heater/boiler
4Oven
115Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Gas system
8
A gas isolator tap (Fig. 150) for every gas device is built into the vehicle.
The gas isolator taps can be found on the front of the cooker.
8.6 Hose break guard (crash protection unit)
The crash protection unit protects against unwanted gas discharge. In the
event of an accident or a too high angle of the vehicle the gas supply will auto-
matically be interrupted.
Construction of the unit The crash protection unit consists of a control unit, an electrical valve and the
operating unit with a tricoloured LED.
Only the electrical functions can be switched at the operating unit (Fig. 151).
The regulator taps on the gas bottles must be opened manually.
The indicator lamp on the operating unit shows the condition of the gas
system. The system is okay when the indicator lamp (Fig. 151,1) lights up
green. When the indicator lamp lights up or flashes red a fault has occurred.
The gas supply is interrupted.
Putting into operation:
Open regulator taps on the gas bottles.
Switch on the system at the operating unit (Fig. 151).
For this, set the rocker switch (Fig. 151,2) to "I". The indicator lamp
(Fig. 151,1) flashes yellow (system test) and lights up green.
Switching off:
Set the rocker switch (Fig. 151,2) to "O". The indicator lamp (Fig. 151,1)
goes out.
Close regulator taps on the gas bottles.
8.7 External gas connection
When the vehicle is equipped with the Crash-Protection-Unit the living area
heater may be operated during the journey.
Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.
Fig. 151 Operating unit
If the external gas connection is not in use, always close the gas isolator
tap.
Only gas appliances with a suitable adapter should be connected to the
external gas connection.
Connect only external gas appliances which are designed for an opera-
tion pressure of 30 mbar.
116 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Gas system
8
The external gas connection (Fig. 152) is located at the rear or to the left or
right of the vehicle depending on the model.
Connect the external gas device to the connection point (Fig. 152,1).
Open the gas isolator tap (Fig. 152,2).
8.8 Duomatic switching facility
The Duomatic is an automatic switching facility with a remote display for a two-
bottle gas system. The Duomatic switching facility automatically switches gas
supply from the primary bottle to the reserve bottle as soon as the primary
bottle is either empty or no longer ready for operation. The gas appliances may
still continue operation. The Duomatic switching facility is suitable for all com-
mercial gas bottles from 3 kg to 33 kg.
Once you have made the connection and opened the gas isolator tap,
make sure that no gas is escaping at the connection point. If there is a
leak in the external gas connection, gas will escape into the open air.
Immediately close the gas isolator tap and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle. Have the external gas connection checked by an authorised spe-
cialist workshop.
When connecting an external gas appliance, make sure that there is
nothing near the external gas connection that could cause a spark.
Do not use the external gas connection to fill gas bottles. Observe the
information stickers on the external gas connection.
Fig. 152 External gas connection, gas
isolator tap closed
Do not use the switching facility in closed spaces.
If the vehicle is equipped with a panel of the DT series and the switching
facility is operated via this panel, the operating unit is redundant.
Further information can be obtained in the device manufacturer's instruc-
tion manual.
117Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Gas system
8
Construction of the unit The Duomatic switching facility consists of a central regulator (Fig. 153,3) and
a switching regulator (Fig. 153,5). The knob (Fig. 153,6) on the switching reg-
ulator is used to select which of the gas bottles is to be used as a primary bottle
and which is to be used as a reserve bottle.
Both regulators are equipped with a pressure controller and the regulator
defroster Eis-Ex. This prevents damage to the gas system during the winter
months.
The pressure gauge (Fig. 153,2) on the central regulator indicates the pres-
sure in the gas bottle, not the filling level of the gas bottle. The pressure gauge
can be used to test the impermeability of the gas bottle.
Only the electrical functions can be switched at the operating unit (Fig. 154).
The regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 153,1 and 4) must be opened man-
ually.
The central regulator provides a constant gas pressure, regardless of which
gas bottle is being drawn upon. The two indicator lamps on the operating unit
show which gas bottle can be used to provide gas. When both indicator lamps
are illuminated, the position of the knob on the switching regulator indicates
which gas bottle is currently being drawn upon.
Operating modes The Duomatic switching facility has two operating modes:
Winter operation "On and heating"
Summer operation "On"
Putting into operation:
Open the regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 153,1 and 4).
Use the knob (Fig. 153,6) on the switching regulator (Fig. 153,5) to select
the gas bottle which is to be the primary source of gas (primary bottle).
Always turn the knob as far as it will go.
When the knob is in the red area, the gas is taken primarily from the gas
bottle with the central regulator (Fig. 153,3).
When the knob is in the green area, the gas is taken primarily from the gas
bottle with the switching regulator (Fig. 153,5).
Switch on the Duomatic switching facility at the operating unit (Fig. 154).
To do so, set the rocker switch (Fig. 154,2) to winter operation "On and
heating" (Fig. 154,4) or to summer operation "On" (Fig. 154,6). Both gas
pressure regulators are now ventilated. The operating indicator
(Fig. 154,3) lights up.
Fig. 153 Duomatic switching facility Fig. 154 Operating unit
When operating with only one gas bottle (e.g. during the summer) connect
the central regulator to this bottle. Position the knob on the switching regu-
lator in the red area.
118 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Gas system
8
Switching off: Set the rocker switch (Fig. 154,2) to " " (Fig. 154,5). The operating indi-
cator (Fig. 154,3) goes out.
Close the regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 153,1 and 4).
Remote display The indicator lamps on the operating unit (Fig. 154) indicate in the vehicle inte-
rior whether the gas bottles are ready for operation.
Indicator lamp "A" (Fig. 154,1): Gas bottle on the central regulator
Indicator lamp "B" (Fig. 154,7): Gas bottle on the switching regulator
Changing gas bottles If an indicator lamp goes out during operation, this signifies that the corre-
sponding gas bottle is empty and must be replaced. The reserve bottle con-
tinues supplying the gas appliances with gas.
Changing gas bottles:
Close the regulator tap on the empty gas bottle.
Unscrew the regulator of the gas bottle.
Connect the full gas bottle to the regulator.
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
Set the knob on the switching regulator with a half-turn, so that the newly
replaced gas bottle will serve as a reserve bottle.
8.9 DuoControl switching facility
The DuoControl is an automatic switching facility with a remote display for a
two-bottle gas system. The DuoControl switching facility automatically
switches gas supply from the primary bottle to the reserve bottle as soon as
the primary bottle is either empty or no longer ready for operation. The gas
appliances may still continue operation. The DuoControl switching facility is
suitable for all commercial gas bottles from 3 kg to 33 kg.
When changing gas bottles, do not smoke or create any open fire.
Always mount the regulator in such a way that the protective cap faces
upwards.
Do not use the switching facility in closed spaces.
If the vehicle is equipped with a panel of the DT series and the switching
facility is operated via this panel, the operating unit is redundant.
Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.
119Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Gas system
8
Construction of the unit The DuoControl switching facility consists of a reversing valve (Fig. 155,3) and
an operating unit (Fig. 156). The reversing valve is installed between the gas
tubes (Fig. 155,2 and 5). The knob (Fig. 155,4) on the reversing valve is used
to select which of the gas bottles is to be used as a primary bottle and which
is to be used as a reserve bottle.
The reversing valve is equipped with the regulator defroster Eis-Ex. This pre-
vents damage to the gas system during the winter months.
Only the electrical functions can be switched at the operating unit (Fig. 156).
The regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 155,1 and 6) must be opened man-
ually.
The reversing valve provides a constant gas pressure, regardless of which gas
bottle is being drawn upon. The two indicator lamps on the operating unit indi-
cate the level of the primary bottle. When the green indicator lamp (Fig. 156,6)
illuminates, the primary bottle is full. When the red indicator lamp (Fig. 156,5)
illuminates, the primary bottle is empty. In this case, the reserve bottle is used
for the gas supply.
Operating modes The DuoControl switching facility has two operating modes:
Winter operation "On and heating"
Summer operation "On"
Putting into operation:
Open the regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 155,1 and 6).
Use the knob (Fig. 155,4) on the reversing valve (Fig. 155,3) to select the
gas bottle which is to be the primary source of gas (primary bottle).
Always turn the knob as far as it will go.
Switch on the DuoControl switching facility at the operating unit (Fig. 156).
To do so, set the rocker switch (Fig. 156,7) to winter operation "On and
heating" (Fig. 156,2) or to summer operation "On" (Fig. 156,4). The
reversing valve is now deaerated. The yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 156,1)
illuminates if the winter operation has been selected and the regulator
defroster is activated.
Switching off:
Set the rocker switch (Fig. 156,7) to " " (Fig. 156,3). The yellow indicator
lamp (Fig. 156,1) goes out.
Close the regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 155,1 and 6).
Remote display The indicator lamps on the operating unit (Fig. 156,5 and 6) indicate in the
vehicle interior whether the primary bottle is ready for operation.
Fig. 155 DuoControl switching facility Fig. 156 Operating unit
120 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Gas system
8
Changing gas bottles If the green indicator lamp (Fig. 156,6) stops illuminating during operation and
the red indicator lamp (Fig. 156,5) illuminates, the gas bottle selected as pri-
mary bottle is empty and needs to be changed. The reserve bottle continues
supplying the gas appliances with gas.
Changing gas bottles:
Close the regulator tap on the empty gas bottle.
Unscrew the gas tube of the gas bottle.
Connect the full gas bottle to the gas tube.
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
Set the knob on the reversing valve with a half-turn, so that the newly
replaced gas bottle will serve as a reserve bottle.
When changing gas bottles, do not smoke or create any open fire.
121Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
9Electrical system
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions regarding the electrical system of the
vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
safety
explanations of terms relating to the battery
12 V power supply
living area battery
loading the batteries
transformer/rectifier
panel
240 V power supply
connection to the 240 V power supply
fuse rating
The operation of the electrical appliances of the housing body is described in
chapter 10.
9.1 General safety instructions
The vehicle is a safe place during a storm (Faraday cage). However, to protect
the electrical devices, disconnect the 240 V connection and retract the
antennae as a precaution.
9.2 Terms
Off-load voltage The off-load voltage is the voltage of the battery in idle condition, i. e. no cur-
rent is consumed and the battery is not being charged.
Closed circuit current Some electrical appliances, such as the clock and the indicator lamps, require
continuous electric current, for this reason they are referred to as inactive
appliances. This closed circuit current flows even if the 12 V power supply has
been switched off.
Total discharge Total discharge of the battery is imminent, if a battery is completely discharged
by an active appliance and by closed circuit current.
Capacity Capacity refers to the amount of electricity which can be stored in a battery.
Only allow qualified personnel to work on the electrical system.
All electronic devices (e.g. mobile telephones, radios, televisions or DVD
players) which have been retrofitted to the vehicle and are operated
during the journey must have certain features: These are the CE certifi-
cation, the EMC inspection (electromagnetic compatibility) and the "E1"
inspection.
Only in this way can the functional reliability of the vehicle be ensured.
Otherwise the airbag may be triggered or interference to the on-board
electronics may result.
Total discharge damages the battery.
122 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
The capacity of a battery is given in ampere hours (Ah). If a battery possesses
a capacity of 80 Ah, then the battery can dispense a current of 1 A for 80 hours
or a current of 2 A for 40 hours.
External influences such as temperature may alter the storage capacity of the
battery.
9.3 12 V power supply
When the vehicle is not connected to the 240 V power supply or the 240 V
power supply is switched off, the living area battery supplies the living area
with 12 V DC. The living area battery has a limited power supply only. For this
reason, electrical appliances such as the radio and the lights should not be
operated for a long time without using the 240 V power supply.
During heater operation, the circulation fan is switched on and off by a thermo-
stat control. As a result the living area battery is loaded if no 240 V power
supply is connected.
When the vehicle engine is running, the vehicle alternator recharges the living
area battery and the starter battery.
The 12 V power supply can be cut off with the 12 V main switch on the panel.
Depending on the model, the heater, basic light/entrance step and reserve 4
or only the electrical entrance step remain on standby. The refrigerator is then
only operated with 12 V if the vehicle engine is running. This helps to prevent
the living area battery from being run down too quickly.
9.3.1 Living area battery
To disconnect all electrical 12 V appliances from the power supply, discon-
nect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply. Depending on the
model, either press the switch on the transformer/rectifier or activate the
battery separation on the panel to do so.
The radio in the driver's cabin and the independent vehicle heater are by
default connected to the living area battery via a separate fuse. These
appliances will stay operational if the living area battery is disconnected
from the power supply via the battery cut-off switch of the transformer/rec-
tifier or the battery separation on the panel.
Prior to commencing a journey ensure the living area battery is fully
charged. For this reason charge the living area battery for at least 20 hours
before commencing the journey.
During the trip, use every opportunity to charge the living area battery.
Charge the living area battery for at least 20 hours after the journey.
Charge the battery for at least 20 hours before laying up.
Use the charger module provided on the transformer/rectifier to charge the
living area battery. When charging externally, use a regulated charger that
is suitable for the battery type and the capacity of the living area battery.
For long periods of inactivity (4 weeks or more), either disconnect the living
area battery from the 12 V power supply or recharge it regularly.
When the living area battery is changed, only use batteries of the same
type.
When changing the living area battery, use only batteries which meet the
minimum capacity of the charger. Observe the separate instruction manual
for the charger. Lower-capacity batteries will generate a great deal of heat
when they are charged. Danger of explosion!
123Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
Position Depending on the model, the living area battery is installed either under the
driver's seat, under the front passenger's seat or in the bench behind the front
passenger's seat.
Discharging The living area battery is discharged by the closed circuit current which some
electrical appliances continuously require.
The self-discharge rate of the battery is dependant on temperature. At 20 to
25 °C the self-discharge rate is approx. 3 % of the capacity per month. The
self-discharge rate will increase with rising temperatures: At 35 °C the self-dis-
charge rate is approx. 20 % of the capacity per month.
During periods of low external temperatures, the battery will lose part of its
capacity.
An older battery no longer has the complete capacity available.
The higher the number of active electrical appliances, the faster the energy of
the living area battery is consumed.
9.4 Charging the living area battery and starter battery
Before disconnecting or connecting the terminals of the battery, switch off
the vehicle engine as well as the 240 V and 12 V power supplies and all
appliances. Danger of short circuit!
If the starter battery or living area battery are disconnected, do not apply
the ignition. Danger of short circuit!
Take note of the battery manufacturer's users and maintenance instruc-
tions.
The battery is maintenance-free. Maintenance-free means:
It is not necessary to check the acid level.
It is not necessary to lubricate the battery poles.
It is not necessary to refill the distilled water.
Even a maintenance-free battery must be charged regularly.
Total discharge damages the battery.
Recharge battery in good time.
Appliances such as the safety/drainage valve, charger, solar charge regu-
lator and panel consume approx. 20 mA to 65 mA of electricity from the
battery capacity, even when the 12 V main switch is turned off. Therefore
disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply, if the vehicle
will not be used for a long period of time.
The acid in the battery is poisonous and corrosive. Any contact with the
skin or the eyes is to be avoided.
In the case of charging with an external charger there is danger of explo-
sion. Only charge the battery in a well ventilated area and away from
naked flames or possible sources of sparks.
Always remove the living area battery or the starter battery from the
vehicle when charging them using an external charger.
124 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
The starter battery can only be fully charged with an external charger. If a
240 V power supply is used, the transformer/rectifier charges the starter bat-
tery with a float charge only. Even in mobile operation, the vehicle engine alter-
nator is not capable of completely charging the starter battery.
9.4.1 Charging using a 240 V power supply
If the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply, the living area battery
and the starter battery are automatically charged by the charger module on the
transformer/rectifier. The starter battery is only charged with a float charge.
The charging current is adapted to suit the charging condition of the battery.
This ensures that it is not possible to overload the battery.
To make use of the maximum output from the charger module on the trans-
former/rectifier, switch off all electrical appliances during charging.
9.4.2 Charging using the vehicle engine
When the vehicle engine is running, the vehicle alternator recharges the living
area battery and the starter battery. When the vehicle engine is switched off,
the batteries are automatically disconnected from one another by a relay in the
transformer/rectifier. This prevents the starter battery from being run down by
electrical appliances in the living area. The starting capability of the vehicle is
thus preserved. The charging condition of the living area battery or the starter
battery can be read on the panel.
9.4.3 Charging with an external charger
When charging the living area battery and the starter battery with an external
charger, proceed as follows:
Turn off the vehicle engine.
Switch off 12 V main switch on the panel. The indicator lamp will go off.
Disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply.
Disconnect the mains plug from the transformer/rectifier.
Switch off all gas appliances, all gas isolator taps and close the regulator
tap on the gas bottle.
There is a danger of short circuit when disconnecting the battery poles. For
this reason, first disconnect the negative terminal on the living area battery
or the starter battery and then the positive.
Remove the living area battery or the starter battery from the vehicle.
Check that the external charger is turned off.
Do not connect the battery cables to the wrong poles.
If the starter battery or living area battery are disconnected, do not apply
the ignition. Danger of short circuit!
Before disconnecting or connecting the terminals of the battery, switch off
the vehicle engine as well as the 240 V and 12 V power supplies and all
appliances. Danger of short circuit!
Before charging the battery, check whether the external charger is
approved for the battery type.
Observe the instruction manuals for the base vehicle and the charger.
Irreparable damage to the living area battery will result if it is overcharged.
125Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
Connect the external charger to the living area battery or the starter battery.
Pay attention to the polarity: First connect the positive terminal "+" to the
positive pole of the battery, then connect the negative terminal "–" to the
negative pole of the battery.
Switch on the external charger.
See the instructions for use of the connected charger for information con-
cerning charge period required for the battery.
See the specifications on the battery for information concerning its
strength.
Disconnect the external charger in reverse order.
9.5 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 99)
Do not cover the ventilation slots. Danger of overheating!
Depending on the model, not all slots for the fuses are occupied.
Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction
manual.
Fig. 157 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 99)
1 Main supply socket 240 V~
2 Output: Block 1 - refrigerator
3 Input: Block 2 - control lines, alternator D+
4 Output: Block 4 - heater, safety/drainage valve, basic light (lighting in the entrance
area), entrance step
5 Output: Block 3 - panel
6 Output: Block 5 - solar cell (if fitted), spare 2, spare 3, spare 4
7 Output: Block 6 - solar charge regulator (if fitted)
8 Output: Block 7 - auxiliary charging unit
9 Output: Block 8 - consumer circuit 1, consumer circuit 2, TV, water pump, spare 1,
spare 5, spare 6
10 Battery selector switch ("Blei-Säure/Blei-Gel" (lead acid/dryfill))
11 Fuses
12 Battery cut-off switch ("Batterie Ein/Aus" (battery On/Off))
126 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
Functions The transformer/rectifier has the following functions:
The transformer/rectifier charges the living area battery. The transformer/
rectifier charges the starter battery with a float charge only.
The transformer/rectifier monitors the voltage in the living area battery.
The transformer/rectifier distributes the current to the 12 V circuits and
secures them. Devices with a maximum of 10 A can be connected to the
sockets.
The transformer/rectifier contains connections for a solar charge regulator,
an auxiliary charging unit as well as other control and monitoring functions.
When the engine is turned off, the transformer/rectifier separates the
starter battery electrically from the living area battery. This prevents the
12 V living area appliances from discharging the starter battery.
The transformer/rectifier only works in conjunction with a panel.
When the transformer/rectifier is subject to a heavy load, the fitted charger
module reduces the charging current. This protects the charger from over-
heating. The transformer/rectifier is subject to a heavy load when e.g. an
empty living area battery is being charged, additional electrical appliances are
turned on and the ambient temperatures are high.
Position Depending on the model, the transformer/rectifier is located in the seat con-
sole under the driver's seat or the front passenger's seat.
9.5.1 Battery cut-off switch
The battery cut-off switch disconnects all the living area 12 V appliances, even
the safety/drainage valve. This prevents the living area battery from slowly dis-
charging if the vehicle is not used for a longer period of time (e.g. temporary
lay-up).
The batteries can still be charged by the transformer/rectifier when the battery
cut-off switch is turned off.
Switching on/off:
Press the battery cut-off switch up: Battery ON ("Batterie EIN").
Press the battery cut-off switch down: Battery OFF ("Batterie AUS").
When the battery cut-off switch is OFF, the safety/drainage valve opens.
The water flows out of the boiler. When the battery cut-off switch is ON
again, close the safety/drainage valve of the boiler by hand.
Also switch off a refrigerator with automatic power selection system. The
refrigerator will otherwise switch to gas operation.
After switching the battery cut-off switch back on again: Put the basic light
(lighting in the entrance area), entrance step, heater and spare 4 back into
service (depending on the model). To do so, switch on the 12 V main switch
briefly. This also applies if the living area battery was disconnected and
then reconnected.
127Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
9.5.2 Battery selector switch
The battery selector switch is used to set the charger module in the trans-
former/rectifier to the type of living area battery installed in the vehicle ("lead
acid" or "dryfill" battery).
9.5.3 Battery monitor
The battery monitor in the transformer/rectifier monitors the voltage in the
living area battery.
If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the transformer/
rectifier switches off all of the 12 V appliances, excluding the safety/drainage
valve.
A refrigerator with automatic power selection system switches to gas opera-
tion.
Measures:
Switch off all electrical appliances that are not absolutely essential at the
corresponding switch.
If necessary, use the 12 V main switch to switch the 12 V power supply
back on for a short while. This is only possible, however, when the battery
voltage is above 11 V. If the voltage is below this level, the 12 V power
supply cannot be switched on again until the living area battery has been
recharged.
9.5.4 Charging the battery
When the vehicle engine is running, the vehicle alternator recharges the living
area battery and the starter battery. When the vehicle engine is switched off,
the batteries are automatically disconnected from one another by a relay in the
transformer/rectifier. This prevents the starter battery from being run down by
electrical appliances in the living area. The starting capability of the vehicle is
thus preserved. The charging condition of the living area battery or the starter
battery can be read on the panel.
If the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply, the living area battery
and the starter battery are automatically charged by the charger module on the
transformer/rectifier. The starter battery is only charged with a float charge.
The charging current is adapted to suit the charging condition of the battery.
This ensures that it is not possible to overload the battery.
To make use of the maximum output from the charger module on the trans-
former/rectifier, switch off all electrical appliances during charging.
If the battery selector switch is set incorrectly, there is the danger of the
formation of detonating (oxy-hydrogen gas). Danger of explosion!
Incorrect setting of the battery selector switch damages the living area bat-
tery.
The factory settings of the battery selector switch must not be changed.
You must fully recharge a discharged living area battery as soon as pos-
sible.
128 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
9.6 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 101)
Functions The transformer/rectifier has the following functions:
The transformer/rectifier charges the living area battery. The transformer/
rectifier charges the starter battery with a float charge only.
The transformer/rectifier monitors the voltage in the living area battery.
The transformer/rectifier distributes the current to the 12 V circuits and
secures them. Devices with a maximum of 10 A can be connected to the
sockets.
The transformer/rectifier contains connections for a solar charge regulator
and an auxiliary charging unit as well as other control and monitoring func-
tions.
When the engine is turned off, the transformer/rectifier separates the
starter battery electrically from the living area battery. This prevents the
12 V living area appliances from discharging the starter battery.
The transformer/rectifier only works in conjunction with a panel.
Do not cover the ventilation slots. Danger of overheating!
Depending on the model, not all slots for the fuses are occupied.
Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction
manual.
Fig. 158 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 101)
1 Main supply socket 240 V~
2 Connections block 1: Refrigerator
3 Connections block 2: Alternator D+, sensor/control lines, refrigerator power supply
4 Connections block 4: Heater, safety/drainage valve, basic light (lighting in the
entrance area), entrance step
5 Connections block 3: Panel
6 Connections block 5: Spare 2, spare 3, spare 4
7 Connections block 9: Panel
8 Connections block 6: Solar charge regulator (if fitted)
9 Connections block 10: Solar cell (if fitted)
10 Connections block 7: Auxiliary charging unit
11 Connections block 8: Consumer circuit 1, consumer circuit 2, TV, water pump,
spare 1, spare 5, spare 6
12 Battery selector switch: "Blei-Säure/Blei-Gel" (lead-acid/dryfill)
13 Fuses
14 Battery cut-off switch: "Batterie Ein/Aus" (battery On/Off)
129Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
When the transformer/rectifier is subject to a heavy load, the fitted charger
module reduces the charging current. This protects the charger from over-
heating. The transformer/rectifier is subject to a heavy load when e.g. an
empty living area battery is being charged, additional electrical appliances are
turned on and the ambient temperatures are high.
Position Depending on the model, the transformer/rectifier (Fig. 158) is installed in the
seat console under the driver's seat or the front passenger's seat.
9.6.1 Battery cut-off switch
The battery cut-off switch disconnects all the living area 12 V appliances, even
the safety/drainage valve. This prevents the living area battery from slowly dis-
charging if the vehicle is not used for a longer period of time (e.g. temporary
lay-up).
The batteries can still be charged by the transformer/rectifier when the battery
cut-off switch is turned off.
Switching on/off:
Press the battery cut-off switch up: Battery ON ("Batterie EIN").
Press the battery cut-off switch down: Battery OFF ("Batterie AUS").
9.6.2 Battery selector switch
The battery selector switch is used to set the charger module in the trans-
former/rectifier to the type of living area battery installed in the vehicle ("lead
acid" or "dryfill" battery).
When the battery cut-off switch is OFF, the safety/drainage valve opens.
The water flows out of the boiler. When the battery cut-off switch is ON
again, close the safety/drainage valve of the boiler by hand.
Also switch off a refrigerator with automatic power selection system. The
refrigerator will otherwise switch to gas operation.
After switching the battery cut-off switch back on again: Put the basic light
(lighting in the entrance area), entrance step, heater and spare 4 back into
service (depending on the model). To do so, switch on the 12 V main switch
briefly. This also applies if the living area battery was disconnected and
then reconnected.
If the battery selector switch is set incorrectly, there is the danger of the
formation of detonating (oxy-hydrogen gas). Danger of explosion!
Incorrect setting of the battery selector switch damages the living area bat-
tery.
The factory settings of the battery selector switch must not be changed.
130 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
9.6.3 Battery monitor
The battery monitor in the transformer/rectifier monitors the voltage in the
living area battery.
If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the transformer/
rectifier switches off all of the 12 V appliances, excluding the safety/drainage
valve.
A refrigerator with automatic power selection system switches to gas opera-
tion.
Measures:
Switch off all electrical appliances that are not absolutely essential at the
corresponding switch.
If necessary, use the 12 V main switch to switch the 12 V power supply
back on for a short while. This is only possible, however, when the battery
voltage is above 11 V. If the voltage is below this level, the 12 V power
supply cannot be switched on again until the living area battery has been
recharged.
9.6.4 Charging the battery
When the vehicle engine is running, the vehicle alternator recharges the living
area battery and the starter battery. When the vehicle engine is switched off,
the batteries are automatically disconnected from one another by a relay in the
transformer/rectifier. This prevents the starter battery from being run down by
electrical appliances in the living area. The starting capability of the vehicle is
thus preserved. The charging condition of the living area battery or the starter
battery can be read on the panel.
If the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply, the living area battery
and the starter battery are automatically charged by the charger module on the
transformer/rectifier. The starter battery is only charged with a float charge.
The charging current is adapted to suit the charging condition of the battery.
This ensures that it is not possible to overload the battery.
To make use of the maximum output from the charger module on the trans-
former/rectifier, switch off all electrical appliances during charging.
9.7 Panel IT 20-3
You must fully recharge a discharged living area battery as soon as pos-
sible.
Fig. 159 Panel IT 20-3
1 12 V main switch
2 12 V indicator lamp
3 Rocker switch for reading the battery
voltage of the starter and living area
batteries
4 V/tank gauge
5 Rocker switch for reading the level in
the water or waste water tanks
6 240 V indicator lamp
7 ALARM warning light for the living
area battery
131Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
9.7.1 V/tank gauge for battery voltage and water or waste water
levels
Battery voltage The V/tank gauge is for the indication of the battery voltage of the starter bat-
tery or the living area battery.
With the V/tank gauge (Fig. 159,4), note the top scale. The gauge automati-
cally lights up as soon as a switch is pressed.
Displays:
Press the upper part of the rocker switch (Fig. 159,3) " ": The battery
voltage of the starter battery is displayed.
Press the lower part of the rocker switch (Fig. 159,3) " ": The battery
voltage of the living area battery is displayed.
The table below will help you correctly interpret the displayed battery voltage
of the living area battery.
Battery voltage
(values during
operation)
Mobile operation
(vehicle moving,
no 240 V con-
nection)
Battery opera-
tion
(vehicle station-
ary, no 240 V
connection)
Power operation
(vehicle station-
ary, 240 V con-
nection)
Danger of total
discharge (battery
alarm)
11 V or less
1)
1)
The battery guard switches all the appliances off (at 10.5 V).
12 V power sup-
ply overload
If appliances are
switched off: Bat-
tery flat
If appliances are
switched on: Bat-
tery overload
12 V power sup-
ply overload
The battery is not
charged by the al-
ternator, the alter-
nator's regulator
is defective
The battery is not
charged by the
transformer/rectifi-
er, the transform-
er/rectifier is
defective
11.1 V to 13.2 V 12 V power sup-
ply overload
2)
2)
If the voltage does not exceed this range for several hours.
Normal range 12 V power sup-
ply overload
2)
The battery is not
charged by the al-
ternator, the alter-
nator's regulator
is defective
The battery is not
charged by the
transformer/rectifi-
er, the transform-
er/rectifier is
defective
13.3 V to 13.7 V Battery is being
charged (main
charge)
Occurs only brief-
ly after charging
Battery is being
charged (main
charge)
13.8 V to 14.4 V Battery being
charged (float
charge)
– Battery being
charged (float
charge)
Over 14.5 V Battery is over-
charged, defec-
tive alternator
control
– Battery is over-
charged, defec-
tive transformer/
rectifier
132 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
Volume of water/waste
water
The V/tank gauge is for the indication of the quantity of water or waste water.
With the V/tank gauge (Fig. 159,4), use the bottom scale. The gauge automat-
ically lights up as soon as a switch is pressed.
Displays:
Press the upper part of the rocker switch (Fig. 159,5) " ": The volume of
water is displayed.
Press the lower part of the rocker switch (Fig. 159,5) " ": The volume of
waste water is displayed.
9.7.2 Battery alarm for the living area battery
The red ALARM warning light (Fig. 159,7) flashes as soon as the voltage of
the living area battery falls below 11 V (measured under operation) and there
is a risk of a total discharge.
9.7.3 12 V main switch
The 12 V main switch (Fig. 159,1) switches the panel and the 12 V power
supply of the living area on and off.
Exception: Depending on the model, safety/drainage valve, heater, basic light
(lighting in the entrance area), entrance step and spare 4 remain ready to
operate.
Switching on:
Press the upper part of the rocker switch (Fig. 159,1) "12 V": The 12 V
living area power supply is switched on. The indicator lamp (Fig. 159,2)
lights up green.
Values for off-load voltage Charging condition of the battery
Less than 11 V Totally discharged
12.3 V 50 %
12.5 V 75 %
More than 12.8 V Full
Total discharge causes irreparable damage to the battery.
Only read the tank levels briefly. Keeping the reading option on for a long
time can damage the transducers.
When the battery alarm comes on, switch off the appliances and charge the
living area battery, either by mobile operation or by connection to a 240 V
power supply.
Total discharge damages the battery.
If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the trans-
former/rectifier switches off all of the 12 V appliances, excluding the safety/
drainage valve.
133Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
Switching off: Press the lower part of the rocker switch (Fig. 159,1) " ": The 12 V
living area power supply is switched off. The indicator lamp (Fig. 159,2)
goes out.
9.7.4 12 V indicator lamp
The 12 V indicator lamp (Fig. 159,2) illuminates whenever the 12 V main
switch (Fig. 159,1) is switched on.
9.7.5 240 V indicator lamp
The yellow 240 V indicator lamp (Fig. 159,6) illuminates whenever line voltage
is available at the transformer/rectifier input.
9.8 Panel IT 992
9.8.1 V/tank gauge for battery voltage and water or waste water
levels
Battery voltage The V/tank gauge is for the indication of the battery voltage of the starter bat-
tery or the living area battery.
With the V/tank gauge (Fig. 160,1), note the top scale. The gauge automati-
cally lights up as soon as a switch is pressed.
Displays:
Push the rocker switch (Fig. 160,9) up " ": The battery voltage of the
starter battery is displayed.
Push the rocker switch (Fig. 160,9) down " ": The battery voltage of the
living area battery is displayed.
The following tables will help you correctly interpret the battery voltage of the
living area battery displayed on the panel IT 992.
When leaving the vehicle, switch off the 12 V main switch. This prevents
any unnecessary discharge of the living area battery.
Appliances such as the safety/drainage valve, charger, solar charge regu-
lator and panel consume approx. 20 mA to 65 mA of electricity from the
battery capacity, even when the 12 V main switch is turned off. Therefore
disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply, if the vehicle
will not be used for a long period of time.
Fig. 160 Panel IT 992
1 V/tank gauge
2 Current gauge
3 12 V indicator lamp
4 12 V main switch
5 240 V indicator lamp
6 Rocker switch for special equipment
7 Rocker switch for reading the level in
the water or waste water tanks
8 ALARM warning light for the living
area battery
9 Rocker switch for reading the battery
voltage of the starter and living area
batteries
134 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
Battery voltage
(values during
operation)
Mobile operation
(vehicle moving,
no 240 V con-
nection)
Battery opera-
tion
(vehicle station-
ary, no 240 V
connection)
Power operation
(vehicle station-
ary, 240 V con-
nection)
Danger of total
discharge (battery
alarm)
11 V or less
1)
1)
The battery guard switches all the appliances off (at 10.5 V).
12 V power sup-
ply overload
If appliances are
switched off: Bat-
tery flat
If appliances are
switched on: Bat-
tery overload
12 V power sup-
ply overload
The battery is not
charged by the al-
ternator, the alter-
nator's regulator
is defective
The battery is not
charged by the
transformer/rectifi-
er, the transform-
er/rectifier is
defective
11.1 V to 13.2 V 12 V power sup-
ply overload
2)
2)
If the voltage does not exceed this range for several hours.
Normal range 12 V power sup-
ply overload
2)
The battery is not
charged by the al-
ternator, the alter-
nator's regulator
is defective
The battery is not
charged by the
transformer/rectifi-
er, the transform-
er/rectifier is
defective
13.3 V to 13.7 V Battery is being
charged (main
charge)
Occurs only brief-
ly after charging
Battery is being
charged (main
charge)
13.8 V to 14.4 V Battery being
charged (float
charge)
– Battery being
charged (float
charge)
Over 14.5 V Battery is over-
charged, defec-
tive alternator
control
– Battery is over-
charged, defec-
tive transformer/
rectifier
Values for off-load voltage Charging condition of the battery
Less than 11 V Totally discharged
12.3 V 50 %
12.5 V 75 %
More than 12.8 V Full
Total discharge causes irreparable damage to the battery.
135Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
Volume of water/waste
water
The V/tank gauge is for the indication of the quantity of water or waste water.
With the V/tank gauge (Fig. 160,1), use the bottom scale. The gauge automat-
ically lights up as soon as a switch is pressed.
Displays:
Push the rocker switch (Fig. 160,7) up " ": The volume of water is dis-
played.
Push the rocker switch (Fig. 160,7) down " ": The volume of waste water
is displayed.
9.8.2 Battery alarm for the living area battery
The red ALARM warning light (Fig. 160,8) flashes as soon as the voltage of
the living area battery falls below 11 V (measured under operation) and there
is a risk of a total discharge.
9.8.3 Current gauge for charging/discharging the living area
battery
The battery current actually flowing is permanently displayed on the current
gauge (Fig. 160,2). The gauge automatically lights up as soon as a switch is
pressed.
Red "discharging" zone: Battery is being discharged at the discharging cur-
rent indicated between 0 and 30 A.
Indicator "0": Battery is neither being charged nor discharged.
Green "charging" zone: Battery is being charged at the charging current
indicated between 0 and 30 A.
Only read the tank levels briefly. Keeping the reading option on for a long
time can damage the transducers.
When the battery alarm comes on, switch off the appliances and charge the
living area battery, either by mobile operation or by connection to a 240 V
power supply.
Total discharge damages the battery.
If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the trans-
former/rectifier switches off all of the 12 V appliances, excluding the safety/
drainage valve.
136 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
9.8.4 12 V main switch
The 12 V main switch (Fig. 160,4) switches the panel and the 12 V power
supply of the living area on and off.
Exception: Depending on the model, safety/drainage valve, heater, basic light
(lighting in the entrance area), entrance step and spare 4 remain ready to
operate.
Switching on:
Push the rocker switch (Fig. 160,4) up " ": The 12 V living area power
supply is switched on. The indicator lamp (Fig. 160,3) lights up green.
Switching off:
Push the rocker switch (Fig. 160,4) down " ": The 12 V living area
power supply is switched off. The indicator lamp (Fig. 160,3) goes out.
9.8.5 12 V indicator lamp
The 12 V indicator lamp (Fig. 160,3) illuminates whenever the 12 V main
switch (Fig. 160,4) is switched on.
9.8.6 240 V indicator lamp
The yellow 240 V indicator lamp (Fig. 160,5) illuminates whenever line voltage
is available at the transformer/rectifier input.
Display Mobile operation
(vehicle moving,
no 240 V con-
nection)
Battery opera-
tion
(vehicle station-
ary, no 240 V
connection)
Power operation
(vehicle station-
ary, 240 V con-
nection)
Notes for charging/
discharge display
Red "discharg-
ing" zone (dis-
charging current)
No charge!
Too many appli-
ances are
switched on or the
alternator is de-
fective
Appliances are on
Battery is being
discharged
No charge!
Too many appli-
ances are
switched on
0 A (there is no
current)
Battery fully or vir-
tually charged
1)
1)
If the indicator falls from the green range to 0 and all appliances are switched off
(apart from the refrigerator).
Appliances are
switched off
Battery fully or vir-
tually charged
2)
2)
If the indicator falls from the green range to 0 and all appliances are switched off.
Green zone
(charging current)
Battery is being
charged (up to
30 A possible)
Battery is being
charged (only
possible with solar
power)
Battery is being
charged (up to
max. 16 A possi-
ble; with 32 A
auxiliary charging
unit)
When leaving the vehicle, switch off the 12 V main switch. This prevents
any unnecessary discharge of the living area battery.
Appliances such as the safety/drainage valve, charger, solar charge regu-
lator and panel consume approx. 20 mA to 65 mA of electricity from the
battery capacity, even when the 12 V main switch is turned off. Therefore
disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply, if the vehicle
will not be used for a long period of time.
137Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
9.8.7 Switch for water pump
Switching on: Push the rocker switch (Fig. 160,6) up: The water pump is turned on.
Switching off:
Push the rocker switch (Fig. 160,6) down " ": The water pump is
switched off.
9.9 Panel MP 20-T
9.9.1 240 V indicator lamp
The 240 V indicator lamp (Fig. 161,1) illuminates whenever line voltage is
available at the transformer/rectifier input.
The luminance of the LEDs and the symbols adapts automatically to the
ambient light.
The displays can only be called up if the 12 V power supply is switched on.
As soon as a button is pressed, the gauge is automatically illuminated. The
display goes out 20 seconds after the last key has been pressed.
Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction
manual.
Fig. 161 Panel MP 20-T
1 230 V indicator lamp
2Volt symbol
3 Ampere symbol
4 Interior temperature button
5 Digital display
6 External temperature button
7 Water tank symbol
8 Waste water tank symbol
9 Clock gauge
10 Lock
11 Reserve button
12 Tanks gauge
13 Tanks button
14 Living area battery button
15 Starter battery button
16 Symbol for starter battery and living area battery
17 Batteries gauge
18 Button for 12 V power supply (12 V main switch)
138 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
9.9.2 12 V main switch
The 12 V main switch (Fig. 161,18) switches the panel and the 12 V power
supply of the living area on and off.
Exception: Heater, safety/drainage valve, basic light (lighting in the entrance
area) and entrance step remain operational.
Switching on:
Briefly press the "12 V" button (Fig. 161,18). The 12 V living area power
supply is switched on. The "12 V" indicator lights up.
Switching off:
Briefly press the "12 V" button (Fig. 161,18). The 12 V living area power
supply is switched off. The "12 V" indicator goes out.
Activating battery
disconnection (transformer/
rectifier without battery cut-
off switch):
Switch off 12 V power supply.
Press button for living area battery (Fig. 161,14) and hold it down for
approx. 10 seconds. The "V" volt (Fig. 161,2) and "A" ampere (Fig. 161,3)
symbols flash three times. The living area battery is disconnected from the
12 V power supply.
Deactivating battery
disconnection (transformer/
rectifier without battery cut-
off switch):
Press the "12 V" button (Fig. 161,18) and hold it down for approx.
5 seconds. The "V" volt symbol (Fig. 161,2) flashes three times. The living
area battery is connected to the 12 V power supply. The indicator lights up
after approx. 2 seconds.
9.9.3 Batteries gauge
The voltage and charging/discharging of the living area battery or the starter
battery voltage can be indicated using the batteries gauge.
Displays:
Press button for living area battery " " (Fig. 161,14). The "V" volt symbol
(Fig. 161,2) lights up. Depending on whether the battery is being charged
or discharged, the "A" ampere symbol lights up white or red respectively.
The battery voltage and current of the living area battery are displayed
using the LEDs in the gauge.
Press button for starter battery " " (Fig. 161,15). The "V" volt symbol
(Fig. 161,2) lights up. The battery voltage of the starter battery is displayed
using the LEDs in the gauge.
If, after switching on, the "11.0" LED of the volt indicator and the "V" volt
symbol (Fig. 161,2) in the batteries gauge (Fig. 161,17) flash, the voltage
of the living area battery is too low. Charge battery.
If, after switching on, the "12 V" indicator, the symbol for the living area bat-
tery (Fig. 161,16) and the "V" volt symbol (Fig. 161,2) flash three times,
battery separation is activated. Deactivate battery separation.
When leaving the vehicle, switch off the 12 V main switch. This prevents
any unnecessary discharge of the living area battery.
Appliances such as the safety/drainage valve, charger, solar charge regu-
lator and panel consume approx. 20 mA to 65 mA of electricity from the
battery capacity, even when the 12 V main switch is turned off. Therefore
disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply, if the vehicle
will not be used for a long period of time.
139Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
The tables below will help you interpret the statuses displayed on the panel.
Volt indicator (blue)
1 LED 2 LEDs 3 LEDs 4 LEDs 5 LEDs 6 LEDs 7 LEDs 8 LEDs
< 11.0 V 11.5 V 12.0 V 12.2 V 12.5 V 12.7 V 13.0 V > 13.5 V
Battery voltage
(values during
operation)
Mobile operation
(vehicle moving,
no 240 V con-
nection)
Battery opera-
tion
(vehicle station-
ary, no 240 V
connection)
Power operation
(vehicle station-
ary, 240 V con-
nection)
Danger of total
discharge (battery
alarm)
11 V or less
1)
1)
The battery guard switches all the appliances off (at 10.5 V).
12 V power sup-
ply overload
If appliances are
switched off: Bat-
tery flat
If appliances are
switched on: Bat-
tery overload
12 V power sup-
ply overload
The battery is not
charged by the al-
ternator, the alter-
nator's regulator
is defective
The battery is not
charged by the
transformer/rectifi-
er, the transform-
er/rectifier is
defective
11.5 V to 13 V 12 V power sup-
ply overload
2)
2)
If the voltage does not exceed this range for several hours.
Normal range 12 V power sup-
ply overload
2)
The battery is not
charged by the al-
ternator, the alter-
nator's regulator
is defective
The battery is not
charged by the
transformer/rectifi-
er, the transform-
er/rectifier is
defective
Over 13.5 V Battery is being
charged (main
charge)
Occurs only brief-
ly after charging
Battery is being
charged (main
charge)
Values for off-load voltage Charging condition of the battery
Less than 11 V Totally discharged
12.0 V 0 % (discharged)
12.2 V 25 %
12.3 V 50 %
12.5 V 75 %
More than 12.8 V Full
Total discharge causes irreparable damage to the battery.
Ampere indicator (blue)
1 LED 2 LEDs 3 LEDs 4 LEDs 5 LEDs 6 LEDs 7 LEDs 8 LEDs
Discharging with: Charging with:
> 30 A > 10 A > 3 A > 1 A Ap-
prox.
0A
> 1 A > 3 A > 10 A
140 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
9.9.4 Tank gauge
The water and waste water quantities can be indicated using the tank gauge.
Displays:
Press tanks button " " (Fig. 161,13). The water tank " " (Fig. 161,7)
and waste water tank " " (Fig. 161,8) symbols light up. The fill level of the
water tank (left-hand scale) and the waste water tank (right-hand scale) are
indicated using the LEDs in the gauge.
The table below will help you interpret the levels displayed on the panel.
9.9.5 Alarms
Battery alarm The "V" volt symbol (Fig. 161,2) and the "11.0" LED flash as soon as the bat-
tery voltage falls below 11 V (measured during operation) and there is the
threat of a total discharge.
Measures:
When the battery alarm comes on, switch off the appliances and charge the
battery, either by mobile operation or by connection to a 240 V power
supply.
Tank alarm
The water tank symbol " " (Fig. 161,7) or waste water tank symbol " "
(Fig. 161,8) flashes when the water tank is empty or the waste water tank is
full.
Current displayed System status "A" ampere symbol
-30 A to -10 A Battery is being heavily
discharged
Lights up red
-10 A to -1 A Battery is being dis-
charged
Lights up white
0 A Battery current is low or
0A
Lights up white
+1 A to +10 A Battery being charged Lights up white
Level indicator (blue)
1 LED 2 LEDs 3 LEDs 4 LEDs 5 LEDs 6 LEDs 7 LEDs 8 LEDs
25 % 50 % 75 % 100 %
The alarm functions are only active when the corresponding display is
called up. Perform checks regularly.
It is best to perform checks in the morning, before the 12 V appliances are
switched on.
Total discharge damages the battery.
If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the trans-
former/rectifier switches off all of the 12 V appliances, excluding the safety/
drainage valve.
141Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
Measures: Fill water tank or empty waste water tank.
9.9.6 Temperature display
The internal and external temperatures can be indicated using the digital dis-
play (Fig. 161,5).
Displays:
Press internal temperature button " " (Fig. 161,4). The internal temper-
ature is displayed.
Press external temperature button " " (Fig. 161,6). The external tem-
perature is displayed.
9.9.7 Clock gauge
The clock gauge (Fig. 161,9) displays the time. The clock has its own battery
and is not connected to the 12 V power supply.
Detach the clock if the battery needs to be replaced or the clock needs to be
set.
Detaching clock:
Turn lock (Fig. 161,10) one quarter turn. The lock is released.
Detach clock by pulling forwards.
Fitting clock:
Install clock.
Lightly press lock (Fig. 161,10) and turn a quarter turn.
Check lock by lightly pulling on the clock.
9.9.8 Switch for tank heater
The tank heater can be turned on and off using the "Res" button (Fig. 161,11).
Switching on:
Press "Res" reserve button (Fig. 161,11). The "Res" symbol lights up.
Switching off:
Press "Res" reserve button (Fig. 161,11). The "Res" symbol goes out.
9.10 240 V power supply
The 240 V power supply provides electricity for:
sockets with earth contact for appliances with maximum 16 A
refrigerator
transformer/rectifier
If, when the fill levels are called up, the LEDs in the scale flash in addition
to the tank symbol, a sensor error has occurred. Clean tank sensors.
The switch status is saved when the 12 V power supply is switched off. This
means: If the tank heater was on when the 12 V power supply was
switched off, the heater is also switched on when the 12 V power supply is
switched back on.
Only allow qualified personnel to work on the electrical system.
142 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
The electrical appliances connected to the 12 V power supply of the living area
are supplied with voltage by the living area battery.
Connect the vehicle to an external 240 V power supply system as often as
possible. The charger module in the transformer/rectifier automatically
charges the living area battery. In addition to this, the starter battery is charged
with a float charge.
9.10.1 240 V connection
The vehicle can be connected to an external 240 V power supply. The cable
may have a length of maximum 25 m.
9.10.2 Power cable for external 240 V connection
Power cable
Three-core (3 x 2.5 mm
2
) flexible rubber sheathed cable
Maximum 25 m in length
1 plug with earth contact
1 socket with earth contact (plug-in devices according to EN 60309)
Connection possibilities For your power cable, we recommend using a CEE connection cable with a
CEE plug and coupling. If this type of connection is not feasible, we recom-
mend the following combination with a safety plug:
The external 240 V power supply must be protected by fuse with a fault
current protection switch (FI-switches, 30 mA).
For the connection points on camp sites (camping distributors) highly sen-
sitive fault current protection switches (FI-switches, 30 mA) are obligatory.
Completely unwind the cable on cable drums to prevent overheating.
143Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
Adapter cable:
CEE 17 socket with earth contact (Fig. 162,1) – plug with earth contact
(Fig. 162,2)
Cable reel:
Socket with earth contact (Fig. 162,3) – plug with earth contact (Fig. 162,4)
Adapter cable:
CEE 17 socket with earth contact (Fig. 162,5) – plug with earth contact
(Fig. 162,6)
Depending on the design, the flap for the 240 V connection is designated with
the symbol " ".
Connecting the power
cable:
Open external flap.
Depending on the design, tilt the cover upwards.
Insert connector.
9.11 Fuses
9.11.1 12 V fuses
The appliances connected to the 12 V power supply in the living area are
fused individually. The fuses are accessible at different positions in the
vehicle.
Fig. 162 Connection possibilities 240 V
connection
Fig. 163 Connecting an angled con-
nector with socket
When using a CEE 17 angled connector with rear socket (Fig. 163,1)
only use a rubberised and sealed IP 44 socket with earth contact
(Fig. 163,2). Do not use sockets without earth contact (Fig. 163,3).
Danger of electrocution!
Depending on the design, disconnect the connector before removing it.
Only replace defective fuses when the cause of the defect is known and
has been remedied.
Replace defective fuses only after the power supply has been turned off.
Never bridge or repair fuses.
144 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
An intact 12 V fuse can be detected by the unbroken fuse element
(Fig. 164,1). If the fuse element is broken (Fig. 164,2), change the fuse.
Before changing fuses, take the function, value and colour of the relevant
fuses from the following specifications. When changing fuses, only use flat
fuses with the values shown below.
Fuses for the starter
battery
The fuses are located near the starter battery or near the transformer/rectifier.
For vehicles on a Fiat chassis, the fuses are installed near the transformer/rec-
tifier in the console of the driver's seat.
For vehicles built on a Ford chassis, the fuses are installed near the trans-
former/rectifier.
For vehicles on a Renault chassis, the fuses are installed near the starter bat-
tery under a covering between the seats.
Fig. 164 12 V fuse
1 Unbroken fuse element
2 Broken fuse element
Fig. 165 Fuses for the starter battery
(Fiat)
1 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange
2 Flat fuse for optional devices
3 Flat fuse 5 A/beige
(for the right clearance light)
4 Flat fuse 5 A/beige
(for the left right clearance)
5 Flat fuse 2 A/grey
(for alternator D+)
6 Jumbo flat fuse 20 A/yellow
(for charging line)
Fig. 166 Fuses in front of the driver's
seat (Ford)
1 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange
(for starter battery)
2 Jumbo flat fuse 20 A/yellow
(for charging line of the starter bat-
tery)
3 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange
(for living area battery)
4 Flat fuse 2 A/grey
(for battery charger sensor)
5 Jumbo flat fuse 20 A/yellow
(for the refrigerator)
145Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
Not illustrated: Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange (for refrigerators with automatic
power selection system)
Fuses on the living area
battery
The fuses are located near the living area battery or in the driver's cabin in
front of the driver's seat.
For vehicles on a Fiat chassis, the fuses are installed in the console of the front
passenger's seat.
For vehicles on a Ford chassis, the fuses are installed near the living area bat-
tery or next to the driver's seat.
For vehicles built on a Renault chassis, the fuses are installed near the living
area battery.
Fig. 167 Fuses for the starter battery
(Renault)
1 Flat fuse 2 A/grey
(for alternator D+)
2 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange
3 Flat fuse 20 A/yellow
(for charging line)
Fig. 168 Fuses on the living area battery
(Fiat)
1 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange
(for living area battery)
2 Flat fuse 2 A/grey
(for battery charger sensor)
3 Flat fuse 20 A/yellow
(for the refrigerator)
4 Jumbo flat fuse
(value depending on optional device)
Fig. 169 Fuses in front of the driver's
seat (Ford)
1 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange
(for starter battery)
2 Jumbo flat fuse 20 A/yellow
(for charging line of the starter bat-
tery)
3 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange
(for living area battery)
4 Flat fuse 2 A/grey
(for battery charger sensor)
5 Jumbo flat fuse 20 A/yellow
(for the refrigerator)
146 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
Fuse for the Thetford
toilet (swivel toilet)
The fuse is located in the locker wall of the Thetford cassette.
Changing:
Open the flap for the Thetford cassette on the outside of the vehicle.
Pull out the Thetford cassette completely.
Replace fuse (Fig. 171,1 or Fig. 172,1 ).
Fuse for the Thetford
toilet (fixed seat)
The fuse is located in the locker wall of the Thetford cassette.
Changing:
Open the flap for the Thetford cassette on the outside of the vehicle.
Remove the Thetford cassette and swing out the flap in the housing panel.
Replace fuse (Fig. 173,1).
Fig. 170 Fuses on the living area battery
(Renault)
1 Jumbo flat fuse 20 A/yellow
(for the refrigerator)
2 Jumbo flat fuse 40 A/orange
(for living area battery)
3 Flat fuse 2 A/grey
(for battery charger sensor)
Fig. 171 Fuse for the Thetford toilet
1 Flat fuse 3 A/purple
Fig. 172 Fuse for the Thetford toilet
(alternative)
Fig. 173 Fuse for the Thetford toilet
1 Flat fuse 3 A/purple
147Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
Fuse for the Dometic toilet The fuse is located on the rear side of the control unit for the toilet.
Changing:
Lift the control unit for the toilet (Fig. 174,1) with a suitable tool and pull it
from the wall.
Replace fuse (Fig. 174,2).
9.11.2 240 V fuse
The 240 V connection is protected by one or several two-pole automatic circuit
breakers (Fig. 175).
Position The automatic circuit breaker is in the wardrobe or under a cover in the rear
area (under the slatted frame), depending on the model.
Fig. 174 Fuse for toilet
1 Control unit
2 Flat fuse 7.5 A/brown
Fig. 175 240 V automatic circuit breaker
148 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Electrical system
9
149Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
10Applianc es
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions regarding the appliances of the vehicle.
The instructions refer exclusively to the operation of the appliances.
Further information about the appliances can be found in the instruction man-
uals for the appliances, included separately with the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
heater
air conditioning unit
boiler
gas cooker
gas oven
microwave oven
extractor hood
refrigerator
10.1 General
The heater, boiler, cooker, refrigerator and air conditioning unit are fitted
depending on the model of the vehicle.
In this instruction manual a description is given only for the operation of the
appliances and their particular features.
To operate gas appliances, first open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and
the gas isolator tap corresponding to the appliance.
The heat exchanger of the Truma hot-air heater has to be replaced after
30 years. The heat exchanger of the Alde hot-water heater has to be
replaced after 10 years. Only the manufacturer of the heater or an author-
ised specialist workshop is allowed to replace the heat exchanger. The
operator of the heater must see to it that the parts are replaced.
For safety reasons, spare parts for pieces of heating appliances must cor-
respond with manufacturer's instructions and be permitted by the manufac-
turer as a spare part. These spare parts may only be fitted by the
manufacturer or an authorised specialist workshop.
Further information can be obtained in the instruction manual for the
respective appliance.
Fig. 176 Symbols for the gas isolator
taps
1 Refrigerator
2Cooker
3 Heater/boiler
4Oven
150 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
10.2 Heater
Initial start-up When lighting the heater for the first time a small amount of smoke and odour
will occur. Immediately set the operating switch of the heater to its highest
position. Open doors and windows and ventilate well. Smoke and odour will
disappear by themselves after a while.
10.2.1 Models with waste gas vent on the right-hand side of the
vehicle
10.2.2 To heat properly
Hot air distribution Several air outlet nozzles (Fig. 177) are built into the vehicle. Pipes conduct
the warm air to the air outlet nozzles. Turn the air outlet nozzles in a suitable
position so the air can escape as required. To avoid draft close the air outlet
nozzles on the dashboard and set the air distribution of the base vehicle to air
circulation.
Adjusting the air outlet
nozzles
Fully open: Full hot air stream
Half or partially open: Reduced hot air stream
When five air outlet nozzles are completely opened, less warm air escapes
through each nozzle. However, if only three air outlet nozzles are opened,
more warm air flows out of each nozzle.
Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
Never run the heater in gas operation when refuelling, on ferries or in the
garage. Danger of explosion!
Never operate the heater in gas operation in closed spaces (e.g.
garages). Danger of poisoning and suffocation!
If the awning is put up and the heater is running in gas operation,
exhaust gases from the heater can escape into the awning area. Danger
of suffocation! Make sure the area is sufficiently ventilated.
Fig. 177 Air outlet nozzle
151Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
10.2.3 Truma Combi hot-air heater
Depending on the equipment, different heaters are installed in the vehicles.
The heaters differ with regard to the energy type with which they can be oper-
ated.
Operating modes All heaters have two operating modes:
Winter operation
Summer operation
It is only possible to heat the vehicle in the "Winter" operating mode. With the
"Summer" operating mode only water in the boiler is heated. It is not possible
to heat the vehicle in this operating mode.
Selecting operating mode:
Set the operating mode using the rotary switch (Fig. 178,3).
The power supply of the heater cannot be interrupted by means of the 12 V
main switch.
Variant: Heater with gas
operation
The heater is operated exclusively with gas.
Winter operation The heater selects the necessary burner setting according to the required
room temperature. When the required room temperature is reached, the
burner is switched off. The room temperature is measured by the temperature
sensor next to the panel. In "Heater and boiler" operating mode (Fig. 178,6)
water in the boiler is also heated. In the operating mode "Heater without boiler"
(Fig. 178,5) the heater can be operated with an empty boiler.
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Heater/
boiler".
Turn the temperature control knob (Fig. 178,1) on the operating unit to the
desired heating level.
Set rotary switch (Fig. 178,3) to winter operation "Heater without boiler"
(Fig. 178,5) or to winter operation "Heater and boiler" (Fig. 178,6).
When there is a danger of frost the heater is not in operation, empty the
heating system.
Do not use the space above and behind the heater as a storage compart-
ment.
The circulation fan is automatically switched on when the hot-air heater is
activated, and it stays on. This puts an immense strain on the living area
battery, if the vehicle is connected to an external 240 V power supply. Take
into consideration that the living area battery only has limited reserves of
energy.
Fig. 178 Operating unit for heater/boiler
1 Temperature control knob
2 Summer operation water tempera-
ture 40 °C or 60 °C
3 Rotary switch
4Off
5 Winter operation "Heater without
boiler"
6 Winter operation "Heater and boiler"
7 Green indicator lamp "Heating opera-
tion"
8 Red indicator lamp "Fault"
9 Yellow indicator lamp "Boiler heating-
up phase"
152 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
Green indicator lamp (Fig. 178,7) is on.
The circulation fan automatically switches on when the heater is activated.
Switching off:
Turn the rotary switch (Fig. 178,3) to " " (Fig. 178,4).
Close the gas isolator tap "Heater/boiler" and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle.
After switching off the heater, the circulation fan may still run for a moment to
use up the residual heat.
Summer operation It is not possible to heat the vehicle in "Summer" operating mode. In "Summer"
operating mode, only the water in the boiler is heated.
Variant: Heater with gas
and 240 V electrical
operation
The heater can be operated with different types of energy:
Gas operation (Fig. 179,3)
240 V electrical operation with the output levels 900 W (Fig. 179,2) or
1800 W (Fig. 179,1)
Gas and 240 V electrical operation (mixed operation) with the output levels
900 W (Fig. 179,4) or 1800 W (Fig. 179,5)
The combination gas operation and 240 V electrical operation reduces the
heating-up time (only possible when the heater on the operating unit (Fig. 178)
is set to winter operation).
When 240 V electrical operation is selected, the yellow indicator lamp illumi-
nates (Fig. 179,6).
240 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to
the 240 V power supply.
Select the output level for 240 V electrical operation so that it corresponds
to the fuse protection of the 240 V connection (900 W for 3.9 A fuse,
1800 W for 7.8 A fuse).
When the heater on the operating unit is set to summer operation and the
energy selector switch is set to mixed operation, the heater still runs only
in 240 V operation. The gas burner is not switched on.
Fig. 179 Energy selector switch for
heater/boiler
1 240 V electrical operation (1800 W)
2 240 V electrical operation (900 W)
3 Gas operation
4 Gas and 240 V electrical operation
(900 W)
5 Gas and 240 V electrical operation
(1800 W)
6 Yellow indicator lamp "240 V elec-
trical operation"
Further information can be obtained from the separate "Gas heater"
instruction manual.
For further information about the use of the boiler see section "Boiler".
153Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
10.2.4 Trumatic C hot-air heater
Depending on the equipment, different heaters are installed in the vehicles.
The heaters differ with regard to the energy type with which they can be oper-
ated.
Operating modes All heaters have two operating modes:
Winter operation
Summer operation
It is only possible to heat the vehicle in the "Winter" operating mode. With the
"Summer" operating mode only water in the boiler is heated. It is not possible
to heat the vehicle in this operating mode.
Selecting operating mode:
Set the operating mode using the rotary switch (Fig. 180,3).
The power supply of the heater cannot be interrupted by means of the 12 V
main switch.
Variant: Heater with gas
operation
The heater is operated exclusively with gas.
Winter operation The heater selects the necessary burner setting according to the required
room temperature. When the required room temperature is reached, the
burner is switched off. The room temperature is measured by the temperature
sensor next to the panel. In "Heater and boiler" operating mode (Fig. 180,6)
water in the boiler is also heated. In the operating mode "Heater without boiler"
(Fig. 180,5) the heater can be operated with an empty boiler.
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Heater/
boiler".
Turn the temperature control knob (Fig. 180,1) on the operating unit to the
desired heating level.
Set rotary switch (Fig. 180,3) to winter operation "Heater without boiler"
(Fig. 180,5) or to winter operation "Heater and boiler" (Fig. 180,6).
When there is a danger of frost the heater is not in operation, empty the
heating system.
Do not use the space above and behind the heater as a storage compart-
ment.
The circulation fan is automatically switched on when the hot-air heater is
activated, and it stays on. This puts an immense strain on the living area
battery, if the vehicle is connected to an external 240 V power supply. Take
into consideration that the living area battery only has limited reserves of
energy.
Fig. 180 Operating unit for heater/boiler
1 Temperature control knob
2 Summer operation water tempera-
ture 40 °C or 60 °C
3 Rotary switch
4Off
5 Winter operation "Heater without
boiler"
6 Winter operation "Heater and boiler"
7 Green indicator lamp "Heating opera-
tion"
8 Red indicator lamp "Fault"
(dependent on model)
9 Yellow indicator lamp "Boiler heating-
up phase"
154 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
Green indicator lamp (Fig. 180,7) is on.
The circulation fan automatically switches on when the heater is activated.
Switching off:
Set the rotary switch (Fig. 180,3) to " " (Fig. 180,4).
Close the gas isolator tap "Heater/boiler" and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle.
After switching off the heater, the circulation fan may still run for a moment to
use up the residual heat.
Summer operation It is not possible to heat the vehicle in "Summer" operating mode. In "Summer"
operating mode, only the water in the boiler is heated.
Variant: Heater with gas
and 240 V electrical
operation
The heater can be operated with different types of energy:
Gas operation (Fig. 181,3)
240 V electrical operation with the output levels 900 W (Fig. 181,2) or
1800 W (Fig. 181,1)
Gas and 240 V electrical operation (mixed operation) with the output levels
900 W (Fig. 181,4) or 1800 W (Fig. 181,5)
The combination gas operation and 240 V electrical operation reduces the
heating-up time (only possible when the heater on the operating unit (Fig. 180)
is set to winter operation).
When 240 V electrical operation is selected, the yellow indicator lamp illumi-
nates (Fig. 181,6).
240 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to
the 240 V power supply.
Select the output level for 240 V electrical operation so that it corresponds
to the fuse protection of the 240 V connection (900 W for 3.9 A fuse,
1800 W for 7.8 A fuse).
When the heater on the operating unit is set to summer operation and the
energy selector switch is set to mixed operation, the heater still runs only
in 240 V operation. The gas burner is not switched on.
Fig. 181 Energy selector switch for
heater/boiler
1 240 V electrical operation (1800 W)
2 240 V electrical operation (900 W)
3 Gas operation
4 Gas and 240 V electrical operation
(900 W)
5 Gas and 240 V electrical operation
(1800 W)
6 Yellow indicator lamp "240 V elec-
trical operation"
Further information can be obtained from the separate "Gas heater"
instruction manual.
For further information about the use of the boiler see section "Boiler".
155Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
10.2.5 Alde hot-water heater
The hot-water heater has been fitted below in the wardrobe.
Operating unit The operating unit is divided into two sections:
Display (touch screen)
Control buttons
Control buttons The control buttons have the following functions:
Display The display (Fig. 182,1) is designed as a touch screen. Touching the symbols
calls up the relevant function.
Start screen The Start screen appears on the display after the heater is switched on. The
Start screen contains the following information:
Never run hot-water heater without heating fluid. Observe notes in
chapter 13.
Never drill holes in the floor. This might damage the hot-water pipes.
Do not use the space above and behind the heater as a storage compart-
ment.
The circulating pump must always be turned on when the hot-water heater
is in operation.
We recommend to bleed the heating system after the initial heater opera-
tion and to check the glycol content. Observe notes in chapter 13.
When the heater is turned on, it starts with the last settings used.
For further information, see the separate manufacturer's instruction manual
and observe the maintenance instructions found in chapter 13.
For further information about the use of the boiler see section "Boiler".
Fig. 182 Operating unit for hot-water
heater
1 Display (touch screen)
2 "Menu" button
3 On/Off button
When no button is pressed, the operating unit automatically switches to
home position after two minutes.
Changes to the settings are saved automatically after 10 seconds.
Pos. in
Fig. 182
Button Function
2 MENU Open adjustment menu
3
Activate heating
156 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
Adjustment menu The "MENU" button calls up the adjustment menu. The meanings of the indi-
vidual symbols are described in the following table.
The values can be increased or reduced via the "+" or "-" symbols.
Tool menus The various heater functions can be called up and adjusted via the tool menus.
The arrow symbols are used to change between the menus. The meanings of
the individual symbols are described in the manufacturer's instruction manual.
Selecting the operating
mode
The hot-water heater can be operated with the following energy sources:
Gas operation
240 V electrical operation
Gas and 240 V electrical operation
The operating mode is selected from the operating unit.
Selecting gas operation:
Press the "On" button next to the " " symbol. The gas operation is acti-
vated.
Selecting 240 V electrical
operation:
Press the "+" button next to the " " symbol until the desired heat output
is reached.
Selecting gas and 240 V
electrical operation:
Select gas operation and 240 V electrical operation on the operating unit.
Symbol Signification
This symbol appears when the circulating pump is activated
This symbol appears when a switching facility for gas cylinders
is activated
This symbol appears when a voltage of 240 V is present at the
heater
The internal temperature is displayed next to this symbol
The external temperature is displayed next to this symbol if an
external sensor is fitted
Symbol Signification
Set the desired temperature of +5 °C to +30 °C
Set the water temperature in the boiler
Set the heat output in electrical operation
Activate the function "Heating in gas operation"
Call up the enabling menu for the tool menus
Select the output level during 240 V electrical operation in such a way that
it corresponds to the 240 V connection protection:
Level 1 (1050 W) at 6 A
Level 2 (2100 W) at 10 A
Level 3 (3150 W) at 16 A
157Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
When the heater is turned on, it starts with the last set operating mode.
Switching on the heater:
Press " " button. The Start screen appears in the display. The heater
starts automatically.
Switching the heater off:
Press " " button. The heater is turned off.
Alde heat exchanger
The heat exchanger can be used to heat the living area of the vehicle during
travel without operating the hot-water heater in the living area.
The heat exchanger is connected to the vehicle engine's cooling circuit and
thus has the same function as the vehicle heater.
Heat output is set with the living area's heating regulator.
The heat exchanger stopcock is located directly on the exchanger.
Turning on:
Set stopcock handle (Fig. 183,1) parallel to the pipe.
Shutting off:
Set drain cock handle (Fig. 183,1) at a right angle to the pipe.
Alde auxiliary circulating
pump
If gas and 240 V electrical operation is selected and if the vehicle is con-
nected to the 240 V power supply, then the hot-water heater at first only
operates in 240 V electric operation. Only if the heat output is insufficient
does the gas operation also automatically switch on.
The gas operation is only possible when the regulator tap on the gas bottle
and the gas isolator tap are opened.
240 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to
the 240 V power supply.
The heat exchanger only works when the vehicle engine is running.
If the heat exchanger is not being used (as in the summer), the heat
exchanger on the stopcock should be shut off.
Fig. 183 Alde heat exchanger
The auxiliary circulating pump works only if the heat exchanger has been
installed and started, and the hot-water heater is running.
158 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
The auxiliary circulating pump (Fig. 184,1) can be used to heat the vehicle
engine when parked.
The auxiliary circulating pump is connected to the vehicle engine's cooling cir-
cuit and thus functions as an engine heater.
The auxiliary circulating pump switch (Fig. 185,2) is located next to the hot-
water heater operating unit. The yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 185,1) illuminates
when the pump is operated.
Setting the rotational
speed of the circulating
pump
The rotational speed of the circulating pump can be set with the sliding switch
(Fig. 186,2). At a lower rotary speed, the operating sounds of the pump are
quieter.
The sliding regulator is located in the hot-water heater area.
Setting the output:
Push sliding trap (Fig. 186,1) towards the right. The output is reduced.
Push sliding trap towards the left. The output is increased.
240 V circulating pump Depending on the equipment, the hot-water heater has an additional 240 V cir-
culating pump.
If the vehicle is connected to the 240 V power supply, then it is possible to
switch to the higher output of the 240 V circulating pump.
Fig. 184 Auxiliary circulating pump Fig. 185 Operating switch for auxiliary
circulating pump
The hot-water heater is equipped with a very powerful pump. Only operate
the pump for approx. 5 minutes on full output when the system is emptied
or the pipes are bled. Otherwise, this will increase wear; loud operating
noises are the result.
Fig. 186 Rotational speed reduction
switch
159Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
The switch for switching between the 12 V circulating pump and the 240 V cir-
culating pump is located on the hot-water heater operating unit.
10.2.6 Arizona auxiliary heat exchanger
The auxiliary heat exchanger is built into the bench seat.
The auxiliary heat exchanger may be used to provide the vehicle's living area
with additional heat during the journey.
The auxiliary heat exchanger is integrated into the heat circulation of the base
vehicle and is therefore only in operation when the vehicle engine is running.
Switching on:
Turn the control knob (Fig. 187,1) of the flow control to the desired position.
The water circulation is open.
Turn the fan switch (Fig. 187,2) for the circulation fan in a clockwise direc-
tion.
Switching off:
Turn the fan switch (Fig. 187,2) to " ".
Turn the control knob (Fig. 187,1) of the flow control to its initial position.
10.2.7 Independent vehicle heater
The inside and the engine can be heated with the independent vehicle heater.
The heating of the engine can be switched off.
The independent vehicle heater can be turned on and off manually or with a
timer. The time for the heating to start can be exactly preselected from
1 minute to 24 hours. It is possible to program three switching on times, of
which only one can be activated. The maximum permitted operation time is
60 minutes.
Do not operate the auxiliary heat exchanger at petrol stations. Danger of
explosion!
The fan on the auxiliary heat exchanger can be used for ventilation.
The heat output is continuously adjusted.
Fig. 187 Operating controls for auxiliary
heat exchanger
Do not operate the independent vehicle heater in closed spaces. Danger
of suffocation!
Do not operate the independent vehicle heater at petrol stations. Danger
of explosion!
160 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
Switching on manually: Press the button (Fig. 188,7). The heating mode is displayed by the symbol
(Fig. 188,9). The fan will only be switched on when there is a coolant tem-
perature of 30 °C.
Switching off manually:
Press the button (Fig. 188,7). The symbol (Fig. 188,9) goes off.
Switching on the engine
heating:
Press the lower part of the switch (Fig. 188,4). Engine is preheated. The
fan is switched on immediately.
Switching off the engine
heating:
Press the upper part of the switch (Fig. 188,4). Engine stays cold.
Setting the time:
Press the button (Fig. 188,2). The time setting is displayed by the symbol
(Fig. 188,8).
Set the time with the buttons (Fig. 188,3 and 6).
Programming heating start:
Press the button (Fig. 188,5).
Set the switching on time within ten seconds, with the buttons (Fig. 188,3
and 6).
Selecting programmed
switching on time:
Keep pressing button (Fig. 188,5) until the selected programme number
(Fig. 188,1) appears in the display.
10.2.8 Heater for waste water tank and waste water pipes (winter
comfort package)
In order to prevent waste water fittings freezing up, the waste water tank and
the waste water pipes can be electrically heated separately.
When the heater is turned on, temperature sensors monitor the temperature
of the waste water tank and the waste water pipes. If the temperature falls
below 5 °C, the heating elements are switched on and the waste water tank
and waste water pipes are heated. If the temperature rises above a certain
level, the heating elements are switched off again.
Fig. 188 Operating unit for independent
vehicle heater
161Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
The control unit (Fig. 189) is installed in the wardrobe. The control lamps on
the control unit have the following meanings:
The indicator lamp (Fig. 189,2) lights up in green: Regulation in operation.
Indicator lamp (Fig. 189,1) lights up in red: Waste water tank is heated.
Indicator lamp (Fig. 189,3) lights up in red: Waste water pipes are heated.
To turn it on and off, use the rocker switch on the panel.
10.2.9 Electrical floor warming unit
The regulator for the electrical floor warming unit is located in the wardrobe.
Operating levels The electrical floor warming unit has four operating levels:
0 "Off"
20 V "Low heating level"
22 V "Medium heating level"
24 V "High heating level"
Fig. 189 Control unit
On models with electrical floor warming unit, never drill holes in the floor
or screw in any screws. Careful with sharp objects. There is danger of a
power cut or a short circuit due to damage to a heater wire.
Do not cover the regulator. Danger of overheating!
The electrical floor warming unit only operates if the vehicle is connected
to the 240 V power supply.
The output of the electrical floor warming unit alone is not sufficient to heat
the living area.
162 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
Switching on: Connect the vehicle to the 240 V power supply (see section 9.10.1).
Turn the control knob (Fig. 190,2) to the required heating level.
Switching off:
Turn control knob (Fig. 190,2) to "0" position.
After switching off, the floor remains warm for a while, due to residual heat.
If the regulator is overloaded, the overload protection is actuated. The pin
(Fig. 190,1) jumps out.
Switching on overload
protection:
Press the pin (Fig. 190,1) on the overload protection when the regulator is
cooled.
10.3 Air conditioning unit
10.3.1 Dometic
Fig. 190 Regulator for electrical floor
warming unit
If the unit is operating, always open at least one ventilation flap.
In the winter, vehicle heating can be supported but not replaced by the air
conditioning unit.
Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.
Fig. 191 Remote control
1 Symbol for automatic mode
2 Symbol for cold mode
3 Symbol for warm mode
4 Symbol for ventilation mode
5 Symbol for discharged batteries
6Time
7 Temperature display
8 Fan speed display
9 ON/OFF button
10 Fan speed button
11 "MODE" button
12 "CLOCK" button
13 Reset key
14 Interior temperature display button
"ROOM"
15 Store button "SET"
16 Light button "LIGHT"(optional)
17 Temperature unit change button
"F/C°"
18 Temperature decrease button "-"
19 Temperature increase button "+"
20 Display
163Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
To execute the individual switching commands, always point the remote con-
trol in the direction of the ceiling unit.
Operating modes The air conditioning unit has the following operating modes:
Automatic
Ventilation, manual
Cooling, manual
Heating, manual
Switching on:
Press the ON/OFF button (Fig. 191,9).
Press the "Mode" button (Fig. 191,11) as often as required until the
required mode (Fig. 191,1, 2, 3 or 4) is indicated on the display
(Fig. 191,20).
Use the "+" (Fig. 191,19) and "–" (Fig. 191,18) buttons to set the desired
temperature.
Use the fan speed button (Fig. 191,10) to select the desired fan level.
Switching off:
Press the ON/OFF button (Fig. 191,9).
LED The LED (Fig. 192,4) on the ceiling unit (Fig. 192,1) displays the operating
status of the air conditioning unit:
Air current The air current can be directed in different directions. The distribution of the air
current toward the front or back is continuously adjustable.
Adjusting air current:
Align the two deflectors (Fig. 192,3 and 5) in the desired position.
Rotate knob (Fig. 192,2) on sliding regulator in an anticlockwise direction.
The sliding regulator for air distribution is released.
Fig. 192 Air conditioning unit (Dometic)
Status LED Signification
Off Air conditioning unit off
Orange Air conditioning unit ready to operate
Green Air conditioning unit in operation
Red (continuous) No 240 V power connection
Red (flashes once intermit-
tently)
Fault in the interior temperature gauge
Red (flashes twice intermit-
tently)
Fault in the exterior temperature gauge
164 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
Slide the sliding regulator forwards or backwards to the desired position.
The side on which the sliding regulator is located is closed.
Turn the knob tight in the clockwise direction.
10.3.2 Truma
To execute the individual switching commands, always point the remote con-
trol in the direction of the receiver.
Switching on:
Connect the vehicle to the 240 V power supply. The air conditioning unit is
ready to operate.
Switch on the remote control with the switch (Fig. 194,7). The green indi-
cator lamp (Fig. 193,1) indicates cooling mode.
Set the desired operating mode with the key (Fig. 194,8).
"FAN": Only ventilation without cooling.
"COMFORT": Cooling. The fan output and the room temperature can be
set separately. The green indicator lamp in the receiver indicates the
compressor is in operation and therefore cooling mode.
Set the desired fan output and room temperature with the keys (Fig. 194,3
and 4) if necessary. The arrow (Fig. 194,9) indicates the selected setting
mode.
If the temperature set on the remote control is reached, the green indicator
lamp goes out, the compressor is switched off and the circulation fan con-
tinues to run.
Switching off:
To switch off, press the key (Fig. 194,7) on the remote control again.
The air conditioning unit only runs if the vehicle is connected to a 240 V
power supply.
The external 240 V power supply must be protected by a fuse of at least
3 A. It is otherwise not possible to operate the air conditioning unit properly.
Fig. 193 Receiver Fig. 194 Remote control
An additional key switch (Fig. 193,2) is on the receiver, which can be used
to switch the air conditioning unit off or on without remote control. If the air
conditioning unit is switched on by means of this key switch, the operating
mode set last on the remote control is automatically selected.
Condensation accumulates on the vaporiser in cooling mode. To counter-
act any formation of germs, operate the air conditioning unit about 5 to
10 minutes in the "FAN" and "HIGH" positions to dry the vaporiser.
165Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
Timer The air conditioning unit can be switched on or off automatically from the cur-
rent time up to 15 hours in advance with the integrated timer. Pre-program-
ming up to a certain time is not possible.
To program, switch on the air conditioning unit with the key (Fig. 194,7) on
the remote control.
Set the desired operating mode and room temperature with the keys
(Fig. 194,8, 3 and 4).
Use the key (Fig. 194,5) to select the desired function (Fig. 194,1):
"ON": Switching on
"OFF": Switching off
Use the keys (Fig. 194,4) to select the desired switching time (1 to
15 hours). The arrow (Fig. 194,2) flashes and indicates the setting mode.
If "ON" (switch on) was selected, the air conditioning unit must be switched
off again with the remote control after the setting process. The indicator
lamp in the receiver flashes and confirms the programming.
The indicator lamp in the receiver flashes and confirms the programming if
"OFF" (switch off) was selected. Do not switch off the air conditioning unit
with the remote control.
10.4 Boiler
To go easy on the batteries in the remote control, the infrared transmitter
can be covered by hand and the remote control then switched off after the
"OFF" programming. In this way no signal is transferred to the receiver and
the programming is retained.
The key (Fig. 194,6) is used to send the settings of the remote control
repeatedly to the receiver.
Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction
manual.
Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
Never run the boiler in gas operation when refuelling, on ferries or in the
garage. Danger of explosion!
Never operate the boiler in gas operation in closed spaces (e.g.
garages). Danger of poisoning and suffocation!
The water in the boiler can be heated up to 65 °C. Risk of scalding!
Never use boiler when empty.
If the boiler is not being used, empty it if there is any risk of frost.
Only operate the boiler with the maximum temperature setting if you
require a large quantity of warm water. This protects the boiler against the
build-up of limescale.
Dethleffs recommends that water from the boiler is not used as drinking
water.
166 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
10.4.1 Models with waste gas vent on the right-hand side of the
vehicle
10.4.2 Truma Combi boiler
The boiler is integrated into the heater and is operated with gas (gas opera-
tion) or with gas and/or electricity (gas and 240 V electrical operation). The
boiler is switched on by turning the rotary switch (Fig. 195,2) on the operating
unit (Fig. 195). The type of energy is pre-selected (gas and 240 V electrical
operation) with the energy selector switch (Fig. 197).
In winter operation "Heater and boiler" (Fig. 195,3) the water is automatically
heated up when the heater is switched on. If the heater switches off after the
required room temperature has been reached, the boiler will continue to heat
up until the set water temperature has been reached.
In summer operation (Fig. 195,1) only the water in the boiler is heated up to
either 40 °C or 60 °C. The water is heated to 60 °C in approx. 25 minutes. The
yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 195,5) illuminates during the boiler heating-up
period.
The power supply for the appliance cannot be interrupted by means of the
12 V main switch. When there is a fault, the red indicator lamp (Fig. 195,4) on
the operating unit illuminates (see chapter 15).
Safety/drainage valve The boiler is equipped with a safety/drainage valve (Fig. 196). The safety/
drainage valve prevents water in the boiler from freezing, when there is frost
and the heater is not switched on.
If the awning is put up and the boiler is running in gas operation, exhaust
gases from the boiler can escape into the awning area. Danger of suffo-
cation! Make sure the area is sufficiently ventilated.
Fig. 195 Operating unit for heater/boiler
1 Summer operation water tempera-
ture 40 °C or 60 °C
2 Rotary switch
3 Winter operation "Heater and boiler"
4 Red indicator lamp "Fault"
5 Yellow indicator lamp "Boiler heating-
up phase"
When the vehicle is not used for a long period of time, open the safety/
drainage valve and empty the boiler.
At temperatures below 2 °C the safety/drainage valve opens automatically.
Before filling the boiler, switch on the heater and wait until the temperature
on the safety/drainage valve is above 6 °C. Only then can the safety/
drainage valve be closed once again.
The water pump and the water fittings are not protected against freezing by
the safety/drainage valve.
The drainage neck of the safety/drainage valve has to be free of dirt (e.g.
leaves, ice) at all times.
167Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
Variant: Boiler with gas
operation
The boiler is operated exclusively with gas.
Winter operation In the "heater and boiler" switch setting in winter operation, the boiler is
already switched on.
Summer operation In summer operation the water can be heated up to 40 °C or 60 °C.
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Heater/
boiler".
Set the rotary switch (Fig. 195,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 195) to
"Summer operation" (Fig. 195,1).
The yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 195,5) is illuminated during the heating up
period. When the set water temperature is reached, the period of heating up
is finished and the yellow indicator lamp fades.
Switching off:
Set the rotary switch (Fig. 195,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 195) to " ".
Close the gas isolator tap "Heater/boiler" and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle.
Variant: Boiler with gas
and 240 V electrical
operation
Fig. 196 Safety/drainage valve of the
boiler
240 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to
the 240 V power supply.
Select the output level for 240 V electrical operation so that it corresponds
to the fuse protection of the 240 V connection (900 W for 3.9 A fuse,
1800 W for 7.8 A fuse).
When the boiler on the operating unit is set to summer operation and the
energy selector switch is set to mixed operation, the boiler still runs only in
240 V operation. The gas burner is not switched on.
168 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
The boiler can be operated with different types of energy:
Gas operation (Fig. 197,3)
240 V electrical operation with the output levels 900 W (Fig. 197,2) or
1800 W (Fig. 197,1)
Gas and 240 V electrical operation (mixed operation) with the output levels
900 W (Fig. 197,4) or 1800 W (Fig. 197,5)
The combination gas operation and 240 V electrical operation reduces the
heating-up time (only possible when the boiler on the operating unit (Fig. 195)
is set to winter operation).
When 240 V electrical operation is selected, the yellow indicator lamp illumi-
nates (Fig. 197,6).
Filling/emptying the boiler The boiler can be supplied with water from the water tank.
Filling the boiler with water:
Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel.
Close the safety/drainage valve. Turn the knob (Fig. 196,1) perpendicular
to the safety/drainage valve and press the button (Fig. 196,2) in.
Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned
on. The warm water pipes are filled with water.
Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles
in it. This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water.
Close all water taps.
Emptying the boiler:
Set the rotary switch (Fig. 195,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 195) to " ".
Open the safety/drainage valve. To do this turn the knob (Fig. 196,1) par-
allel to the safety/drainage valve. The snap fastener (Fig. 196,2) jumps out.
The boiler is drained to the outside by the safety/drainage valve.
Check whether the water has been drained completely from the boiler
(approx. 10 litres).
Fig. 197 Energy selector switch for
heater/boiler
1 240 V electrical operation (1800 W)
2 240 V electrical operation (900 W)
3 Gas operation
4 Gas and 240 V electrical operation
(900 W)
5 Gas and 240 V electrical operation
(1800 W)
6 Yellow indicator lamp "240 V elec-
trical operation"
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Boiler".
169Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
10.4.3 Trumatic C boiler
The boiler is integrated into the heater and is operated with gas (gas opera-
tion) or with gas and/or electricity (gas and 240 V electrical operation). The
boiler is switched on by turning the rotary switch (Fig. 198,2) on the operating
unit (Fig. 198). The type of energy is pre-selected (gas and 240 V electrical
operation) with the energy selector switch (Fig. 200).
In winter operation "Heater and boiler" (Fig. 198,3) the water is automatically
heated up when the heater is switched on. If the heater switches off after the
required room temperature has been reached, the boiler will continue to heat
up until the set water temperature has been reached.
In summer operation (Fig. 198,1) only the water in the boiler is heated up to
either 40 °C or 60 °C. The water is heated to 60 °C in approx. one hour. The
yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 198,5) illuminates during the boiler heating-up
period.
The voltage supply for the unit and the safety/drainage valve cannot be inter-
rupted by the 12 V main switch. Depending on the model, the red indicator
lamp (Fig. 198,4) lights up on the operating unit for Trumatic C heater/boiler
when a fault occurs (see chapter 15).
Safety/drainage valve The boiler is equipped with a safety/drainage valve (Fig. 199). The safety/
drainage valve prevents water in the boiler from freezing, when there is frost
and the heater is not switched on.
Fig. 198 Operating unit for heater/boiler
1 Summer operation water tempera-
ture 40 °C or 60 °C
2 Rotary switch
3 Winter operation "Heater and boiler"
4 Red indicator lamp "Fault"
(dependent on model)
5 Yellow indicator lamp "Boiler heating-
up phase"
When the safety/drainage valve is closed a small electrical power flows
which puts an extra load on the living area battery. Therefore, a daily check
of the battery voltage panel is recommended. If the battery voltage drops
to below 10.8 V the function of the safety/drainage valve can no longer be
guaranteed.
When the vehicle is not used for a long period of time, open the safety/
drainage valve and empty the boiler.
At temperatures below 8 °C the safety/drainage valve opens automatically.
Therefore, you must switch on the living area heater and wait until the living
area temperature exceeds 8 °C before you fill the boiler.
The water pump and the water fittings are not protected against freezing by
the safety/drainage valve.
The drainage neck of the safety/drainage valve has to be free of dirt (e.g.
leaves, ice) at all times.
170 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
Variant: Boiler with gas
operation
The boiler is operated exclusively with gas.
Winter operation In the "heater and boiler" switch setting in winter operation, the boiler is
already switched on.
Summer operation In summer operation the water can be heated up to 40 °C or 60 °C.
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Heater/
boiler".
Set the rotary switch (Fig. 198,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 198) to
"Summer operation" (Fig. 198,1).
The yellow indicator lamp is illuminated during the heating up period. When
the set water temperature is reached, the period of heating up is finished and
the yellow indicator lamp fades.
Switching off:
Set the rotary switch (Fig. 198,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 198) to " ".
Close the gas isolator tap "Heater/boiler" and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle.
Variant: Boiler with gas
and 240 V electrical
operation
Fig. 199 Safety/drainage valve of the
boiler
240 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to
the 240 V power supply.
Select the output level for 240 V electrical operation so that it corresponds
to the fuse protection of the 240 V connection (900 W for 3.9 A fuse,
1800 W for 7.8 A fuse).
When the boiler on the operating unit is set to summer operation and the
energy selector switch is set to mixed operation, the boiler still runs only in
240 V operation. The gas burner is not switched on.
171Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
The boiler can be operated with different types of energy:
Gas operation (Fig. 200,3)
240 V electrical operation with the output levels 900 W (Fig. 200,2) or
1800 W (Fig. 200,1)
Gas and 240 V electrical operation (mixed operation) with the output levels
900 W (Fig. 200,4) or 1800 W (Fig. 200,5)
The combination gas operation and 240 V electrical operation reduces the
heating-up time (only possible when the boiler on the operating unit (Fig. 198)
is set to winter operation).
When 240 V electrical operation is selected, the yellow indicator lamp illumi-
nates (Fig. 200,6).
Filling/emptying the boiler The boiler can be supplied with water from the water tank.
Filling the boiler with water:
Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel.
Close the safety/drainage valve. In order to do this, pull the pull switch
(Fig. 199,1) up.
Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned
on. The warm water pipes are filled with water.
Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles
in it. This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water.
Close all water taps.
Emptying the boiler:
Set the rotary switch (Fig. 198,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 198) to " ".
Open the safety/drainage valve. In order to do this, push the pull switch
(Fig. 199,1) down. The boiler is drained to the outside by the safety/
drainage valve.
Check whether the water has been drained completely from the boiler
(approx. 12.5 litres).
Fig. 200 Energy selector switch for
heater/boiler
1 240 V electrical operation (1800 W)
2 240 V electrical operation (900 W)
3 Gas operation
4 Gas and 240 V electrical operation
(900 W)
5 Gas and 240 V electrical operation
(1800 W)
6 Yellow indicator lamp "240 V elec-
trical operation"
Because of the suction effect, a part of the water supply can be also
drained from the lines and the water tank. The water system is however not
completely emptied.
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Boiler".
172 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
10.4.4 Alde boiler
Switching the boiler on/
off
The boiler is integrated in the hot-water heater. A separate operation is not
possible. For operating the hot-water heater, see section 10.2.5.
Filling/emptying the boiler The boiler can be supplied with water from the water tank.
Filling the boiler with water:
Close drain cock. Position the rocking lever (Fig. 201,1) horizontally.
Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel.
Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned
on. The warm water pipes are filled with water.
Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles
in it. This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water.
Close all water taps.
Emptying the boiler:
Switch off boiler.
Open all water taps and set to the central position.
Open drain cock (Fig. 201). To do so, set the rocking lever (Fig. 201,1) in
a vertical position. The boiler is drained to the outside using the drain cock.
Check whether the water has been drained completely from the boiler
(approx. 12.5 litres).
10.5 Cooker
Fig. 201 Drain cock
Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction
manual.
Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
Before using the cooker make sure that there is sufficient ventilation.
Open windows or the skylight.
Do not use gas cooker or gas oven for heating.
Always protect your hands with cooking gloves or potholders when han-
dling hot pots, pans and similar items. There is a risk of injury.
173Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
10.5.1 Gas cooker
The vehicle kitchen unit is fitted with a three-burner gas cooker.
Depending on the model, the operating controls for the gas cooker are found
on the operating panel or directly on the gas cooker.
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Cooker".
Open the gas cooker lid.
Turn the control knob (Fig. 202,1) on the burner you wish to use to the igni-
tion position (large flame).
Press the control knob down and hold it.
Light the burner with a gas lighter, a match or other suitable means of
lighting.
Once the flame is burning, the control knob must be held down for 10 to
15 seconds, until the thermocouple automatically keeps the gas supply
open.
During activation and operation of the gas cooker, no flammable objects
or highly inflammable objects such as dishcloths, napkins etc. must be
near the gas cooker. Fire hazard!
The process of ignition must be visible from above and must not be cov-
ered by cooking pans placed on the cooker.
Depending on the model, the gas cooker lid is held closed by a spring.
When closing there is danger of getting injured!
Do not use the glass gas cooker lid as a hob.
Do not close the gas cooker lid while the gas cooker is in operation.
Do not apply pressure on the gas cooker lid when it is closed.
Do not place hot cooking pans on the gas cooker lid.
Keep the gas cooker lid open after cooking until the burners are cool. Oth-
erwise the glass plate could shatter.
Only use pots and pans whose diameter is appropriate for the gas cooker
burners.
When the flame goes out, the thermocouple automatically cuts the gas
supply.
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Gas cooker".
Fig. 202 Operating controls for gas
cooker
Fig. 203 Alternative: Operating controls
for gas cooker
174 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
Release the control knob and turn to the desired setting.
If ignition is unsuccessful, repeat the entire procedure.
Switching off:
Turn the control knob to the 0-position. The flame fades.
Close the gas isolator tap "Cooker" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
10.5.2 Gas oven (Spinflo)
Switching on: Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Oven".
Fully open the oven flap (Fig. 204,3).
Lightly press control knob (Fig. 204,2) and set to " " (oven) or " "
(grill).
Press the control knob (Fig. 204,2) and hold it down for 5 to 10 seconds.
Gas will stream into the burner.
Press the lighting switch (Fig. 204,1) repeatedly until there is a flame.
Once the flame is burning, the control knob must be held down for 10 to
15 seconds, until the thermocouple automatically keeps the gas supply
open.
Release the control knob and turn to the desired setting.
Keep the ventilation openings on the gas oven open at all times.
There must be no flammable objects near the gas oven when it is being
lit.
The oven flap must remain open when it is being lit.
If ignition has not taken place, repeat the entire procedure. If necessary,
check if there is gas and/or current in the gas oven.
If the gas oven still does not work, close the gas isolator tap and notify
your service centre.
If the burner flame is accidentally extinguished, switch the oven off and
leave the burner off for at least 1 minute. Then ignite it again.
When grilling, pull out the heat guard and leave the flap fully open.
Before using the gas oven for the first time run it for 30 minutes at max-
imum temperature without any contents.
When the flame goes out, the thermocouple automatically cuts the gas
supply.
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Gas oven".
Fig. 204 Gas oven (Spinflo)
175Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
Switching off: Turn control knob (Fig. 204,2) to " ". The flame fades.
Close the gas isolator tap "Oven" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
10.5.3 Gas oven (Dometic)
The oven is equipped with electronic ignition.
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Oven".
Gently press the control knob (Fig. 205,1) and turn left to any position.
Press the control knob and hold it down for 5 to 10 seconds. Ignition will
take place automatically.
Release the control knob and turn to the desired setting.
Switching off:
Turn the control knob (Fig. 205,1) to " ". The flame fades.
Close the gas isolator tap "Oven" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.
Keep the ventilation openings on the gas oven open at all times.
There must be no flammable objects near the gas oven when it is being
lit.
If ignition has not taken place, repeat the entire procedure. If necessary,
check if there is gas and/or current in the gas oven.
If the gas oven still does not work, close the gas isolator tap and notify
your service centre.
If the burner flame is accidentally extinguished, turn the control knob to
" " and leave the burner off for at least 1 minute. Then ignite it again.
Depending on the model the gas oven may come equipped with a grill.
Before using the gas oven for the first time run it for 30 minutes at max-
imum temperature without any contents.
When the flame goes out, the thermocouple automatically cuts the gas
supply.
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Gas oven".
Fig. 205 Gas oven (Dometic)
176 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
10.5.4 Microwave oven
Switching on: Open the door and place foodstuffs into the cooking area.
Close the door. A clicking noise can be heard when it engages.
Select the output on the control knob (Fig. 206,1).
Select the cooking time with the control knob (Fig. 206,2). Cooking begins.
The end of the cooking process is signalled by a signal tone. The microwave
oven will switch off automatically.
Switching off:
Open the door and remove foodstuffs.
Only qualified personnel may repair the microwave oven. Improper
repairs can cause major risks to the user.
The protection device against the escape of microwave energy should
never be removed.
Use the microwave oven only if it has been properly installed.
Only use the microwave oven when the door seal is free of damage.
Never leave the microwave oven unattended when it is in operation.
If there is smoke, keep the microwave oven closed, switch it off and
interrupt the power supply.
Operate the microwave oven only with the rotary plate and the rotary cross
in place.
Use only crockery suitable for microwave use.
The microwave oven only functions with correct 240 V power supply. In the
case of fluctuations of the voltage or of voltage below 230 V, the microwave
oven switches itself off completely. Therefore, do not switch on additional
240 V appliances when the microwave oven is in operation. Particularly in
southern countries it happens that the line voltage is described as having
230 V but it really does not amount to this value. So it may happen that the
microwave oven cannot be operated in these countries.
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Microwave oven".
Fig. 206 Operating controls for micro-
wave oven
177Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
10.5.5 Extractor hood
The cooking area is equipped with an extractor hood. The two-level fan blows
the cooking steam directly outside.
Use the switch (Fig. 207,1) to turn the extractor hood on and off.
Use the switch (Fig. 207,2) to turn the cooker lamps on and off.
10.6 Refrigerator
During the journey, only operate the refrigerator via the 12 V power supply. At
high ambient temperatures the refrigerator is unable to reach its full cooling
power. At high external temperatures, the full cooling power of the cooling unit
is only guaranteed if the refrigerator is ventilated sufficiently. In order to
achieve a better ventilation the refrigerator ventilation grill can be removed.
10.6.1 Refrigerator ventilation grill
Dometic
Removal:
Turn screw (Fig. 208,1 or Fig. 209,1) one quarter turn using a coin.
Remove refrigerator ventilation grill.
Fig. 207 Extractor hood
When leaving the vehicle, always mount the refrigerator ventilation grill.
Otherwise water can enter during rain.
Fig. 208 Refrigerator ventilation grill
(Dometic small)
Fig. 209 Refrigerator ventilation grill
(Dometic large)
178 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
Thetford
Removal:
Move the locking device (Fig. 210,1) to the middle.
Remove refrigerator ventilation grill.
10.6.2 Operation (Dometic 7 series, automatic ignition)
Operating modes The refrigerator has 2 operating modes:
Gas operation
Electrical operation (240 V AC or 12 V DC)
The operating mode is set with the operating controls on the refrigerator panel.
Gas operation
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger-
ator".
Set the energy selector switch (Fig. 211,1) to "GAS".
Fig. 210 Refrigerator ventilation grill
(Thetford)
Select only one energy source.
Even when the 12 V power supply is switched off, a small electrical power
flows which puts an extra load on the living area battery. Always switch off
the refrigerator for a temporary lay-up.
Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
It is not permitted to operate the refrigerator with car gas.
Fig. 211 Operating controls for the
refrigerator (Dometic 7 series)
1 Energy selector switch
2 "230 V" operating indicator
3 "GAS" operating indicator
4 "12 V" operating indicator
5 Control knob for setting the tempera-
ture
179Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
Set the control knob (Fig. 211,5) to maximum power. Gas supply is open.
Ignition will take place automatically. A ticking sound can be heard until
ignition has been completed successfully. The "GAS" operating indicator
(Fig. 211,3) lights up yellow.
Adjust the refrigerating temperature with the control knob.
Switching off:
Set energy selector switch to " ". Refrigerator is switched off.
Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle.
Electrical operation
The refrigerator can be operated with the following voltages:
240 V AC
12 V DC
Switching the 240 V
operation on:
Set energy selector switch (Fig. 211,1) to "230 V". The "230 V" operating
indicator (Fig. 211,2) lights up green.
Use the control knob (Fig. 211,5) to adjust the refrigerating temperature.
Switching the 240 V
operation off:
Set energy selector switch to " ". Refrigerator is switched off.
Switching the 12 V
operation on:
Set energy selector switch (Fig. 211,1) to "12 V". The "12 V" operating indi-
cator (Fig. 211,4) lights up green.
Use the control knob (Fig. 211,5) to adjust the refrigerating temperature.
Switching the 12 V
operation off:
Set energy selector switch to " ". Refrigerator is switched off.
When operated with 12 V, the refrigerator draws power only from the starter
battery of the vehicle. The starter battery only supplies the refrigerator with
12 V when the vehicle engine is running. When the vehicle engine is not run-
ning, the refrigerator is cut off from the power supply in the living area. For this
reason, change over to gas operation during prolonged driving breaks.
10.6.3 Operation (Dometic 7 series with automatic power selection
and frame heater)
Operating modes The refrigerator is equipped with automatic power selection (AES). The AES
automatically selects the optimal energy source and regulates the refrigerator
operation. Manual intervention to select the type of power is possible but not
required.
Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" when the refrigerator is operated
electrically.
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Refrigerator".
180 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
The AES selects from the following types of power:
Solar installation 12 V
240 V AC
12 V DC
Gas
Choosing the available energy source highest on the list.
240 V operation If the 240 V power supply is connected, this energy source is selected as the
first priority by the AES.
12 V operation 12 V operation is only selected by the AES if the vehicle's engine is running
and the alternator supplies sufficient 12 V operating power.
Gas operation
If the 240 V power supply is not connected and the vehicle's engine is not run-
ning the AES selects the gas supply. When selecting gas operation the igni-
tion fuse is opened automatically so gas can get into the burner. At the same
time the electronic ignition is activated. If the gas flame is extinguished, e.g. by
blast of wind, the ignition is activated immediately and re-ignites the gas.
When the gas operation is faulty, the "GAS" indicator lamp (Fig. 212,4) flashes
red.
Change-over between
energy sources
Even when the 12 V power supply is switched off, a small electrical power
flows which puts an extra load on the living area battery. Always switch off
the refrigerator for a temporary lay-up.
Fig. 212 Operating controls for the
refrigerator (Dometic 7 series
with AES and FH)
1 Frame heater (FH) button
2 Indicator lamp
3 Energy selector switch
4 Indicator lamps
5 Indicator lamps
6 Control knob for setting the tempera-
ture
Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
It is not permitted to operate the refrigerator with car gas.
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger-
ator".
Open flames are prohibited at petrol stations. If the stop takes longer
than 15 minutes, the refrigerator has to be turned off at the energy
selector switch.
181Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
When changing over between the different power sources there are forced
delays built in the AES. This means, that after a change-over to a new energy
source the refrigerator can not be operated immediately. When changing over
from 12 V operation to gas operation, a 15-minute delay is built in the AES.
This prevents a change-over to gas operation when the vehicle is stopped
briefly and the engine is switched off (e.g. stop to fill tank).
Refrigerating temperature
control
When turned on the first time the refrigerator automatically selects the middle
thermostat position. This position can be adjusted manually by using the con-
trol knob (Fig. 212,6). The indicator lamps (Fig. 212,5) show the selected ther-
mostat position. The refrigerating temperature for the three types of energy is
set with the control knob. It takes a few hours till the refrigerator reaches its
normal operating temperature. When changing over the operating mode the
thermostat setting will be maintained. The refrigerating temperature is retained
regardless of the type of power being used.
Frame heater (FH)
High external temperatures and high humidity can cause drops of water to
form on the metal frame of the freezer compartment. This is why the refriger-
ator is equipped with a frame heater for the freezer compartment. If the tem-
perature and humidity are high, switch on the frame heater by pressing the
button (Fig. 212,1). This prevents corrosion. If the frame heater is switched on,
the indicator lamp (Fig. 212,2) will be lit.
Manual operation
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger-
ator".
Select the energy type with the energy selector switch (Fig. 212,3). The
respective indicator lamp (Fig. 212,4) lights up green.
Adjust refrigerating temperature with the control knob (Fig. 212,6). The
indicator lamps (Fig. 212,5) show the selected thermostat position.
When the gas operation is faulty, the "GAS" indicator lamp (Fig. 212,4) flashes
red.
When operated with 12 V, the refrigerator draws power only from the living
area battery.
Switching off:
Turn the energy selector switch (Fig. 212,3) to " ". No indicator lamp
(Fig. 212,4) is lit.
Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle.
If the frame heater is switched on, it will always consume current. There-
fore, switch off the frame heater if the vehicle engine is off and the vehicle
is not connected to the 240 V power supply.
If the refrigerator is manually set to "12 V", it will constantly consume cur-
rent. Therefore, switch over to gas operation when the vehicle engine is
not running, and the vehicle is not connected to the 240 V power supply.
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Refrigerator".
182 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
10.6.4 Operation (Dometic 8 series)
Operating modes The refrigerator has 2 operating modes:
Gas operation
Electrical operation (240 V AC or 12 V DC)
The operating mode is set with the operating controls on the refrigerator panel.
Gas operation
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger-
ator".
Set the energy selector switch (Fig. 213,2) to " ".
Press the control knob (Fig. 213,3), turn it to the highest level and hold it
down. Wait until gas gets into the burner.
Press the gas ignition button (Fig. 213,4) and keep it pressed. Ignition will
take place automatically.
Keep gas ignition button (Fig. 213,4) pressed down until the flame indicator
(Fig. 213,1) becomes green and then release it.
Keep the control knob (Fig. 213,3) pressed for another 10 to 15 seconds,
then release it.
Adjust the refrigerating temperature with the control knob.
Switching off:
Set energy selector switch to " ". Refrigerator is switched off.
Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle.
Electrical operation
Select only one energy source.
Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
It is not permitted to operate the refrigerator with car gas.
Fig. 213 Operating controls for the
refrigerator (Dometic 8 series)
1 Flame indicator
2 Energy selector switch
3 Control knob for setting the tempera-
ture
4 Gas ignition button
Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" when the refrigerator is operated
electrically.
183Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
The refrigerator can be operated with the following voltages:
240 V AC
12 V DC
Switching the 240 V
operation on:
Set the energy selector switch (Fig. 213,2) to " ".
Use the control knob (Fig. 213,3) to adjust the refrigerating temperature.
Switching the 240 V
operation off:
Set energy selector switch to " ". Refrigerator is switched off.
Switching the 12 V
operation on:
Set the energy selector switch (Fig. 213,2) to " ".
Use the control knob (Fig. 213,3) to adjust the refrigerating temperature.
Switching the 12 V
operation off:
Set energy selector switch to " ". Refrigerator is switched off.
When operated with 12 V, the refrigerator draws power only from the starter
battery of the vehicle. The starter battery only supplies the refrigerator with
12 V when the vehicle engine is running. When the vehicle engine is not run-
ning, the refrigerator is cut off from the power supply in the living area. For this
reason, change over to gas operation during prolonged driving breaks.
10.6.5 Operation (Dometic 8 series with manual power selection
MES)
Operating modes The refrigerator has 2 operating modes:
Gas operation
Electrical operation (240 V AC or 12 V DC)
The operating mode is set with the operating controls on the refrigerator panel.
Gas operation
Further information can be obtained in the device manufacturer's instruc-
tion manual.
Select only one energy source.
Even when the 12 V power supply is switched off, a small electrical power
flows which puts an extra load on the living area battery. Always switch off
the refrigerator for a temporary lay-up.
Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
184 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
Switching on: Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger-
ator".
Press the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 214,1) down for 2 sec-
onds in order to switch on the appliance. The LED of the operating mode
chosen most recently lights up.
If appropriate press the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 214,1)
until the gas operating indicator " " lights up. Gas supply is open. Ignition
will take place automatically. A ticking sound can be heard until ignition has
been completed successfully.
Use switch (Fig. 214,6) to adjust refrigerating temperature.
Switching off:
Press down the on/off switch/energy selector switch for 2 seconds. Refrig-
erator is switched off.
Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle.
Electrical operation
The refrigerator can be operated with the following voltages:
240 V AC
12 V DC
Switching the 240 V
operation on:
Press the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 214,1) down for 2 sec-
onds in order to switch on the appliance. The LED of the operating mode
chosen most recently lights up.
If appropriate press the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 214,1)
several times until the operating indicator 240 V " " lights up.
Use switch (Fig. 214,6) to adjust refrigerating temperature.
Switching the 240 V
operation off:
Press down the on/off switch/energy selector switch for 2 seconds. Refrig-
erator is switched off.
Fig. 214 Operating controls for the refrigerator (Dometic 8 series with MES)
1 On/off switch/energy selector switch
2 Display-LED "open door" (only for central locking system of the refrigerator door)
3 Display-LED "fault"
4 Operating indicators
5 Display-LED "temperature range"
6 Switch for temperature setting
7 Door opener (only for refrigerator door central locking system)
Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" when the refrigerator is operated
electrically.
185Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
Switching the 12 V
operation on:
Press the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 214,1) down for 2 sec-
onds in order to switch on the appliance. The LED of the operating mode
chosen most recently lights up.
If appropriate press the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 214,1)
several times until the operating indicator 12 V " " lights up.
Use switch (Fig. 214,6) to adjust refrigerating temperature.
Switching the 12 V
operation off:
Press down the on/off switch/energy selector switch for 2 seconds. Refrig-
erator is switched off.
When operated with 12 V, the refrigerator draws power only from the starter
battery of the vehicle. The starter battery only supplies the refrigerator with
12 V when the vehicle engine is running. When the vehicle engine is not run-
ning, the refrigerator is cut off from the power supply in the living area. For this
reason, change over to gas operation during prolonged driving breaks.
10.6.6 Operation (Dometic 8 series with automatic power selection)
Operating modes
The refrigerator is equipped with automatic power selection (AES). If auto-
matic operation (AU) is selected, the AES automatically selects the optimum
energy source and regulates the refrigerator operation. Manual intervention to
select the type of power is possible but not required.
The AES selects from the following types of power:
Solar installation 12 V
240 V AC
12 V DC
Gas
Choosing the available energy source highest on the list.
In the case of a fault, the LED display fault will flash " " (Fig. 215,3).
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Refrigerator".
Fig. 215 Operating controls for the refrigerator (Dometic 8 series with AES)
1 On/off switch/energy selector switch
2 Display-LED "open door" (only for central locking system of the refrigerator door)
3 Display-LED "fault"
4 Operating indicator
5 Display-LED "temperature range"
6 Switch for temperature setting
7 Door opener (only for refrigerator door central locking system)
186 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
240 V operation If the 240 V power supply is connected, this energy source is selected as the
first priority by the AES.
12 V operation 12 V operation is only selected by the AES if the vehicle's engine is running
and the alternator supplies sufficient 12 V operating power.
Gas operation
If the 240 V power supply is not connected and the vehicle's engine is not
running the AES selects the gas supply. When selecting gas operation the
ignition fuse is opened automatically so gas can get into the burner. At the
same time the electronic ignition is activated. If the gas flame is extinguished,
e.g. by blast of wind, the ignition is activated immediately and re-ignites the
gas. In the case of a fault in gas operation the text "GAS" flashes in the oper-
ating indicator (Fig. 215,4).
Change-over between
energy sources
When changing over between the different power sources there are forced
delays built in the AES. This means, that after a change-over to a new energy
source the refrigerator can not be operated immediately. When changing over
from 12 V operation to gas operation, a 15-minute delay is built in the AES.
This prevents a change-over to gas operation when the vehicle is stopped
briefly and the engine is switched off (e.g. stop to fill tank).
Refrigerating temperature
control
When turned on the first time the refrigerator automatically selects the middle
thermostat position. This position can be adjusted manually by using the
switch for temperature setting (Fig. 215,6). The indicator LEDs (Fig. 215,5)
show the selected thermostat position. The refrigerating temperature for the
three types of energy is set with the switch. It takes a few hours till the refrig-
erator reaches its normal operating temperature. When changing over the
operating mode the thermostat setting will be maintained. The refrigerating
temperature is retained regardless of the type of power being used.
Even when the 12 V power supply is switched off, a small electrical power
flows which puts an extra load on the living area battery. Always switch off
the refrigerator for a temporary lay-up.
Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger-
ator".
Open flames are prohibited at petrol stations. If the stop takes longer
than 15 minutes, the refrigerator has to be turned off at the energy
selector switch.
187Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
Manual operation
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger-
ator".
Press the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 215,1) down for 2 sec-
onds in order to switch on the appliance. The operating mode selected
most recently is shown in the operating indicator (Fig. 215,4).
Select the energy type with the on/off switch/energy selector switch
(Fig. 215,1).
Set the refrigerating temperature on the switch for temperature setting
(Fig. 215,6). The indicator LEDs (Fig. 215,5) show the selected thermostat
position.
When operated with 12 V, the refrigerator draws power only from the living
area battery.
Switching off:
Press down the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 215,1) for 2 sec-
onds. All displays close.
Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle.
10.6.7 Operation (Thetford)
Operating modes The refrigerator has 2 operating modes:
Gas operation
Electrical operation (240 V AC or 12 V DC)
The operating mode is set with the button (Fig. 216,4) on the refrigerator
panel.
Refrigerating temperature
control
When turned on the refrigerator automatically selects the thermostat position
selected last. This position can be adjusted manually by using the button
(Fig. 216,1). The bars on the display (Fig. 216,3) indicate the selected thermo-
stat position. The refrigerating temperature for the three types of energy is set
with the button. It takes a few hours till the refrigerator reaches its normal oper-
If the refrigerator is manually set to "12 V", it will constantly consume cur-
rent. Therefore, switch over to gas operation when the vehicle engine is
not running, and the vehicle is not connected to the 240 V power supply.
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Refrigerator".
The refrigerator starts when it is switched on with the setting selected last.
The display lights up for about 10 seconds as soon as a button is pressed.
In the event of a malfunction, the display flashes in second clock pulses
and an error code is displayed (see section 15.6.2).
Select only one energy source.
Even when the 12 V power supply is switched off, a small electrical power
flows which puts an extra load on the living area battery. Always switch off
the refrigerator for a temporary lay-up.
188 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
ating temperature. When changing over the operating mode the thermostat
setting will be maintained. The refrigerating temperature is retained regardless
of the type of power being used.
Gas operation
Switching on:
Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger-
ator".
Press the button (Fig. 216,2). The display (Fig. 216,3) lights up in blue and
the current settings are displayed.
Press the button (Fig. 216,4). The current setting of the operating mode
appears on the display. To change the setting, press the button repeatedly
until the gas operating mode " " appears on the display. Gas supply is
open. Ignition will take place automatically. A ticking sound can be heard
until ignition has been completed successfully.
Press the button (Fig. 216,1). The current thermostat setting appears on
the display. To change the setting, press the button repeatedly until the
desired setting appears on the display.
Switching off:
Press the button (Fig. 216,2). The display (Fig. 216,3) is no longer lit up.
Refrigerator is switched off.
Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas
bottle.
Electrical operation
The refrigerator can be operated with the following voltages:
240 V AC
12 V DC
Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.
It is not permitted to operate the refrigerator with car gas.
Fig. 216 Operating controls for the
refrigerator (Thetford without
SES)
1 Button for thermostat
2 On/Off button
3 Display
4 Button for operating mode
Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" when the refrigerator is operated
electrically.
189Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
Switching the 240 V
operation on:
Press the button (Fig. 216,2).
Press the button (Fig. 216,4) repeatedly until the 240 V operating mode
" " appears on the display.
Press the button (Fig. 216,1) repeatedly until the desired thermostat setting
appears on the display.
Switching the 240 V
operation off:
Press the button (Fig. 216,2). The display is no longer lit up. Refrigerator is
switched off.
Switching 12 V operation
on:
Press the button (Fig. 216,2).
Press the button (Fig. 216,4) repeatedly until the 12 V operating mode " "
appears on the display.
Press the button (Fig. 216,1) repeatedly until the desired thermostat setting
appears on the display.
Switching 12 V operation
off:
Press the button (Fig. 216,2). The display is no longer lit up. Refrigerator is
switched off.
When operated with 12 V, the refrigerator draws power only from the starter
battery of the vehicle. The starter battery only supplies the refrigerator with
12 V when the vehicle engine is running. When the vehicle engine is not run-
ning, the refrigerator is cut off from the power supply in the living area. For this
reason, change over to gas operation during prolonged driving breaks.
10.6.8 Refrigerator door locking mechanism
With some models, the refrigerator has a separate freezer compartment. The
specifications in this section correspondingly also apply to the door of the
freezer compartment.
There are two positions for locking the refrigerator door in place:
Closed refrigerator door during travel and when the refrigerator is in oper-
ation
Slightly opened refrigerator door as a ventilation position when the refrig-
erator is switched off
Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual
"Refrigerator".
During the journey the refrigerator door must always be closed and locked
in the closed position.
Lock the refrigerator door in ventilation position when the refrigerator is
switched off. This prevents mould forming.
190 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
Dometic 7 series
Opening:
Push the lock (Fig. 217,1) to the left " ".
Use recessed grip to open refrigerator door.
Closing:
Fully close the refrigerator door.
Push the lock (Fig. 217,1) completely to the right " ".
Locking in the ventilation
position:
Slightly open refrigerator door.
Push the lock completely to the right. The door latch (Fig. 218,1) keeps the
refrigerator door in a fixed position. The refrigerator door will then stay
slightly open (Fig. 218).
Dometic 7 series with
separate freezer
compartment
Opening:
Push the lock (Fig. 219,1) to the side, so that the open lock " "
(Fig. 219,3) is completely visible.
Use recessed grip to open refrigerator door/freezer compartment door.
Closing:
Fully close the refrigerator door/freezer compartment door.
Push the lock (Fig. 219,1) to the side, so that the closed lock " "
(Fig. 219,2) is completely visible.
Fig. 217 Locking of the refrigerator door
(Dometic 7 series)
Fig. 218 Refrigerator door in ventilation
position (Dometic 7 series)
Fig. 219 Locking of the refrigerator
door/freezer compartment
door (Dometic 7 series with
separate freezer compartment)
Fig. 220 Refrigerator door/freezer com-
partment door in ventilation
position (Dometic 7 series with
separate freezer compartment)
191Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
Locking in the ventilation
position:
Slightly open refrigerator door/freezer compartment door.
Push the lock completely to the right. The door latch (Fig. 220,1) keeps the
refrigerator door/freezer compartment door in a fixed position. The refriger-
ator door/freezer compartment door will then stay slightly open (Fig. 220).
Dometic 8 series
Opening:
Press the release button (Fig. 221,1) and open the refrigerator door.
Closing:
Close the refrigerator door. The lock hook engages audibly.
When the vehicle has been positioned, the lock hook can be fixed. The refrig-
erator door can now be opened without having to press the release button.
Fixing the lock hook:
Press the fixture (Fig. 222,1) upwards. The lock hook (Fig. 222,2) is
pressed upwards and has no function.
Unlocking the lock hook:
Push the lock hook (Fig. 222,2) down. The lock hook functions again.
Locking in the ventilation
position:
Open the refrigerator door.
Press down the unlocking device (Fig. 223,2).
Push locking device (Fig. 223,1) forwards (Fig. 224).
If the refrigerator door is closed now, a gap will remain between the refrigerator
door and the refrigerator.
Fig. 221 Release button of the refriger-
ator door (Dometic 8 series)
Fig. 222 Lock hook fixture
Fig. 223 Locking device in normal posi-
tion
Fig. 224 Locking device in ventilation
position
192 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Appliances
10
Thetford
Opening:
Open the refrigerator door at the handle (Fig. 225,2). The lock (Fig. 225,1)
is released automatically.
Closing:
Fully close the refrigerator door. Ensure that the lock is engaged.
Locking in the ventilation
position:
Slightly open refrigerator door/freezer compartment door.
Open the lock (Fig. 226,2) and snap it into the locking catch (Fig. 226,1).
The refrigerator door will then stay slightly open.
Fig. 225 Lock of refrigerator door,
closed (Thetford)
Fig. 226 Refrigerator door in ventilation
position (Thetford)
193Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Sanitary fittings
11
11Sa nitary fittings
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions regarding the sanitary fittings of the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
water tank
waste water tank
complete water system
toilet compartment
toilet
11.1 Water supply, general
The vehicle is equipped with a fitted water tank. An electric water pump pumps
the water to the individual water taps. Opening a water tap automatically
switches on the water pump and pumps water to the tap.
The waste water tank collects the waste water. The water level in the water
and waste water tanks can be checked on the panel.
Fill water tank from supply systems that have been verified to provide
drinking water quality.
Only use such hoses or containers when filling that have been approved
for use with drinking water.
Thoroughly rinse filling hose or container with drinking water before use
(2 to 3 times capacity).
Empty filling hose or container completely after use and close openings
of the filling hose or container.
Water left standing in the water tank or in the water pipes becomes
undrinkable after a short period. Therefore, before each use of the
vehicle, thoroughly clean the water pipes and the water tank. After each
use of the vehicle completely empty the water tank and the water pipes.
In the case of lay-ups lasting more than a week disinfect the water
system before using the vehicle.
If the vehicle is not used for several days or if it is not heated when there is
a risk of frost, empty the entire water system. Leave the water taps on in
central position. Leave the safety/drainage valve (if there is one) and all
drain cocks open. Frost damage to appliances, frost damage to the vehicle
and deposits in water-carrying components can be avoided in this way.
The water pump will overheat without water and can get damaged. Never
operate water pump when the water tank is empty.
Before using the water fittings, the 12 V power supply on the panel must be
switched on. Otherwise the water pump will not work.
Two different types of pump are used as water pumps depending on the
model: Submerged pumps or pressurised water pumps.
194 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Sanitary fittings
11
Positions of the water
pumps
The submerged pumps are located in the water tank.
The pressurised water pumps (Fig. 227,1) are mounted on the outside of the
water tank.
11.2 Switch for water pump (winter comfort package)
The switch for the water pump (Fig. 228,1) is installed in the water tank area.
The water pump can be switched off with this switch. This prevents the water
pump from starting if the water system is empty and the water taps are
opened. Otherwise, the water pump will run hot and discharge the living area
battery.
11.3 Water tank
11.3.1 Drinking water filler neck with cap
Fig. 227 Pressurised water pump
Fig. 228 Switch for water pump
The cap for the drinking water filler neck and for the fuel filler neck are
very similar. Before filling the tank, always check the label.
195Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Sanitary fittings
11
The drinking water filler neck is on the right or left side of the vehicle,
depending on the model.
The drinking water filler neck is labelled with the word "WASSER" (water)
(Fig. 229,1 or Fig. 230,1). The cap is opened or closed using the key for the
external flap locks.
Opening:
Insert key into locking cylinder (Fig. 229,2 or Fig. 230,2) and turn a quarter
turn in an anticlockwise direction.
Remove cap.
Fill the water tank with drinking water.
Closing:
Place the cap on the drinking water filler neck.
Turn key one quarter turn in a clockwise direction.
Remove the key.
Check that the cap sits firmly on the drinking water filler neck.
11.3.2 Water drainage
Models with a double floor A hose line can be connected to the water drain neck under the floor of the
vehicle.
The drain cock (Fig. 231,1) is fixed in the double floor. The drain cock is
labelled by the word "Wasser" (water).
Models without double
floor
All models without double floor have no drain cock.
In these models, the water is drained through a stopper in the water tank.
Fig. 229 Cap for the drinking water filler
neck
Fig. 230 Cap for the drinking water filler
neck (alternative)
Fig. 231 Drain cock in the double floor
196 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Sanitary fittings
11
Remove the stopper (Fig. 232,1 or Fig. 233,1) from the drainage opening
(Fig. 232,2) by pulling or unscrewing it.
11.3.3 Filling with water
To fill the water tank with drinking water, proceed as follows:
Open drinking water filler neck (Fig. 229).
Fill the water tank with drinking water. Use a water hose, a water canister
with a funnel or similar for filling.
Close drinking water filler neck.
11.3.4 Draining water
Models with double floor To empty the water tank, proceed as follows:
Unlock and remove the cap (Fig. 234,2) from the water drain neck
(Fig. 234,1) by turning it a quarter turn in a clockwise direction.
Open the external flap (see section 7.2).
Mount suitable hose to the water drain neck (Fig. 234,1) or place appro-
priate container under the water drain neck.
Open drain cock (Fig. 231,1). The water will drain.
Close the drain cock.
Fig. 232 Stopper Fig. 233 Stopper
When filling the water tank, observe the maximum permissible gross
weight of the vehicle. Luggage must be reduced accordingly when the
water tank is full.
Fig. 234 Water drain neck and waste
water drain neck
197Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Sanitary fittings
11
Close the external flap.
Replace the cap and lock it by turning it a quarter turn in an anticlockwise
direction.
Models without double
floor
To empty the water tank, proceed as follows:
Unscrew the cap on the water tank.
Remove the stopper from the drainage opening by pulling or unscrewing it.
The water will drain.
Insert or screw in the stopper.
Screw the cap onto the water tank.
11.4 Waste water tank
11.4.1 Waste water tank (models with double floor)
With the models with a double floor, the waste water tank is heated by the hot
air of the living area heater. This protects the waste water tank from frost when
the living area heater is in operation.
Depending on the model, the waste water tap for waste water disposal is
located on the left or right hand side of the vehicle.
The waste water tap (Fig. 235,2) is fixed in the double floor. The waste water
tap is labelled with the word "Abwasser" (waste water).
A hose line can be connected to the waste water drain neck (Fig. 236,3).
Emptying:
Unlock and remove the cap (Fig. 236,4) from the waste water drain neck
(Fig. 236,3) by turning it a quarter turn in a clockwise direction.
Open the external flap (see section 7.2).
In case of frost add so much anti-freeze (such as kitchen salt) to the waste
water tank so that the waste water cannot freeze.
For models with an double floor: If the living area heater is out of order, the
waste water tank no longer is sufficiently protected against frost.
Never pour boiling water directly into the sink outlet. Boiling water could
cause deformation and leaks in the waste water pipe system.
Only empty the waste water tank at disposal stations, camping sites or car-
avan sites especially provided for this purpose.
Fig. 235 Waste water tap Fig. 236 Waste water drain neck
198 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Sanitary fittings
11
Mount suitable hose to the waste water drain neck or place appropriate
container under the waste water drain neck.
Open the waste water tap (Fig. 235,2). The waste water will run out.
Close the waste water tap.
Close the external flap.
Replace the cap and lock it by turning it a quarter turn in an anticlockwise
direction.
11.4.2 Waste water tank (models without double floor)
Depending on the model, the waste water tap for waste water disposal is
located on the left or right hand side of the vehicle.
The square bolt for opening the waste water tap is directly accessible under
the vehicle floor.
Emptying:
Place key (Fig. 237,2) onto the square bolt (Fig. 237,1).
In order to open the waste water tap, turn the square bolt a quarter turn.
Completely empty waste water tank.
To close the waste water tap, turn the square bolt back as far as it will go.
11.4.3 Odour seal
Fig. 237 Operation of the waste water
tap
For models without double floor, remove the siphon base if there is a risk
of frost. This protects the siphon from freezing up.
If the siphon base is removed and the vehicle is used: Place a suitable tank
under the siphon to collect the waste water (not applicable for models with
double floors).
For motorhomes that have had "winter comfort package" special equip-
ment installed in the factory, the waste water pipes are electrically heated.
When the temperature drops below 5 °C, the frost protection equipment
turns on automatically.
199Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Sanitary fittings
11
In order to prevent odours occurring in the waste water system, the vehicle -
depending on the model - has been equipped with odour seals (Fig. 238,1).
The odour seals are installed in the waste water pipes.
Clean the odour seals every two years at the latest. To do so, unscrew and
remove the bottom cover (Fig. 238,2).
With all the Globeline models, the odour seals are only accessible via a hole
in the floor plate. This hole is sealed with a cover plate and made splashproof.
To remove the siphon base, unscrew the four securing bolts and take off the
cover plate. The position of the cover plate is shown in the following illustra-
tion.
11.5 Filling the water system
Fig. 238 Odour seal
Fig. 239 Cover plate positions
1 Cover plate for T 7013
2 Cover plate for T 7043
3 Cover plate for T 6813 and T 7073
When filling the water tank, observe the maximum permissible gross
weight of the vehicle. Luggage must be reduced accordingly when the
water tank is full.
The water pump will overheat without water and can get damaged. Never
operate water pump when the water tank is empty.
The Truma system (heater/boiler) has an electric safety/drainage valve
and, depending on the model, one or two drain cocks for emptying.
Depending on the model, the Alde system (heater/boiler) has one or two
drain cocks for emptying.
The water quantity can be monitored on the panel while the water tank is
filled.
200 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Sanitary fittings
11
Position the vehicle horizontally.
Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel.
If necessary, switch on the water pump on the panel.
Clean or disinfect water system.
Close the safety/drainage valve (Truma). For this pull the pull switch
upwards or turn the knob perpendicular to the safety-/drainage valve and
press the button in.
If the temperature is below 6 °C, the safety/drainage valve cannot be
closed. Therefore switch on the living area heater and wait until the tem-
perature of the safety/drainage valve exceeds 6 °C.
Close all drain cocks. Position the rocking lever (Fig. 240,1) horizontally.
If needed, set the stopper into the drainage opening of the water tank or
screw it in.
Close all water taps.
Fill the water tank with drinking water.
Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned
on. The warm water pipes are filled with water.
Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles
in it. This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water.
Set all water taps to "Cold" and leave them open. This will fill the cold water
pipes with water.
Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles
in it.
Close all water taps.
Check that the cap on the water tank is not leaking.
11.6 Emptying the water system
Fig. 240 Drain cock
If the vehicle is not used for several days or if it is not heated when there is
a risk of frost, empty the entire water system. Leave the water taps on in
central position. Leave the safety/drainage valve (if there is one) and all
drain cocks open. Frost damage to appliances, frost damage to the vehicle
and deposits in water-carrying components can be avoided in this way.
If the water pump can be turned off from the panel, always turn off the water
pump from the panel before you empty the water system. Otherwise the
water pump runs until it overheats or the battery is empty.
201Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Sanitary fittings
11
To empty and ventilate the water system, proceed as follows. This prevents
frost damage and deposits:
Position the vehicle horizontally.
If necessary, switch off the water pump on the panel.
Switch off the 12 V power supply on the panel.
Shut off the boiler (see section 10.4).
Open all drain cocks. To do so, set the rocking lever (Fig. 241,1) in a ver-
tical position.
Open the safety/drainage valve (only for Truma boiler). For this press the
pull switch down or turn the knob parallel to the safety/drainage valve.
For models with water drainage in the water tank:
Unscrew the cap of the water tank.
Open the water tank drain (see section 11.3.4).
For models with an double floor: Remove the cap from the waste water
drain neck and open the drain cock.
Open all water taps and set to the central position.
Hang the shower handset up in the shower position.
Hold the water pump up until the water pipes are completely empty.
Check whether the water tank is completely empty.
Blow out the remaining water in the water pipes (max. 0.5 bar). To do this,
remove the pipe from the water pump and blow into the pipe.
Empty the waste water tank. Take note of the environmental tips in this
chapter.
Empty Thetford cassette. Take note of the environmental tips in this
chapter.
Clean the water tank and then rinse it out thoroughly.
Let the water system dry for as long as possible.
After emptying, leave all water taps on in the central position.
Leave all drain cocks open.
The Truma system (heater/boiler) has an electric safety/drainage valve
and, depending on the model, one or two drain cocks for emptying.
Depending on the model, the Alde system (heater/boiler) has one or two
drain cocks for emptying.
Fig. 241 Drain cock
202 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Sanitary fittings
11
11.7 Toilet compartment
The switches for the toilet compartment lighting are installed in different places
in the toilet compartment depending on the model.
For example, the light switch (Fig. 242,1) of the toilet compartment is located
under the bathroom cabinet.
Do not transport any loads in the shower tray. The shower tray or other
items of equipment in the toilet compartment can be damaged.
For ventilation purposes during or after a shower, and for drying wet
clothing, close the toilet compartment door and open the window or the
toilet compartment skylight. This improves the air circulation.
Close the shower curtain completely when showering, so that no water is
able to enter the area between the wash room wall and the shower tray.
After taking a shower, rinse soap residue from the shower tray, otherwise
cracks can appear in the shower tray over time.
After using the shower, wipe it dry to prevent moisture from collecting.
Further information about cleaning the toilet compartment can be found in
the section 12.2.
Fig. 242 Light switch
203Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Sanitary fittings
11
11.7.1 Pull-out toilet compartment
Depending on the model, the vehicle is fitted with a pull-out toilet compart-
ment. The toilet compartment can be modified in just a few manual actions so
that a fully-equipped sanitary room is available for washing etc.
Extending:
Open the wardrobe doors on both sides of the toilet compartment
(Fig. 243).
Rotate the spring latches (Fig. 243,2) through half a turn on both sides. The
wing of the locking lever must be at the highest point of the bevelled sleeve
(Fig. 244,1).
Pull out the toilet compartment as far as possible by the handles
(Fig. 243,1) without tilting it.
Turn the spring latches on both sides back half a turn and allow to engage
(Fig. 244,2).
Close the wardrobe doors again.
Pushing in:
Open the wardrobe doors on both sides of the toilet compartment
(Fig. 243).
Rotate the spring latches (Fig. 243,2) through half a turn on both sides. The
wing of the locking lever must be at the highest point of the bevelled sleeve
(Fig. 244,1).
Push in the toilet compartment as far as possible by the handles
(Fig. 243,1) without tilting it.
Turn the spring latches on both sides back half a turn and allow to engage
(Fig. 244,2)
11.7.2 Vario toilet
Depending on the model, the vehicle is fitted with a Vario toilet. A Vario toilet
can be changed with few maneuvers so that when the shower is in use, the
toilet is available in its own enclosed cubicle. This protects the toilet area from
water spray.
Fig. 243 Toilet compartment, pushed in Fig. 244 Toilet compartment locking
Only remove the inner part of the toilet door when it is closed.
Depending on the model, the Vario toilet is installed reverse to the one
shown here. The conversion is then also done reverse to the Vario toilet
shown.
204 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Sanitary fittings
11
Converting into a shower
cubicle
Push the latch (Fig. 245,1) right on the edge of the wash basin and lightly
pull the wash basin. The wash basin moves forwards with the rear wall.
Turn the wash basin and the rear wall (Fig. 246,1) in the direction indicated.
Enter the toilet compartment and close the toilet door (Fig. 246,2) from the
inside and lock.
Put the latch (Fig. 247,1) of the toilet door in a vertical position and open
the inner part of the toilet door.
Turn the inner part of the toilet door in the direction indicated and push
against the rear wall of the wash basin.
The shower compartment is completely set up and can be used.
Conversion to toilet
compartment
Turn the inner part of the toilet door and to close, place the latch
(Fig. 247,1) in a horizontal position.
Return the wash basin and the rear wall to the initial position and lock.
11.8 Toilet
Fig. 245 Vario toilet, locking the shower
wall
Fig. 246 Vario toilet
Fig. 247 Vario toilet, toilet door
If there is any risk of frost and the vehicle is not heated, empty the sewage
tank (cassette).
Do not sit on the lid of the toilet. The lid is not designed to bear the weight
of a person and could break.
Use a suitable chemical for this toilet. The ventilation will merely remove
the odour but not germs and gases. Germs and gases will have a detri-
mental effect on the sealing rubbers.
205Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Sanitary fittings
11
11.8.1 Swivel toilet (Thetford)
The flushing of the Thetford toilet is fed directly from the water system of the
vehicle or from its own water tank, which is integrated in the toilet.
Filling the water tank:
Open the fresh water filler neck for the toilet (Fig. 248,1) above the flap for
the Thetford cassette and swivel downwards.
Fill the water tank with fresh water. Use a water hose, a water canister with
a funnel or similar for filling.
Close the fresh water filler neck.
The toilet bowl can be moved into the optimal position.
The operating unit is located close to the toilet bowl.
Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction
manual.
Only empty the sewage tank (cassette) at disposal stations, at camping
sites or caravan sites, that are especially provided for this purpose.
Fig. 248 Fresh water filler neck for toilet
Fig. 249 Thetford toilet bowl, swivelling Fig. 250 Thetford toilet bowl, swivelling
(alternative)
206 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Sanitary fittings
11
Flushing: Before flushing open the sliding trap of the Thetford toilet. To do this, push
the slide lever (Fig. 249,1 or Fig. 250,1) in an anticlockwise direction.
For flushing, press the blue flush button (Fig. 251,1 or Fig. 252,1).
After flushing close the sliding trap. To do this push the slide lever in a
clockwise direction.
The indicator lamp (Fig. 251,2 or Fig. 252,2) goes on whenever the Thetford
cassette has to be emptied.
Emptying the water tank:
Open the sliding trap. To do this, turn the slide lever in an anticlockwise
direction.
Press the flush button until water ceases to flow into the bowl.
Close the sliding trap. To do this push the slide lever in a clockwise direc-
tion.
Empty Thetford cassette.
Emptying the Thetford
cassette:
Push the slide lever (Fig. 249,1 or Fig. 250,1) in a clockwise direction. The
sliding trap is closed. To empty, the sliding trap in the Thetford toilet must
be closed.
Remove the Thetford cassette and empty it as described in sections 11.8.5
and 11.8.6.
Fig. 251 Flush button/indicator lamp
Thetford toilet
Fig. 252 Flush button/indicator lamp
Thetford toilet (alternative)
207Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Sanitary fittings
11
11.8.2 Toilet with fixed seat
The flushing of the toilet is fed from the water system of the vehicle.
Flushing:
Before flushing open the sliding trap of the Thetford toilet. To do this, turn
the slide lever (Fig. 253,1) in an anticlockwise direction.
For flushing, press the blue flush button (Fig. 253,3).
After flushing close the sliding trap. To do this turn the slide lever
(Fig. 253,1) in a clockwise direction.
The indicator lamp (Fig. 253,2) goes on whenever the Thetford cassette has
to be emptied.
Emptying:
Turn the slide lever (Fig. 253,1) in a clockwise direction. The sliding trap is
closed. To empty, the sliding trap in the Thetford toilet must be closed.
Remove the Thetford cassette and empty it as described in sections 11.8.5
and 11.8.6.
11.8.3 Toilet (Dometic)
The flushing of the toilet is fed directly from the water system of the vehicle or
from its own water tank, which is integrated in the toilet.
Filling the water tank:
Open the fresh water filler neck for the toilet (Fig. 254,1) above the flap for
the sewage tank and swivel downwards.
Fill the water tank with fresh water. Use a water hose, a water canister with
a funnel or similar for filling.
Close the fresh water filler neck.
Fig. 253 Operating unit Thetford toilet
Fig. 254 Fresh water filler neck for toilet
1 Fresh water filler neck
208 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Sanitary fittings
11
Let some water run into the toilet bowl before using the toilet. In order to do so
press the flush button (Fig. 256,3) on the control and operating unit
(Fig. 255,2).
Flushing:
Before flushing open the sliding trap of the toilet. For this pull out the slide
lever (Fig. 255,1).
For flushing, press the flush button (Fig. 256,3).
After flushing close the sliding trap. To do so, push the slide lever back.
The indicator lamp (Fig. 256,2) goes on whenever the sewage tank is filled up
to 3/4.
The indicator lamp (Fig. 256,1) goes on whenever the sewage tank has to be
emptied.
Emptying the water tank:
Open the sliding trap. For this pull out the slide lever (Fig. 255,1).
Press the flush button until water ceases to flow into the bowl.
Close the sliding trap. To do so, push the slide lever back.
Empty the sewage tank.
Emptying the sewage tank:
Push the slide lever (Fig. 255,1) in. The sliding trap is closed. To empty, the
sliding trap of the toilet must be closed.
Remove the sewage tank and empty it as described in sections 11.8.5 and
11.8.6. The display "Sewage tank removed" (Fig. 256,4) lights up on the
control and operating unit.
Fig. 255 Toilet bowl with control and
operating unit
Fig. 256 Control and operating unit
toilet
209Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Sanitary fittings
11
11.8.4 Vacuum toilet (Dometic)
The flushing of the toilet is fed directly from the water system of the vehicle.
Putting into operation:
Turn on power supply. The yellow LED (Fig. 258,1) on the panel
(Fig. 257,1) turns on for ca. 1 minute. A vacuum is generated in the system.
If the green LED (Fig. 258,3) on the panel lights up, lift the pedal
(Fig. 257,3) briefly, so that some water runs into the toilet bowl (Fig. 257,2)
and the stopper on the bottom is covered with water.
The vacuum toilet is ready for operation.
Flushing:
Close the lid of the toilet.
Press down the pedal (Fig. 257,3) for several seconds.
Briefly lift the pedal, so that some water runs into the toilet bowl (Fig. 257,2)
and the stopper on the bottom is covered with water.
The red LED (Fig. 258,2) lights up if the cassette must be emptied or removed.
Removing the cassette:
Remove the cassette and empty it as described in sections 11.8.5 and
11.8.6.
Only flush the toilet if the toilet lid is closed.
Fig. 257 Vacuum toilet Fig. 258 Vacuum toilet panel
Flushing only functions if the green LED is lit.
210 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Sanitary fittings
11
11.8.5 Removing the cassette
Depending on the model, the sewage tank (cassette) can be accessed via a
special service flap on the outside of the vehicle or via the rear storage space.
Service flap The sewage tank (cassette) can be accessed via the special service flap.
Open the flap for the cassette on the outside of the vehicle. Insert the key
into the locking cylinder of the push-button lock (Fig. 259,1) and turn a
quarter turn.
Remove the key.
Press both push-button locks (Fig. 259,2) simultaneously with your thumb
and open the flap for the cassette.
Press the release (Fig. 260,1) and pull out the toilet cassette on the handle
(Fig. 260,2).
Rear storage space The sewage tank (cassette) can be accessed via the rear storage space.
Open the rear storage space flap (see section 7.2).
If the access to the sewage tank (cassette) is closed (Fig. 261,1): Pull out
the toilet compartment (see section 11.7.1).
Press the release (Fig. 262,2) and pull out the sewage tank (cassette) on
the handle (Fig. 262,1).
The sewage tank (cassette) can only be taken out if the sliding trap is
closed.
Fig. 259 Flap for the toilet cassette Fig. 260 Thetford cassette
Fig. 261 Sewage tank access, closed Fig. 262 Sewage tank access, open
211Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Sanitary fittings
11
11.8.6 Emptying the cassette
Take the cassette to a disposal point especially provided for this purpose.
As you do this, point the drainage neck upwards.
If necessary, turn the drainage neck upwards.
Remove the cap of the drainage neck.
Point the cassette with the drainage neck downwards.
For Thetford cassettes: Activate the aeration knob with your thumb. The
cassette empties.
Close drainage neck with the cap.
If necessary, return the drainage neck to its original position.
Push the cassette back to its original position.
Ensure that the cassette is secured by the retaining clip.
Lock the flap for the cassette.
Fig. 263 Emptying the Thetford cas-
sette
212 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Sanitary fittings
11
213Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Care
12
12Care
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions regarding the care of the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
exterior of the vehicle
interior
water system
extractor hood
toilets
winter operation
At the end of the chapter there is a checklist of measures you must carry out
if you are not going to use the vehicle for an extended period of time.
The checklist address the following topics:
temporary lay-up
winter lay-up
start-up after a lay-up
12.1 External care
12.1.1 Washing with a high-pressure cleaner
Before cleaning the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, observe the oper-
ating instructions of the high-pressure cleaner.
When cleaning with the nozzle for circular jet between the vehicle and the
cleaning nozzle, maintain a minimum distance of approx. 700 mm.
Take into consideration that the jet of water comes out of the cleaning nozzle
with pressure. The vehicle may be damaged by incorrect handling of the high-
pressure cleaner. The temperature of the water should not be above 60 °C.
Keep the jet of water in constant movement during the washing process. Do
not direct the water jet at clearances, built-in electrical parts, plugs, seals, the
ventilation grill or the skylights. The vehicle may be damaged or water may
enter the interior.
12.1.2 Washing the vehicle
Wash the vehicle only on a washing site intended for this purpose.
Avoid full sunshine. Observe environmental measures.
Only clean external applications and synthetic parts with plenty of warm
water, dish washing liquid and soft cloth.
Wash down the vehicle with plenty of water, a clean sponge or a soft brush.
In the case of stubborn dirt add dish washing liquid to the water.
Painted exterior walls may also be cleaned with a caravan cleaner.
Do not clean the tyres with a high-pressure cleaner. The tyres might be
damaged.
Do not spray external applications (deco-films) directly with the high-pres-
sure cleaner. The external applications could come off.
Never clean the vehicle in the car wash. Water can enter the refrigerator
grills, the waste gas vents, the ventilation of the extractor hoods or the
forced ventilations. The vehicle could be damaged.
214 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Care
12
Add-on parts made of glass-fibre reinforced plastic (GRP) require a regular
follow-up treatment with a polisher. This way these parts will not turn yellow
and the sealing of the surface remains intact.
Treat rubber seals of doors and storage flaps with talc.
Treat locking cylinder of doors and storage flaps with graphite dust.
12.1.3 Windows of acrylic glass
Acrylic glass windows are delicate and require very careful handling.
12.1.4 Underbody
The underbody of the vehicle is partly coated with an age-resistant underbody
protection. Should the underbody protection be damaged, repair immediately.
Do not treat areas coated with underbody protection with spray oil.
12.1.5 Waste water tank
Clean the waste water tank after every use of the vehicle.
Cleaning:
Empty the waste water tank.
Thoroughly rinse out the waste water tank with fresh water.
If possible, clean waste water sensors through the cleaning opening by
hand.
12.1.6 Entrance step
If the entrance step is lubricated, coarse particles of dirt can settle on the lubri-
cant during the journey and cause damage to the operating mechanism of the
entrance step. Therefore, do not lubricate the moving parts of the entrance
step.
Never rub acrylic glass windows dry as dust particles might damage the
surface!
Only clean acrylic glass windows with plenty of warm water, some dish
washing liquid and a soft cloth.
Never use glass cleaning agents with chemical, abrasive or alcohol-con-
taining additives. Premature brittleness of the panes and associated cracks
may result from their use.
Avoid contact of cleansing agents used for the body (e.g. tar- or silicone-
removing agents) with acrylic glass.
Do not clean vehicle in car wash.
Do not attach stickers to the acrylic glass windows.
Having cleaned the vehicle rinse acrylic glass with sufficient clear water.
Treat rubber seals with glycerin.
An acrylic glass cleanser with antistatic effect is suitable for a follow-up
treatment. Small scratches can be treated with an acrylic glass polish.
These agents are available at the accessories shop.
Only use products approved by the manufacturer. Our authorised dealers
and service centres will be happy to advise you.
215Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Care
12
12.1.7 Driver's cabin insulation mat (model I)
Clean the insulation mat for the driver's cabin with clear, lukewarm water.
Remove heavier soiling with a cloth and some white spirits. Afterwards, imme-
diately rinse the cleaned area with lukewarm water.
12.2 Interior care
Surface and knobs of furniture, lamps and synthetic parts in the toilet and
living area should be cleaned with water and a wool cloth. A mild cleanser
may be added to the water. If required, use furniture polish for the painted
surfaces.
Clean upholstery with dry foam specially manufactured for the use on
upholstery or with the foam of a mild detergent. Do not wash upholstery.
Always have it cleaned. Protect upholstery from direct sunlight so that it
does not loose its colour.
Clean the imitation leather coverings by wiping them off in circular motion
with a soft cloth or sponge and a mixture of lukewarm water and mild lather.
Treat stubborn stains with a soft brush. For very hard-to-remove stains, use
a mixture of alcohol and water mixed in a 1:1 ratio. Afterwards, wipe it off
with soap water. Do not use any products that contain solvents or abra-
sives.
Wipe off Teflon coverings with an absorbent cloth or sponge and use a mild
household detergent.
Never rub wet or oily stains. Instead, dab them with an absorbent cloth.
Work from the outside to the inside to prevent spreading the stain.
When treating solid or dried stains, always try to scrape them off with a dull
knife or scraper or remove them off with a soft brush. Afterwards, dab off
any residue with a moist cloth.
Curtains and net curtains should be dry cleaned.
Vacuum clean the carpet, if necessary clean with carpet shampoo.
If possible, treat stains immediately.
Acrylic glass windows are delicate and require very careful handling (see
section 12.1.3).
Synthetic parts in the toilet and living area are very delicate and should be
treated with care. Do not use solvents, alcohol-containing cleansers or
scourers containing sand. This procedure will help you to avoid brittleness
and formation of cracks.
Do not pour any corrosive agents into the drain holes. Never pour boiling
water directly into the drain holes. Corrosive agents and boiling water
cause damage to drainage pipes and siphon traps.
Do not use vinegar based products to clean the toilet and water system, or
for decalcification of the water system. Vinegar-based products may cause
damage to seals or parts of the installation. Use standard decalcifying
products for decalcification.
Save water. Mop up all remaining water.
Vacuum off carpets and cushions with a suitable brush attachment.
For information about the use of maintenance products, our representa-
tives and service centres will be glad to advise.
216 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Care
12
Clean PVC-floor covering with a mild, soapy cleanser for PVC floors. Do
not place carpet on wet PVC-floor covering. The carpet and the PVC-floor
covering may stick together.
Never clean the sink or the gas cooker with a scourer. Avoid anything which
may cause scratching or grooves.
Clean gas cooker only with a moist cloth. Prevent any water from pene-
trating the gas cooker. Water may damage the gas cooker.
Brush insect screens on doors, windows and skylights with a soft brush or
vacuum with the brush attachment of the vacuum cleaner.
Brush blinds with a soft brush or vacuum with the brush attachment of the
vacuum cleaner. Grease or stubborn dirt may be removed with a mild soap
at 30 °C (curd soap).
Brush Roman shades with a soft brush or vacuum with the brush attach-
ment of the vacuum cleaner. Grease or stubborn dirt may be removed with
a mild soap at 30 °C (curd soap).
Unrolled seat belts can be cleaned with warm soapsuds. The seat belt
must be completely dry before being rolled up.
12.3 Water system
12.3.1 Cleaning the water tank
Empty the water tank and close the drainage opening.
Remove the cap of the water tank.
Fill water tank with water and some washing-up liquid (do not use any
scourers).
Using a trade standard brush for washing dishes, scrub the water tank until
there is no longer any visible deposit.
Scrub also the pump housing.
If possible, clean fresh water sensors through the cleaning openings by
hand.
Rinse water tank with copious amounts of drinking water.
12.3.2 Cleaning the water pipes
Empty the water system.
Close all drain holes and drain cocks.
Fill mixture of water and cleaning agent into the water tank. Observe the
manufacturer's instructions regarding the mixing ratio.
Open the drain cocks one by one.
Leave the drain cocks open until the mixture of water and cleaning agent
has reached the respective drain.
Close the drain cocks.
Only use suitable cleaning agents as sold by the specialist trade.
Collect any emerging mixture of water and cleaning agent for correct dis-
posal.
217Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Care
12
Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them.
Leave the drain cocks open until the mixture of water and cleaning agent
has reached the drain.
Set all water taps to "Cold" and open them.
Leave the drain cocks open until the mixture of water and cleaning agent
has reached the drain.
Close all water taps.
Flush the toilet several times.
Allow the cleaning agent to act in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
Empty the water system. Collect the mixture of water and cleaning agent
for correct disposal.
For rinsing fill the entire water system with drinking water and empty again
several times over.
12.3.3 Disinfecting the water system
Empty the water system.
Close all drain holes and drain cocks.
Fill mixture of water and disinfectant into the water tank. Observe the man-
ufacturer's instructions regarding the mixing ratio.
Open the drain cocks one by one.
Leave the drain cocks open until the mixture of water and disinfectant has
reached the respective drain.
Close the drain cocks.
Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them.
Leave the drain cocks open until the mixture of water and disinfectant has
reached the drain.
Set all water taps to "Cold" and open them.
Leave the drain cocks open until the mixture of water and disinfectant has
reached the drain.
Close all water taps.
Flush the toilet several times.
Allow the disinfectant to act in accordance with the manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
Empty the water system. Collect the mixture of water and disinfectant for
correct disposal.
For rinsing fill the entire water system with drinking water and empty again
several times over.
Only use suitable disinfectants as sold by the specialist trade.
Collect any emerging mixture of water and disinfectant for correct disposal.
218 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Care
12
12.4 Extractor hood
Clean the extractor hood filter occasionally. How often cleaning is necessary
depends on how often the extractor hood is used. Do not wait to clean the filter
until the performance of the extractor hood has noticeably decreased.
Cleaning the filter:
Pull down the filter (Fig. 264,2) with the handle (Fig. 264,1).
Wash the filter with warm water and some washing-up liquid.
Let the filter dry completely and re-install.
12.5 Toilets
If the toilet will not be used for a longer period of time, for example for Winter
lay up, the toilet must be cleaned and completely emptied.
12.5.1 Toilet with separate water tank
Emptying the tank: Press the flush button, to active the operating panel.
Open the sliding trap and flush until no more water flows.
Close the sliding trap.
Empty the cassette (Fig. 265,2) at a disposal station authorized for this pur-
pose and clean it.
Leave the drainage neck (Fig. 265,3) open.
Remove the drain hose (Fig. 265,5) from the holder (Fig. 265,4).
Place a sufficiently large container under the drain hose.
Prior to carrying out work on the device, turn off the power supply.
Fig. 264 Extractor hood
Fig. 265 Toilet water tank drain hose
219Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Care
12
Remove the drain plug (Fig. 265,1) and let the residual water run out.
When no more water flows out, place the drain plug in the drain hose.
Replace the drain hose in the holder.
12.5.2 Vacuum toilet (Dometic)
Emptying valve: Empty the entire water system.
Press the toilet pedal several times, until no more water flows.
Empty the cassette at a disposal station authorized for this purpose and
clean it.
Turn off power supply.
Remove cover (Fig. 266,3).
Unscrew the cap (Fig. 266,2).
Place a suitable container under the valve (Fig. 266,1).
Press the pedal several times until water no longer comes out of the valve.
Screw the cap back on and attach cover.
12.6 Winter care
De-icing salt damages the underbody and the parts open to water spray. We
recommend that you wash the vehicle more frequently during wintertime.
Mechanical and surface treated parts and the underside are under particular
strain, and should therefore be cleaned thoroughly.
A backflow preventer is installed above the valve. The backflow preventer
hinders water from running out of the valve. Press the pedal until no more
water runs out.
Fig. 266 Vacuum toilet valve
If there is any risk of frost, always run heater at a minimum of 15 °C. Switch
the circulation fan (if there is one) to automatic. In the case of extreme
external temperatures, the furniture flaps and doors should be left slightly
open. The inflowing warm air can help prevent the freezing of water pipes,
for example, and counteract the formation of condensation in the storage
spaces.
If there is any risk of frost, cover the outside surface of the windows with
winter insulation mats.
220 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Care
12
12.6.1 Preparations
Check the vehicle for paint and rust damage. Repair damage as neces-
sary.
Make certain that water cannot penetrate the automatic floor ventilation
system and the heater.
Use a wax-based rust inhibitor to protect the metal parts of the underbody.
Use appropriate protection for external painted surfaces.
12.6.2 Winter operation
During winter operation, condensation develops when the vehicle is occupied
under low-temperature conditions. To ensure good interior air quality and
avoid vehicle damage from condensation, sufficient ventilation is essential.
When heating the vehicle, the heater should be at the highest setting and
roof storage cabinets, curtains and blinds should be opened. This ensures
optimal ventilation.
In the morning, lift up all cushions, air out storage boxes and dry any damp
areas.
12.6.3 At the end of the winter season
Thoroughly clean the underbody of the vehicle and the engine. When this
is done, corrosion-inducing anti-freeze agents (salts, alkaline residues) are
removed.
Clean the exterior and use regular car wax to protect metal surfaces.
12.7 Lay-up
12.7.1 Temporary lay-up
Animals (especially mice) can cause great damage to the interior of the
vehicle. This is especially true if the animal remains undisturbed in a parked
vehicle.
The animals can get into the vehicle at an opportune moment and hide from
view.
To keep damages from animals to a minimum or to avoid them altogether, reg-
ularly check the vehicle for damage or animal traces. This is especially impor-
tant approx. 24 hours after parking the car in storage.
If animal traces are found, contact your authorised dealer or service centre. If
damage to cables has occurred, they can result in short circuits. The vehicle
could catch fire.
If condensation has still developed, just wipe it off.
If the vehicle has been stationary for a long period (approx. 10 months)
have the braking and gas systems checked by an authorised specialist
workshop.
Take into consideration that water is undrinkable after only a short time.
Animal damage to cables can lead to short circuits. Fire hazard!
221Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Care
12
Before laying up the vehicle, go through the following checklist:
Activities Done
Base vehicle
Completely fill fuel tank. This prevents corrosion damage within the
fuel tank system
Jack up vehicle so that the wheels do not bear any load, or move ve-
hicle every 4 weeks. This prevents any pressure points from occur-
ring on tyres and wheel bearings
Protect the tyres from direct exposure to the sun. Danger of forma-
tion of cracks!
Inflate tyres up to the recommended maximum pressure
Always provide for sufficient ventilation in the underbody area
Humidity or lack of oxygen e.g. by covering with plastic film
may cause optical irregularities to the underbody.
In addition observe the notes in the operating manual of the base ve-
hicle
Body
All vents should be sealed with the appropriate caps and all other
openings (apart from forced ventilations) should also be sealed. This
prevents animals (e.g. mice) from gaining entry
Air the interior, all storage compartments accessible from the out-
side, and the parking space (e.g. garage) every 3 weeks in order to
prevent the occurrence of condensation and resulting mould forma-
tion
Interior
Place upholstery in an upright position for ventilation, and cover
Clean refrigerator
Allow refrigerator and freezer compartment doors to remain slightly
open
Search for traces of animals that have gained entry
Disconnect the flat screen from the mains and, if necessary, remove
it from the vehicle
Gas system
Close regulator tap on the gas bottle
Close all gas isolator taps
Always remove gas bottles from the gas bottle compartment, even if
they are empty
Electrical system
Fully charge living area and starter battery
Charge the battery for at least 20 hours before laying up.
Disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply
222 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Care
12
12.7.2 Winter lay-up
Additional measures are required if laying up the vehicle over winter:
Water system
Empty the entire water system. Blow out the residual water from the
water pipes (0.5 bar max.). Leave the water taps on in central posi-
tion. Leave the safety/drainage valve (if there is one) and all drain
cocks open. Observe the notes in chapter 11
Switch off the safety/drainage valve on the transformer/rectifier. Oth-
erwise the battery will become discharged too quickly
If the safety/drainage valve is switched off, the water
system is no longer sufficiently protected against frost.
Activities Done
Activities Done
Base vehicle
Clean body and underbody thoroughly and spray with hot wax or
protect with varnish
Fill fuel tank with winter diesel
Check antifreeze in the cooling water
Rectify damage to the paintwork
Body
Keep the forced ventilation open
Clean and lubricate the mounted steady legs
Clean and grease all door and flap hinges
Brush oil or glycerine on all locking mechanisms
Rub all rubber seals with talc
Use graphite dust to treat locking cylinders
Interior
Position de-humidifiers
Remove upholstery from the vehicle and store in a dry place
Air the interior every 3 weeks
Empty all cabinets and storage compartments, open flaps, doors and
drawers
Thoroughly clean the interior
If there is a risk of frost, do not leave the flat screen in the vehicle
Electrical system
Remove starter and living area batteries and store in a place protect-
ed from frost (see chapter 9)
Water system
Clean the water system using a cleaning agent from a specialised
store
Complete vehicle
Arrange the tarpaulins in such a way that the ventilation openings
are not covered, or use porous tarpaulins
223Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Care
12
12.7.3 Starting up the vehicle after a temporary lay-up or after lay-
up over winter
Go through the following checklist before start-up:
Activities Done
Base vehicle
Check the tyre pressure on all tyres
Check the tyre pressure of the spare wheel
Body
Clean the pivot bearing of the entrance step
Check the functioning of the fitted steady legs
Check that the doors, windows and skylights are working properly
Check the function of all external locks
Remove the cover from the waste gas vent of the heater (if there is
one)
Remove the winter cover from the refrigerator grills (if there is one)
Gas system
Put the gas bottles in the gas bottle compartment, tie down and con-
nect to the gas pressure regulator
Electrical system
Connect to 240 V power supply using the external socket
Fully charge living area and starter battery
Charge the battery for at least 20 hours after lay-up.
Connect the living area battery with the 12 V power supply (see
chapter 9)
Check that the electrical system are working, e.g. interior light, sock-
et and all installed electrical appliances
Water system
Disinfect water pipes and water tank
Check the functionality of the operating lever for the waste water
tank
Close safety/drainage valve (if there is one), drain cocks and water
taps
Check the safety/drainage valve, water taps, drain cocks and water
distributors for leaks
Appliances
Check the function of the refrigerator
Change heating fluid of the hot-water heater every 2 years
Check the function of the heater/boiler
Check the function of the gas cooker
Check the function of the air conditioning unit
224 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Care
12
225Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Maintenance
13
13Maintenance
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions about inspection and maintenance work
concerning the vehicle.
The maintenance instructions address the following topics:
Alde hot-water heater
independent vehicle heater
air conditioning unit
replacing bulbs and fluorescent tubes
AL-KO rear axle
At the end of the chapter you will find important instructions on how to obtain
spare parts.
13.1 Inspection work
Like any technical appliance, the vehicle must be inspected at regular inter-
vals.
This inspection work must be carried out by qualified personnel.
Special technical knowledge, which cannot be taught within the framework of
this instruction manual, is required for these tasks. Personnel with this tech-
nical knowledge are available for assistance at all authorised dealers and
service centres. Their experience and regular technical instruction by the fac-
tory as well as equipment and tools guarantee expert and up-to-date inspec-
tion of the vehicle.
The service centre in charge will confirm the work performed.
Have chassis inspections confirmed in the chassis manufacturer's customer
service booklet.
13.2 Maintenance work
As with every machine, this vehicle requires maintenance. The extent and fre-
quency of the maintenance work required depend on conditions of operation
and use. More difficult operating conditions make it necessary to service the
vehicle more often.
Have the base vehicle and the appliances serviced at the intervals specified
in the corresponding instruction manuals.
13.3 Alde hot-water heater
Observe the inspections indicated by the manufacturer and have them car-
ried out at the specified intervals. The value of the vehicle is thus pre-
served.
The confirmation of the inspection work carried out serves as valid proof in
the event of damage and guarantee claims.
Check the level of the heating fluid regularly on the compensator reservoir.
During or after the first operating hours of the hot-water heater, the filling
level may fall below the minimum mark. If this is the case, top up the
heating fluid.
We recommend to bleed the heating system after the initial heater opera-
tion and to check the glycol content.
226 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Maintenance
13
13.3.1 Checking the fluid level
Switch off the hot-water heater and allow it to cool down.
Check if the fluid level is between the marks "MIN" (Fig. 267,3) and "MAX"
(Fig. 267,2) on the compensator reservoir (Fig. 267).
13.3.2 Topping up heating fluid
Position the vehicle horizontally. This prevents the formation of bubbles.
Switch off the hot-water heater and allow it to cool down.
Unscrew or pull off the panel.
Open the rotary lid (Fig. 267,1) on the compensator reservoir.
Slowly remove cover with circulating pump upwards.
Check anti-freeze with an anti-freeze hydrometer. The frost protection con-
tent must be 40 % or correspond to a frost protection of -25 °C.
Fill water frost protection mixture slowly into the compensator reservoir.
Have heating fluid changed by an authorised dealer or a service centre at
intervals of approximately two years as corrosion-protection wears off after
some time.
Top up heating system with a water-glycol mixture (60 : 40) only. This mix-
ture offers frost protection up to approx. -25 °C. When topping up hot-water
heaters that are connected to the engine's cooling circuit, please observe
the instructions in the instruction manuals of the manufacturers.
Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction
manual.
Fig. 267 Compensator reservoir hot-
water heater
The optimum fluid level is reached when the fluid in the compensator res-
ervoir is 1 cm above the "MIN" mark.
227Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Maintenance
13
13.3.3 Bleeding the heating system
The bleeding valves are built in nearby the radiators.
Switch off the hot-water heater and allow it to cool down.
Open bleeding valve (Fig. 268,1) and leave open until no more air escapes.
Close bleeding valve.
Repeat this procedure at all bleeding valves.
Check to see if the hot-water heater warms up.
13.4 Independent vehicle heater
Use the independent vehicle heater for 10 minutes at least once a month with
a cold engine and smallest fan settings.
Before the heating season starts, have the independent vehicle heater
checked by an authorised specialist workshop.
13.5 Air conditioning unit
Fig. 268 Bleeding valve of hot-water
heater
Prior to carrying out work on the device, turn off the power supply.
Never operate the air conditioning unit without a lint filter. Without a lint
filter, the vaporiser becomes dirty and the capacity of the air conditioning
unit is consequently impaired.
Condensation can enter the vehicle if the condensation drain is clogged up.
Keep the condensation drain free from dirt, leaves and similar.
228 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Maintenance
13
13.5.1 Truma
A lint filter (Fig. 269,1) for the air circulation suction system is at the front of the
air conditioning unit. The lint filter must be cleaned at regular intervals, at least
twice a year however, and replaced if necessary.
The condensation drain is under the floor of the vehicle. Keep the drain hose
free from dirt, leaves or similar to allow the condensation to be drained.
13.5.2 Dometic
A lint filter and an activated carbon filter are each located in the lower part of
the air conditioning system ceiling unit (Fig. 270,2) behind the ventilation grills
(Fig. 270,1 and 3). The lint filters must be cleaned at regular intervals and
replaced if necessary. The manufacturer recommends replacing the activated
carbon filter yearly.
On the left side of the ceiling unit (outside of the vehicle) is located the
drainage opening for the condensation. Keep the drain openings free from dirt,
leaves or similar to allow the condensation to be drained.
13.6 Replacing bulbs and fluorescent tubes
Fig. 269 Air conditioning unit (Truma)
Fig. 270 Air conditioning unit (Dometic)
Bulbs and light fittings can be extremely hot. Therefore, allow lights to
cool down before changing bulbs.
Shut off the power supply on the safety cut-out in the 240 V fuse box
before changing bulbs.
Store bulbs in a safe place inaccessible to children.
229Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Maintenance
13
13.6.1 Ceiling lamp (cover with screws)
Changing bulbs: Undo the screws (Fig. 271,1) and carefully remove the glass cover
(Fig. 271,2).
Remove bulb.
Put in a new bulb.
Fasten the glass cover again.
13.6.2 Ceiling lamp
Changing bulbs: Use a suitable tool (e.g. a screwdriver) to carefully lever out the cover
(Fig. 272,2) at the notch (Fig. 272,1) and remove it.
Remove bulb.
Put in a new bulb.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
Do not use any bulb that has been dropped or which shows scratches in
its glass. The bulb might burst.
Lights can get very hot. When the light is switched on, there must always
be a safety distance of 30 cm between light and flammable objects. Fire
hazard!
A new bulb should not be touched with the fingers. Use a cloth when
installing the new bulb.
Only use bulbs of the same type and with the correct wattage.
If LEDs in lights are defect, contact an authorised dealer or service centre.
Fig. 271 Ceiling lamp
Fig. 272 Ceiling lamp
230 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Maintenance
13
13.6.3 Halogen spotlight (with glass shade)
Changing bulbs: Pull the halogen bulb (Fig. 273,1) forward out of the socket.
Press the new halogen bulb into the fitting between the two spring tongues.
13.6.4 Halogen spotlight (movable)
Changing bulbs: Loosen the fixing screws (Fig. 274,1).
Carefully remove the lamp chalice (Fig. 274,2) from the holder.
Remove halogen bulb.
Put in a new halogen bulb.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
13.6.5 Room lamp
Changing bulbs: Unscrew the cap (Fig. 275,1).
Remove cover (Fig. 275,2).
Fig. 273 Halogen spotlight (with glass
shade)
Fig. 274 Halogen spotlight (movable)
Fig. 275 Room lamp
231Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Maintenance
13
Press the light covering (Fig. 275,3) lightly together and remove it.
Remove the fluorescent tube.
Insert a new fluorescent tube.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
13.6.6 Living area lamp
Changing bulbs: Remove the screw (Fig. 276,1) and take off the cover (Fig. 276,2).
Press the glass together gently and remove from the housing.
Remove the fluorescent tube.
Insert a new fluorescent tube.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
13.6.7 Recessed halogen light with housing
The recessed halogen light is installed flush in a housing (Fig. 277,1).
Changing bulbs:
Use a screwdriver to remove the inner cover ring (Fig. 277,3) from the
housing.
Remove the cover ring with the glass.
Remove halogen bulb (Fig. 277,2).
Put in a new halogen bulb.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
Fig. 276 Living area lamp
Fig. 277 Recessed halogen light
232 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Maintenance
13
13.6.8 Recessed halogen light (flat)
The recessed halogen light (Fig. 278,1) is installed flush.
Changing bulbs:
Use a screwdriver to remove the inner cover ring (Fig. 279,1) from the
housing.
Use a screwdriver to remove the cover ring with the glass (Fig. 279,2) from
the lower section of the recessed halogen light.
Remove halogen bulb (Fig. 279,3).
Put in a new halogen bulb.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
13.6.9 Surface-mounted halogen light driver's cabin (model I)
Changing bulbs: Use a suitable tool (e.g. a screwdriver) to carefully lever out and remove
the glass cover (Fig. 280,1).
Remove halogen bulb.
Put in a new halogen bulb.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
Fig. 278 Recessed halogen light (flat) Fig. 279 Changing the halogen bulb
Fig. 280 Surface-mounted halogen light
driver's cabin (model I)
233Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Maintenance
13
13.6.10 Wardrobe light
Changing bulbs: Press the light covering (Fig. 281,1) lightly together and remove it.
Remove halogen bulb.
Put in a new halogen bulb.
Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.
13.7 Changing the battery of the wardrobe light with LED
The wardrobe light has a button cell that supplies voltage to the LED.
Changing the battery:
Carefully push back the retaining clip (Fig. 282,3) on the top side of the
wardrobe light (Fig. 282,5). This exposes the nose (Fig. 282,4) on the
retaining clip.
Pull the battery holder (Fig. 282,2) out at the top.
Take the button cell (Fig. 282,1) out of the battery holder.
Insert new button cell of the same type (+/-), observing the correct polarity.
Insert the battery holder with the retaining clip to the rear of the housing and
push it downwards until the nose snaps into place.
13.8 AL-KO rear axle
Fiat vehicles with AL-KO
rear axle without
pneumatic spring
In addition to the regulations and notes in the operator manual of the basic
vehicle as well as in the maintenance manual, the rear axles must be relubri-
cated after 20,000 km, or at least every 12 months.
Fig. 281 Wardrobe light
Use only button cells of the same type.
Fig. 282 Wardrobe light with opened
battery compartment
234 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Maintenance
13
The lubricator nipples (Fig. 283, arrow) are situated on the underside of the
axle tube.
13.9 Spare parts
For safety reasons, spare parts for pieces of equipment must correspond with
manufacturer's instructions and be permitted by the manufacturer as a spare
part. These spare parts may only be fitted by the manufacturer or an author-
ised specialist workshop. The authorised dealers and service centres are
available for any spare parts requirement.
Here are some suggestions of important spare parts:
Fuses
V-belt
Windscreen blades
Bulbs
Water pump (submerged pump)
The rear axles must not bear any load while they are being lubricated.
Use one of the following types of grease for lubrication:
Costrac GL 1501 by the firm Klüber
Cardex 3746 SP by the firm CONDA
If the vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free torsion bar spring axle
or a rear axle with pneumatic cushioning, the two lubricator nipples are left
out.
Fig. 283 AL-KO rear axle
Every alteration of the original condition of the vehicle can alter road
behaviour and jeopardize road safety.
The special equipment and original spare parts recommended by
Dethleffs have been specially developed and supplied for your vehicle.
These products are available at the authorised dealers or service cen-
tres. The authorised dealers and service centres are informed about
admissible technical details and carry out the required work correctly.
The use of accessories, parts and fittings not supplied by Dethleffs may
cause damage to the vehicle and jeopardize road safety. Even if an
expert's report, a general type approval or a design certification exists,
there is no guarantee for the proper quality of the product.
No liability can be assumed for damage caused by products which have
not been released by Dethleffs. This also applies to impermissible alter-
ations to the vehicle.
235Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Maintenance
13
When ordering spare parts, please indicate the serial number and the vehicle
type to the authorised dealer or service centre.
The vehicle described in this instruction manual is built and equipped to factory
standards. Special equipment is offered depending on its purpose or use.
When fitting special equipment check if such equipment has to be entered in
the vehicle documents. Observe the max. permissible gross weight. The
authorised dealer or service centre will be happy to advise you.
13.10 Vehicle identification plate
The vehicle identification plate (Fig. 284) with the serial number is fitted on the
B column on the front passenger side (models T and A) or in the entrance area
(models I).
Do not remove the vehicle identification plate. The vehicle identification plate:
Identifies the vehicle
Helps with the procurement of spare parts
Together with the vehicle documents identifies the vehicle owner
Fig. 284 Vehicle identification plate
1Type
2 Maximum permissible gross weight
of the vehicle with trailer
3 Manufacturer of the unit (add-on
unit)
4 Manufacturer's code and chassis
number
5 EG type approval number
6 Permissible rear axle load (for
tandem axle)
7 Permissible axle load rear
8 Permissible axle load front
9 Maximum permissible gross weight
of the vehicle
10 Serial number
Fig. 285 Cover for chassis number (Fiat
base vehicle)
Always include the serial number with all inquiries for the customer
service office.
For vehicles on a Fiat chassis, the chassis number is located behind a
cover (Fig. 285,1) in the entrance on the front passenger's side.
236 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Maintenance
13
13.11 Warning and information stickers
There are warning and information stickers on and inside the vehicle. Warning
and information stickers are for the sake of safety and must not be removed.
Replacement stickers can be obtained from an authorised dealer or a
service centre.
237Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Wheels and tyres
14
14Wheels and tyres
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions regarding the tyres of the vehicle.
The instructions address the following topics:
tyre selection
handling of tyres
changing wheels
spare wheel support
tyre pressure
At the end of the chapter there is a table you can use to find the correct tyre
pressure for your vehicle.
14.1 General
Observe: Check the tyres regularly (every 2 weeks) for equal tread wear, tread depth
and external damage.
Replace tyres at the latest, when the minimum depth of tread stipulated by
law is reached.
Always use tyres of the same model, same brand and same style (summer
and winter tyres).
Only use tyres approved for the wheel rim type fitted. The permitted rim and
tyre sizes are quoted in the vehicle documents and the authorised dealer
or service centre will always be glad to give you advice.
Run-in new tyres for approx. 100 km (60 miles) at low speed since only
then do they reach full strength.
Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre
pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre
burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.
Only check the tyre pressure on cold tyres.
Tubeless tyres have been installed on the vehicle. Never install tubes in
these tyres.
Read the instruction manual for the base vehicle.
Depending on the base vehicle and model the vehicles are equipped with
only one tyre repair kit as standard.
In the case of a puncture, pull over to the side of the road. Make vehicle
safe with a hazard warning triangle. Switch on the warning lights.
Tyres on vehicles with tandem axles may wear faster.
Tyres must not be older than 6 years as the material will become brittle
over time. The four-digit DOT number on the tyre flank indicates the date
of manufacture. The first two digits designate the week, the last two digits
the year of manufacture.
Example: Week 15, year of manufacture 2009.
238 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Wheels and tyres
14
Check regularly that the wheel nuts or wheel bolts are firmly seated. Re-
tighten the wheel nuts or wheel bolts of a changed wheel cross-wise
(Fig. 286) after 50 km (30 miles).
When using new or newly painted rims, re-tighten the wheel nuts or wheel
bolts once again after approx. 1,000 to 5,000 km (600 miles to
3,000 miles).
For lay-ups or long periods of inactivity, keep the tyres and tyre bearings
free from pressure points:
Jack up the vehicle so that the wheels do not bear any load, or move the
vehicle every 4 weeks in such a way that the position of the wheels is
changed.
14.2 Tyre selection
The tyre sizes approved for the vehicle are given in the vehicle documents or
can be obtained from the authorised dealers or service centres. Each tyre
must fit the vehicle on which it will be driven. This applies to the external
dimensions (diameter, width), which are indicated with the standardised size
designations. In addition, the tyres must meet the requirements of the vehicle
with regard to weight and speed.
Weight refers to the maximum permissible axle load which can be distributed
on two tyres. The maximum load-carrying capacity of a tyre is indicated by its
load index (= LI, load index code).
The axle geometry of a vehicle, such as wheel camber and track, is also
important for tyre selection. The maximum permissible speed for a tyre (with
full load-carrying capacity) is indicated by the speed index (= SI). Together,
load index and speed index form the operating code of a tyre. This is an official
component of the complete, standardised dimensions description which
appears on every tyre. The information on the tyres must correspond to the
specifications which appear in the vehicle papers.
Fig. 286 Tighten the wheel nuts or
wheel bolts cross-wise
A wrong tyre can damage the tyres during the journey and even cause
it to burst.
If tyres that are not approved for the vehicle are used, then the type
approval for the vehicle and subsequently the insurance coverage can
lapse. The authorised dealer or service centre will be happy to advise you.
239Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Wheels and tyres
14
14.3 Tyre specifications
14.4 Handling of tyres
Drive over kerbs at an obtuse angle. Otherwise the flanks of the tyres may
get pinched. Driving over a kerb at a sharp angle can damage the tyre and
result in it getting ruptured.
Drive over high manhole covers at a slow speed. Otherwise the tyres may
get pinched. Driving over a high manhole cover at high speed can damage
the tyre and result in it getting ruptured.
Check the shock absorbers regularly. Driving with poor shock absorbers
significantly increases wear.
If the tread wear is uneven, have the toe-in and the wheel camber checked.
Driving with an incorrectly set toe-in or a one-sided wheel camber leads to
a significant increase in wear.
Avoid block brakings. Block braking gives the tyres "brake plates" of var-
ying strength. This reduces driving comfort. It might even make the tyres
unserviceable.
Do not clean the tyres with a high-pressure cleaner. The tyres can suffer
serious damage within just a few seconds and rupture as a result.
Drive in such a way as to protect your tyres. Avoid braking sharply, revving
up too strongly and long journeys on poor roads.
14.5 Changing wheels
Description Explanation
215/70 R 15C 109/107 Q
215 Tyre width in mm
70 Height-to-width proportion in percent
R Tyre design (R = radial)
15 Rim diameter in inches
C Commercial (transporter)
109 Load index code for single tyres
107 Load index code for twin tyres
Q Speed index (Q = 160 km/h)
The vehicle must be on level, firm ground, secure from slipping.
Go into first gear. In the case of automatic transmission, change gear to
"P" position.
Before jacking up the vehicle firmly apply the handbrake.
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking the opposite wheel
with the wheel chocks.
Under no circumstances jack the vehicle with the fitted supports.
If a trailer is connected: Detach the trailer before lifting the vehicle.
Position the vehicle jack underneath the axle, not under any circum-
stances on the bodywork.
Never overload the vehicle jack. The maximum permissible load is spec-
ified on the vehicle jack's identification plate.
240 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Wheels and tyres
14
14.6 Spare wheel support
The spare wheel is found on the underside of the vehicle in a basket which can
be opened from the outside.
14.6.1 Spare wheel support under the vehicle (Renault)
Use the vehicle jack only for lifting the vehicle briefly while changing the
tyre.
Do not start the motor while the vehicle is jacked up.
Whilst the vehicle is in a jacked up position, persons must not lie down
under it.
Do not damage the thread of the thread bolts when changing the wheel.
Tighten the wheel nuts or wheel bolts cross-wise (Fig. 286).
When changing wheels (e.g. alloy wheel rims or wheels with winter tyres),
use the correct wheel bolts of the correct length and shape. The firm
seating of the wheels and the function of the braking system depend on
this.
Wheel rims and tyres not permitted for use with the vehicle can jeopardize
road safety.
Do not replace wheels cross-wise.
Protect the vehicle according to the national regulations, e.g. with a hazard
warning triangle.
Before changing the wheel, check the wheel rim and tyre size, the max. tyre
load and the speed index on the tyres. Only use the wheel rim and tyre
sizes stated in the vehicle documents.
Further information can be found in the instruction manual of the base
vehicle.
For models with a Fiat or Ford base vehicle, there is no spare wheel. For
these vehicles, a tyre repair kit is included for inflating the flat tyre with
foam.
Due to its weight and fitted position, the spare wheel can be raised or
lowered by a very strong person only. Always get a second person to
assist.
241Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Wheels and tyres
14
Removing the spare wheel: Use the ratchet wrench and extension to loosen the nuts (Fig. 287,1) on the
rear hooks (Fig. 287,2) to the left and right of the spare wheel support.
Unscrew the wheel nuts approx. 3 to 4 cm.
Press the clip (Fig. 287,3) slightly upwards, press the hooks backward or
forward and unhook the clip.
Take down the basket and remove the spare wheel.
14.7 Tyre pressure
The payload and the durability of tyres is directly dependent on the tyre pres-
sure. Air is a volatile medium. It is unavoidable that it will escape from tyres.
As a rule of thumb it can be assumed that a filled tyre loses pressure at a rate
of 0.1 bar every two months. To prevent the tyres becoming damaged or burst,
check the tyre pressure regularly.
Fig. 287 Spare wheel support under the
vehicle
Tyres overheat if the tyre pressure is too low. This can cause serious
tyre damage.
Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre
pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre
burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.
Use only valves that are approved for the specified tyre pressure.
Only check the tyre pressure on cold tyres.
The information on pressure levels is valid for cold tyres and loaded vehi-
cles.
Pressure in hot tyres is higher than in cold tyres. Therefore, check the pres-
sure when the tyres are cold.
Tyre pressures in bar.
The valve used must be approved for the air pressure. We recommend the
use of a metal valve for pressures greater than 4.75 bar.
For the maximum permissible axle loads for your vehicle please refer to
specific documentation.
When a replacement is needed, Dethleffs recommends "Camping" tyres.
242 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Wheels and tyres
14
The vehicles are constantly brought up to the newest technical standards. It is
possible that new tyre sizes are not yet included in this table. If this is the case,
the Dethleffs dealer will be happy to provide the newest values.
Types Tyre size Front air
pressure in
bar
Rear air
pressure in
bar
Fiat
All types 215/70 R 15 C
(109/107) Q
4.25 4.5
All types with "Camping"
tyres
215/70 R 15 C
(109/107) Q
4.75 5.5
All types 225/75 R 16 C
(116/114) R
4.5 5.0
All types with "Camping"
tyres
225/75 R 16 C
(116/114) R
4.75 5.5
All types 225/75 R 16 C
(116/114) Q
(tandem axle)
4.5 3.5
All types with "Camping"
tyres
225/75 R 16 C
(116/114) Q
(tandem axle)
5.5 3.5
Renault
All types 225/65 R 16 C
(112/110) Q
3.8 4.4
All types with "Camping"
tyres
225/65 R 16 C
(112/110) Q
4.5 5.5
Ford
All types 215/75 R 16 C
(113/111) Q
3.75 4.75
185/75 R 16 C
104/102 R (twin
tyres)
4.7 3.3
3.5 (for
3.85 t)
Mercedes-Benz
All types 235/65 R 16 C
(115/113) R
3.75 4.5
243Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Troubleshooting
15
15Troubleshooting
Chapter overview
This chapter contains instructions about possible faults in your vehicle.
The faults are listed with their possible causes and corresponding remedies.
The instructions address the following topics:
braking system
electrical system
gas system
gas cooker
gas oven
microwave oven
heater
boiler
refrigerator
air conditioning unit
water supply
toilet
body
The specified faults can be remedied with relative ease and without a great
deal of specialised knowledge. In the event that the remedies detailed in this
instruction manual should not be successful, an authorised specialist work-
shop must find and eliminate the cause of the fault.
15.1 Braking system
15.2 Electrical system
Have defects on the braking system immediately remedied by an author-
ised specialist workshop.
When the living area battery is changed, only use batteries of the same
type.
See chapter 9 for changing the fuses.
Fault Cause Remedy
Road light system does
no longer work correctly
Bulb is defective Replace bulb. Note volts
and watts specifications
Fuse on the transformer/
rectifier is defective
Replace fuse on the
transformer/rectifier
Interior lighting does not
work
Bulb is defective Replace bulb. Note volts
and watts specifications
Fuse on the transformer/
rectifier is defective
Replace fuse on the
transformer/rectifier
The electrically operated
entrance step cannot be
moved in or out
Fuse on the transformer/
rectifier is defective
Replace fuse on the
transformer/rectifier
244 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Troubleshooting
15
No 240 V power supply
despite connection
240 V automatic circuit
breaker has triggered
Switch on the 240 V au-
tomatic circuit breaker
Starter or living area bat-
tery is not charged when
operated in 240 V mode
Jumbo flat fuse (40 A) on
the starter or living area
battery is defective
Replace jumbo flat fuse
(40 A) on the starter or
living area battery
Charger module in the
transformer/rectifier is
defective
Contact customer service
Living area battery is not
charged during vehicle
operation
Fuse on terminal D+ of
the alternator is defective
Replace fuse
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is
defective
Contact customer service
12 V indicator lamp does
not light up
12 V power supply
switched off
Switch 12 V power sup-
ply on
Battery cut-off switch on
the transformer/rectifier is
switched off
Set battery cut-off switch
to on
Starter or living area bat-
tery is not charged
Charge the starter or liv-
ing area battery
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is
defective
Contact customer service
Flat fuse (2 A) in the liv-
ing area battery is defec-
tive
Replace flat fuse (2 A) in
the living area battery
No display on the panel 12 V power supply
switched off
Switch 12 V power sup-
ply on
Living area battery dis-
connected from the 12 V
power supply
Connect the living area
battery with the 12 V
power supply
Starter or living area bat-
tery is not charged
Charge the starter or liv-
ing area battery
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is
defective
Contact customer service
12 V power supply does
not work
12 V power supply
switched off
Switch 12 V power sup-
ply on
Living area battery dis-
connected from the 12 V
power supply
Connect the living area
battery with the 12 V
power supply
Living area battery is dis-
charged
Charging the living area
battery
Jumbo flat fuse (40 A) on
the living area battery is
defective
Replace jumbo flat fuse
(40 A) on the living area
battery
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is
defective
Contact customer service
Fault Cause Remedy
245Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Troubleshooting
15
12 V power supply does
not work in 240 V opera-
tion
12 V power supply
switched off
Switch 12 V power sup-
ply on
Living area battery dis-
connected from the 12 V
power supply
Connect the living area
battery with the 12 V
power supply
Charger module in the
transformer/rectifier is
defective
Contact customer service
240 V automatic circuit
breaker has triggered
Contact customer service
Jumbo flat fuse (40 A) on
the living area battery is
defective
Replace jumbo flat fuse
(40 A) on the living area
battery
Starter battery is dis-
charged in 12 V opera-
tion
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is
defective
Contact customer service
Living area battery dis-
connected from the 12 V
power supply
Connect the living area
battery with the 12 V
power supply
No voltage is supplied by
the living area battery
Living area battery is dis-
charged
Charge living area bat-
tery immediately
Total discharge
damages the
battery.
If the vehicle is to be laid
up for a long period, fully
charge the living area
battery beforehand
Extractor hood does not
work
240 V automatic circuit
breaker is switched off
Switch on the 240 V au-
tomatic circuit breaker
12 V supply device
switched off
Switch on 12 V supply
device on the panel
Power pack is defective Contact customer service
Fuse (15 A) on the 240 V
fuse box is defective
Replace fuse (15 A)
Fuse (15 A) at the trans-
former/rectifier is defec-
tive
Replace fuse (15 A)
Extractor hood defective Contact customer service
Air conditioning unit can-
not be switched on or off
240 V automatic circuit
breaker has triggered
Switch on the 240 V au-
tomatic circuit breaker
Remote control battery is
empty
Change remote control
battery
Fault Cause Remedy
246 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Troubleshooting
15
15.3 Gas system
15.4 Cooker
15.4.1 Gas cooker/gas oven
15.4.2 Microwave oven
In case of a defect of the gas system (gas odour, high gas consumption)
there is danger of explosion! Close regulator tap on the gas bottle imme-
diately. Open doors and windows and ventilate well.
If the gas system is defective: Do not smoke; do not ignite any open
flames, and do not operate electric switches (light switches etc.).
Have the defective gas system repaired by an authorised specialist
workshop.
Fault Cause Remedy
No gas Gas bottle is empty Change gas bottle
Gas isolator tap closed Open the gas isolator tap
Regulator tap on the gas
bottle is closed
Open regulator tap on
the gas bottle
External temperature is
too low (-42 °C for pro-
pane gas, 0 °C for bu-
tane gas)
Wait for higher external
temperatures
Built-in appliance is de-
fective
Contact customer service
Fault Cause Remedy
Ignition fuse does not op-
erate (flame does not
burn after the control
knobs are released)
Heat-up time is too short Keep control knob
pressed for approx. 15 to
20 seconds after ignition
Ignition fuse is defective Contact customer service
Flame extinguishes when
being reduced to its mini-
mum setting
Thermocouple sensor is
incorrectly set
Correctly reset thermo-
couple sensor (do not
bend). The sensor tip
should protrude by 5 mm
beyond the burner. The
sensor neck should not
be more than 3 mm away
from the burner ring; if
necessary, contact cus-
tomer service
Only qualified personnel may repair the microwave oven. Improper
repairs can cause major risks to the user.
247Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Troubleshooting
15
15.5 Heater/boiler
In the event of a defect contact the nearest customer service workshop of the
relevant appliance manufacturer. The list of addresses is enclosed with the
accompanying appliance documentation. Only authorised qualified personnel
may repair the appliance.
15.5.1 Heater/boiler Truma
Fault Cause Remedy
Microwave oven does not
cut in
Fuse is defective Replace fuse
Door of the microwave
oven is not properly
closed
Remove foreign bodies
stuck in the door of the
microwave oven and
close door properly
Fault Cause Remedy
Heater does not ignite Temperature sensor on
operating unit or remote
sensor defective
Pull out plug on operating
unit. The heating then
works without thermostat.
Contact the customer
service as soon as possi-
ble
Red indicator lamp
"Fault" illuminates
Air in the gas pipe sys-
tem
Switch off and on again.
After two futile ignition at-
tempts, wait for
10 minutes before trying
again
Lack of gas Open regulator tap and
gas isolator tap
Connect a full gas bottle
Defect of a safety ele-
ment
Contact customer service
Red indicator lamp
"Fault" is flashing
Operating voltage too low Charge or replace the liv-
ing area battery (or have
it charged or replaced)
Green indicator lamp be-
hind knob is not lit
Fuse on the transformer/
rectifier is defective
Replace fuse on the
transformer/rectifier
Fuse in the electronic
control unit has been trig-
gered
Contact customer service
Living area battery defec-
tive
Charge or replace the liv-
ing area battery (or have
it charged or replaced)
Yellow indicator lamp on
the energy selector
switch does not illumi-
nate
No supply voltage Check 240 V connection
and fuses
Overheating switch was
triggered
Press overheating switch
248 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Troubleshooting
15
15.5.2 Alde heater/boiler
Boiler empties, safety/
drainage valve has
opened
Internal temperature be-
low 8 °C
Heat inside
Safety/drainage valve
separated from battery
supply
Cancel battery separa-
tion. In order to do this
switch on the battery cut-
off switch on the trans-
former/rectifier or deacti-
vate the battery
separation via the panel
Operating voltage below
10.8 V
Charge or replace the liv-
ing area battery (or have
it charged or replaced)
Fuse is defective Replace fuse on the
transformer/rectifier
Safety/drainage valve
does not close when
switching on
Safety/drainage valve
separated from battery
supply
Cancel battery separa-
tion. In order to do this
switch on the battery cut-
off switch on the trans-
former/rectifier or deacti-
vate the battery
separation via the panel
Operating voltage below
10.8 V
Charge living area bat-
tery (or have it charged)
Fuse is defective Replace fuse on the
transformer/rectifier
Red and green indicator
lamps are not lit
Fuse is defective Replace fuse on the
transformer/rectifier
Fan wheel runs noisily or
not steadily
Fan wheel is soiled Contact Truma service
department
If a fault occurs in the system, the cause is shown on the display.
Fault Cause Remedy
Heater does not ignite
with gas operation
Lack of gas Open regulator tap and
gas isolator tap
Connect a full gas bottle
Heater does not ignite Battery voltage too low Charge battery. If the
battery voltage rises
above 11 V, the heater is
switched on automatical-
ly
Heater does not ignite at
240 V electrical operation
No 240 V power supply Switch on the 240 V au-
tomatic circuit breaker
Connect 240 V power
supply
Fault Cause Remedy
249Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Troubleshooting
15
15.6 Refrigerator
In the event of a defect contact the nearest customer service workshop of the
relevant appliance manufacturer. The list of addresses is enclosed with the
accompanying appliance documentation. Only authorised qualified personnel
may repair the appliance.
15.6.1 Dometic refrigerator without AES
Heater switches off Overheating Allow the heater to cool.
To reset the display, in-
terrupt the 12 V power
supply to the heater and
switch it back on again
Heater running, but no
heat at the convectors
Circulating pump does
not work
Switch on room thermo-
stat
Contact customer service
Heater and circulating
pump running, but no
heat at the convectors
Air in the heating system Bleed hot-water heater
Fault Cause Remedy
Fault Cause Remedy
Refrigerator does not
switch on when operating
in 240 V mode
No 240 V power supply Connect 240 V power
supply
240 V automatic circuit
breaker has triggered
Switch on the 240 V au-
tomatic circuit breaker
240 V operating voltage
too low
Have the 240 V power
supply checked by an au-
thorised specialist work-
shop
Refrigerator does not
switch on when operating
in 12 V mode
Jumbo flat fuse (40 A) in
the starter battery is de-
fective
Replace jumbo flat fuse
(40 A) in the starter bat-
tery
Flat fuse (2 A) in the
starter battery is defec-
tive
Replace flat fuse (2 A) in
the starter battery
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is
defective
Contact customer service
12 V operating voltage
too low
Have the 12 V power
supply checked by an au-
thorised specialist work-
shop
250 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Troubleshooting
15
15.6.2 Thetford refrigerator without SES (error diagnostics)
Refrigerator does not
switch on when operating
in gas mode
The "GAS" operating in-
dicator flashes yellow
Lack of gas Open regulator tap and
gas isolator tap
Connect a full gas bottle
Air in the gas pipe Repeat ignition 3 or
4times
Cobwebs or burnt resi-
due in the burning cham-
ber
Remove the ventilation
grill on the outside of the
vehicle and clean the
burning chamber
Error code Cause Remedy
1 The 240 V power supply is
75 % under the required op-
erating voltage
Contact customer service
2 The 12 V power supply is
75 % under the required op-
erating voltage
Contact customer service
3 The refrigerator is operated
at 240 V, even though no
240 V mode has been se-
lected
Contact customer service
4 The refrigerator is operated
at 12 V, even though no 12 V
mode has been selected
Contact customer service
5 The refrigerator is operated
in gas operation mode even
though gas operation mode
has not been selected
Contact customer service
6 The gas valve has been
identified as open even
though it should be closed
Contact customer service
7 The gas valve has been
identified as closed even
though it should be open
Contact customer service
8 The 240 V power supply is
20 % under the required op-
erating voltage
Check 240 V power supply
9 The gas supply has been cut
off. The flame has not been
ignited within 30 seconds in
gas operation mode
Check the gas supply
Repeat ignition 3 to
4times
Contact customer service
10 The refrigerator is set to 12 V
mode and the vehicle engine
is not running
Start the vehicle engine or
select a different energy
source
11 The refrigerator is set to "AU-
TO" mode and no energy
source is available
Provide an energy source
and reset the refrigerator.
Switch the refrigerator off
and on again for this purpose
Fault Cause Remedy
251Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Troubleshooting
15
15.6.3 Refrigerator Dometic 7 series with AES
12 – Contact customer service
13 The temperature sensor is
defective
Check whether the plug is in-
serted properly above the fin
inside the refrigerator. If so:
Contact customer service
14 The connection between op-
erating controls and control
device is interrupted
Contact customer service
Fault Cause Remedy
Indicator lamps "230 V",
"12 V" or "AUTO" are not
lit green
Refrigerator is turned off Switch on the refrigera-
tor with energy selector
switch
No electrical operating
voltage
Connect 240 V power
supply
Let the vehicle engine
run
Switch on or replace the
fuse
Contact a specialist
workshop
Refrigerator does not
switch to 12 V mode dur-
ing the journey
Operating voltage of al-
ternator is not present/
too low
Contact a specialist
workshop
Refrigerator does not
switch on in gas opera-
tion, "GAS" indicator
lamp is not lit yellow
Lack of gas Open regulator tap and
gas isolator tap
Connect a full gas bottle
Cobwebs or burnt resi-
due in the burning cham-
ber
Remove the ventilation
grill on the outside of the
vehicle and clean the
burning chamber
Error code Cause Remedy
252 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Troubleshooting
15
15.6.4 Dometic 8 series with MES
"GAS" indicator lamp
flashes yellow, no gas
Air in the gas pipe Switch off the refrigera-
tor with energy selector
switch
Open regulator tap on
the gas bottle and the
gas isolator tap of the re-
frigerator
Switch on the refrigera-
tor with energy selector
switch. After 10 seconds,
the AES will attempt an-
other ignition
If the "GAS" indicator
lamp flashes yellow
again after approx.
30 seconds, the failure
has not been remedied
yet
Repeat this process two
to three times for ventila-
tion. If the refrigerator
cannot be operated, con-
tact customer services
In the case of a fault the LED display fault will always light up " ".
Fault Cause Remedy
LED " " flashes No 240 V power supply Connect 240 V power
supply
240 V automatic circuit
breaker has triggered
Switch on the 240 V au-
tomatic circuit breaker
240 V operating voltage
too low
Have the 240 V power
supply checked by an au-
thorised specialist work-
shop
LED " " flashes Fuse on the transformer/
rectifier is defective
Replace fuse on the
transformer/rectifier
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is
defective
Contact customer service
12 V operating voltage
too low
Have the 12 V power
supply checked by an au-
thorised specialist work-
shop
Fault Cause Remedy
253Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Troubleshooting
15
15.6.5 Dometic 8 series with AES
LED " " flashes
Lack of gas Open regulator tap and
gas isolator tap
Connect a full gas bottle
Cobwebs or burnt resi-
due in the burning cham-
ber
Remove the ventilation
grill on the outside of the
vehicle and clean the
burning chamber
LEDs for display of the
temperature range flash
Temperature sensor de-
fective
Contact customer service
LED " " and LEDs for
display of the tempera-
ture range flash
240 V heater element de-
fective
Contact customer service
LED " " and LEDs for
display of the tempera-
ture range flash
12 V heater element de-
fective
Contact customer service
In the case of a fault the LED display fault will always light up " ".
Fault Cause Remedy
Text "230 V" flashes No 240 V power supply Connect 240 V power
supply
240 V automatic circuit
breaker has triggered
Switch on the 240 V au-
tomatic circuit breaker
240 V operating voltage
too low
Have the 240 V power
supply checked by an au-
thorised specialist work-
shop
Text "12 V" flashes Fuse on the transformer/
rectifier is defective
Replace fuse on the
transformer/rectifier
Disconnector relay in the
transformer/rectifier is
defective
Contact customer service
12 V operating voltage
too low
Have the 12 V power
supply checked by an au-
thorised specialist work-
shop
Text "GAS" flashes Lack of gas Open regulator tap and
gas isolator tap
Connect a full gas bottle
Cobwebs or burnt resi-
due in the burning cham-
ber
Remove the ventilation
grill on the outside of the
vehicle and clean the
burning chamber
Fault Cause Remedy
254 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Troubleshooting
15
15.7 Air conditioning unit
15.7.1 Dometic
15.7.2 Truma
LEDs for display of the
temperature range flash
Temperature sensor de-
fective
Contact customer service
Text "HE1" flashes 240 V heater element de-
fective
Contact customer service
Text "HE2" flashes 12 V heater element de-
fective
Contact customer service
Fault Cause Remedy
Air conditioning unit does
not start up
No 240 V power supply Connect the vehicle to
the local power supply
240 V automatic circuit
breaker has triggered
Switch on the 240 V au-
tomatic circuit breaker
Remote control batteries
empty
Change remote control
batteries
Air conditioning unit does
not cool
Temperature below
16 °C
–
Temperature has been
set incorrectly
Adjust the temperature
Thermostat defective Contact customer service
Air conditioning unit does
not warm up
Temperature above
30 °C
–
Temperature has been
set incorrectly
Adjust the temperature
Thermostat defective Contact customer service
Water is entering the ve-
hicle
Drainage holes for con-
densation are clogged
Clean air conditioning
unit
Seal is defective Contact customer service
No more air circulation Air filter clogged Clean air filter
Fan wheel defective Contact customer service
Fault Cause Remedy
Air conditioning unit does
not cool
No 240 V power supply Connect 240 V power
supply
Fuse is defective Check fuse and replace if
necessary
Temperature below
16 °C
Temperature has been
set incorrectly
Adjust the temperature
Air filter contaminated Replace air filter
Fault Cause Remedy
255Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Troubleshooting
15
15.8 Water supply
Fault Cause Remedy
Leakage water inside the
vehicle
A leak has occurred Identify leak, re-connect
water pipes
No water Water tank is empty Replenish drinking water
Drain cock not closed Close drain cock
12 V power supply
switched off
Switch 12 V power sup-
ply on
Fuse of the water pump
is defective
Replace fuse on the
transformer/rectifier
Water pump defective Exchange water pump
(have it exchanged)
Water pipe snapped off Straighten water pipe or
replace
Transformer/rectifier de-
fective
Contact customer service
Water pump switched off
on panel
Switch water pump on
Toilet has no flush water Water tank is empty Replenish drinking water
Fuse for toilet is defective Replace fuse
Display for water and
waste water indicates a
wrong value
Measuring probe in the
waste water or water tank
is soiled
Clean water/waste water
tank
Measuring probe is de-
fective
Replace measuring
probe
Waste water tank cannot
be emptied
Drain cock is clogged Open the cleaning cap
on the waste water tank
and drain the waste wa-
ter. Rinse the waste wa-
ter tank well
Drain on the single lever
mixer tap is clogged
Perlator calcified Unclip the perlator, de-
calcify in vinegar water
(only for products made
from metal)
Water jets on the shower
nozzle clogged
Water jets calcified De-calcify shower nozzle
in vinegar water (only for
products made from met-
al) or rub off soft nozzle
burling
Water drains from the
shower tray slowly or
does not drain at all
The vehicle is not in a
horizontal position
Position the vehicle hori-
zontally
Milkiness of the water Tank filled with dirty wa-
ter
Clean water tank me-
chanically and chemical-
ly; then disinfect and
rinse copiously with
drinking water
Residues in the water
tank or water system
Clean water system me-
chanically and chemical-
ly; then disinfect and
rinse copiously with
drinking water
256 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Troubleshooting
15
15.9 Vacuum toilet (Dometic)
Any change in the taste
or odour of the water
Tank filled with dirty wa-
ter
Clean water system me-
chanically and chemical-
ly; then disinfect and
rinse copiously with
drinking water
Fuel filled into the water
tank by mistake
Clean water system me-
chanically and chemical-
ly; then disinfect and
rinse copiously with
drinking water. If not suc-
cessful: Contact a spe-
cialist workshop
Microbiological deposits
in the water system
Clean water system me-
chanically and chemical-
ly; then disinfect and
rinse copiously with
drinking water
Deposits in the water
tank and/or water-carry-
ing components
Water excessively long in
the water tank and in wa-
ter-carrying components
Clean water system me-
chanically and chemical-
ly; then disinfect and
rinse copiously with
drinking water
Fault Cause Remedy
Water does not remain in
toilet bowl
Seal dirty or defective Clean seal or have re-
placed
Water does not flow
properly into the toilet
bowl
Water pressure too low Contact customer service
Water is entering the ve-
hicle
Hose connection loos-
ened
Check connections for
proper seat and tighten
hose clamps
Vacuum pump does not
run
No power present Control power supply (or
have checked)
Vacuum pump runs too
often
Cap or connection not
sealed tightly
Check connections be-
tween toilet and vacuum
(or have checked)
Toilet clogged Improper used Remove blockage
Fault Cause Remedy
257Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Troubleshooting
15
15.10 Body
Fault Cause Remedy
Flap hinges/door hinges
are difficult to operate
Flap/door hinges are not
sufficiently lubricated
Lubricate flap hinges/
door hinges with acid-
free and resin-free
grease
Hinges/joints in the bath-
room unit/toilet compart-
ment are difficult to
operate/make a grating
noise
Hinges/joints are not suf-
ficiently lubricated
Lubricate hinges/joints
with solvent-free and
acid-free grease
Spray cans
often contain
solvents
Storage compartment
hinges are difficult to op-
erate/make a grating
noise
Storage compartment
hinges are not sufficiently
lubricated
Lubricate storage com-
partment hinges with
acid-free and resin-free
grease
Front bonnet swivel sys-
tem is difficult to operate
Front bonnet swivel sys-
tem is not (sufficiently) lu-
bricated
Lubricate front bonnet
swivel system with acid-
free and resin-free
grease
Heki skylight difficult to
operate
Threaded spindle not lu-
bricated
Lubricate threaded spin-
dle
Threaded spindle defec-
tive
Have threaded spindle
replaced
The authorised dealers and service centres are available for any spare
parts requirement.
258 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Troubleshooting
15
259Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Special equipment
16
16Special equipment
16.1 Weight details for special equipment
Weight details for Dethleffs special equipment are listed in the table below. If
these objects are either carried in or on the vehicle and are not part of the
standard equipment, they must be taken into consideration when calculating
the payload.
All weight details are approximate.
Observe the max. permissible gross weight.
The use of accessories, parts and fittings not supplied by Dethleffs may
cause damage to the vehicle and jeopardize road safety. Even if an
expert's report, a general type approval or a design certification exists,
there is no guarantee for the proper quality of the product.
Every alteration of the original condition of the vehicle can alter road
behaviour and jeopardize road safety.
No liability can be assumed for damage caused by products which have
not been released by Dethleffs. This also applies to impermissible alter-
ations to the vehicle.
Item designation Surplus weight (kg)
Waste water tank, insulated 2
Overcab bed, foldable 2
Alcove window, hinged 2
Caravan coupling 26-46
Hinged window, driver's cabin 8
External shower 1
Outside kitchen 10
Outside storage compartment (lowered rear) 59-63
Outside storage compartment (storage compartment) 3
Automatic transmission 17-32
Car radio and CD 2
Oven 14
Chassis package (driver's cabin air conditioning unit,
airbags)
23-27
Skylight (clear glass) 1
Skylight (Midi-Heki) 10
Roof rail 10
Roof rack with aluminium ladder 7-17
"Kissenschlacht" (pillow fight) decoration package 1
Swivel console, seat 20
Extractor hood 2-5
Duo switching facility (incl. gas bottle) 26
Entrance step, electrical 2
Driver's cabin carpet 3
Driver's cabin door 17
260 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Special equipment
16
Bike rack for 3 bicycles 9
Bike rack for 4 bicycles 10
Roman shades, driver's cabin 3
Fire extinguisher 6 kg 8
Flat screen 4-6
Floor warming unit, electrical 9
External gas socket 1
Holder for flat screen 3-5
Lift-tilt skylight (Heki 3) 12-15
Trumatic C 6002 heater, electric kit 2
Insect screen door 3
Insulation mat for driver's cabin window 2
Air conditioning unit 32-40
Refrigerator, separate freezer compartment 7-20
Awning 300 cm 21
Awning 350 cm 25-35
Awning 400 cm 27-40
Awning 450 cm 32
Awning 500 cm 36
Awning 600 cm 40
Microwave oven 15
Motorcycle rack/bike rack 40
Navigation system (with cables) 9
Guest bed 3-5
Pilot seats 20
Crossbeam, roof rail 7
Radio preparation 4
Wheel trims 4
Smoke alarm 1
Reversing camera, incl. monitor and cables 5-10
Diesel particulate filter 10
Satellite unit 15-24
Switch for water pump 1
Coil springs, front, reinforced 5
Service flap 3-8
Safety kit 5
Seat covers in the driver's cabin and living area 3
Solar installation 15
Voltage transformer, air conditioning unit 3
Item designation Surplus weight (kg)
261Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Special equipment
16
Supports (2 pieces) 6-10
Chain-stitch rug, laid loosely 6-9
Table leg, free-standing 5
Sill 8
Panelling, inside 2
Awning light 1
Alde hot-water heater 30-50
Hazard warning triangle and first-aid kit 2
Alde heat exchanger 2-5
Winter covering for the refrigerator grating 1
Winter comfort package (depending on equipment) 15-75
Auxiliary battery 27
Additional heater, driver's cabin (independent vehicle
heater)
7
Auxiliary lamps, inside 2
Additional pump for the Alde heater 1
Auxiliary heat exchanger (Arizona) 3
Item designation Surplus weight (kg)
262 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Special equipment
16
263Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Helpful notes
17
17Helpful notes
Chapter overview
This chapter contains helpful tips for the journey.
The instructions address the following topics:
road assistance in European countries
traffic rules in European countries
gas supply in European countries
toll regulations in European countries
safe ways to spend the night during travel
camping in winter
At the end of the chapter there is a checklist containing the most important
equipment for the journey.
17.1 Traffic rules in foreign countries
Information about traffic regulations is especially important as state law
applies in case of damage. For your own safety, always observe the following
rules when travelling abroad:
Take the green insurance card with you.
Always register accidents with the police.
Never sign documents that you have not read and understood completely.
17.2 Help on Europe's roads
The vehicle driver is required to inform himself as to the traffic rules of the
countries in which he plans to travel before beginning the trip. Contact your
automobile club or embassy for further information.
In some European countries, warning vests must be worn when exiting the
vehicle outside of towns in the case of vehicle failures or accidents.
Country Emergen-
cy services
Police
Breakdown service
Belgium 112
112
TCB Brussels 0 70 34 47 77
Bulgaria 150
166
UAB (02) 9 80 33 08/146
1)
Denmark 112
free of charge
112
free of charge
Falck 79 42 42 42
Germany 112
110
ADAC 22 22 22
1)
Estonia 112
110/112
1)
EESTI (0) 6 97 91 88/18 88
1)
Finland 112
112
Helsinki (09) 77 47 64 00
France
15/112
1)
17/112
1)
Lyon (08) 25 80 08 22
AIT-Assistance 0800 08 92 22
264 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Helpful notes
17
Greece 112
171/112
1)
ELPA 104 00
Great Britain 112
112
AA (08 00) 0 28 90 18/
(08 00) 82 82 82
1)
Ireland
999/112
1)
999/112
1)
AA Dublin 18 00 66 77 88
Iceland 112
112
F.I.B 5 11 21 12
Italy
118/112
1)
112
ACI 803 116/8 00 11 68 00
1)
Croatia
94/112
1)
92/112
1)
HAK 9 87/ 0 19 87
1)
Latvia
03/112
1)
02/112
1)
LAMB 8 00 00 00
Lithuania
03/112
1)
02/112
1)
LAS 8 80 00 00 00/18 88
1)
Luxembourg 112
113/112
1)
ACL 2 60 00
Macedonia 194
192
AMSM 196
Montenegro 94
92
AMSCG 9807
Netherlands 112
112
ANWB 08 82 69 28 88
Norway 113
112
NAF 81 00 05 05
Austria
144/112
1)
133/112
1)
ÖAMTC 120
Poland
999/112
1)
997/112
1)
PZM 022 5 32 84 33
Portugal 112
112
ACP Lissab. (21) 9 42 91 03
ACP Porto (22) 8 34 00 01
Romania
961/112
1)
955/112
1)
ACR (021) 2 22 22 22/
(021) 2 22 15 53
1)
Russia 03
02
RAS (4 95) 7 47 66 66
Sweden 112
112
M 0 20 91 29 12
Country Emergen-
cy services
Police
Breakdown service
265Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Helpful notes
17
Date 03/2007
Specifications without guarantee
17.3 Speed limits and permissible dimensions
For information, the speed limits (in km/h) and permissible dimensions (in m)
of the countries visited most:
Switzerland 144
117/112
1)
TCS 1 40/03 18 50 53 11
1)
Serbia 94
92
AMSS (011) 19800
Slovakia
155/112
1)
158/112
1)
SATC 1 81 24
Slovenia 112
113
AMZS (1) 9 87/
(003861) 5 30 53 53
1)
Spain 061
112
RACE 9 15 93 33 33
Czech Republic
155/112
1)
158/112
1)
UAMK CR 12 30
Turkey 112
155/112
1)
TTOK (02 12) 2 82 81 40
Ukraine 03
02
112 UA (8-032) 2 97 81 12
Hungary
104/112
1)
107/112
1)
MAK
1 88/(0036-1) 13 45 17 44
1)
Cyprus 112
112
AA 02 22 31 31 31
1)
In the mobile communication network
Country Emergen-
cy services
Police
Breakdown service
Please always observe the speed limits in the individual countries.
266 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Helpful notes
17
Country Max. dimen-
sions in me-
ters
Gross
weight
In
built-
up ar-
eas
Outside
built-up ar-
eas
Motor-
way
Width Lgth.
Belgium 2.55 12 Up to 7.5 t
Over 7.5 t
50
50
90/120
1)
60/90
1)
120
90
Bulgaria 2.60 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90
70
130
100
Denmark 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
80
70
130
80
Germany 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
3.5 t up to
7.5 t
Over
7.5 t
2)
50
50
50
100
80
80
130
3)
100
80
Estonia 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90
70
110
70
Finland 2.60 12 50
80
4)
80
4)
France 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90
5)
/-
80
5)
/
100
1) 5)
130
5)
110
5)
Greece 2.50 12 50
90/110
11)
120
Great Brit-
ain
2.55 12 48
96/112
1)
112
Ireland 2.55 12 50
60/100
1)
120
Iceland 2.55 12 50
90
6)
–
Italy 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90/110
1) 7)
80
130
7)
100
Croatia 2.55 12 50
90/110
1)
130
Latvia 2.50 12 Up to 7.5 t
Over 7.5 t
50
50
90/100
11)
80
110
80
Lithuania 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90
70
110
70
Luxem-
bourg
2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90
8) 7)
75
7)
130
8) 7)
90
7)
Macedo-
nia
2.50 12 40/60 80 80
Montene-
gro
2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
80/100
1)
80
100
80
Nether-
lands
2.55
9)
12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
80/100
1)
80
120
80
Norway 2.55 12.40 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
80/90
1)
80
90
80
267Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Helpful notes
17
Austria 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
100
70
130
10)
80
Poland 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90/100
1)
70/80
1)
130
80
Portugal 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90/100
11)
80/90
11)
120
12)
110
12)
Romania 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
80/90
1)
80/90
1)
120
110
Russia 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
60
60
90
13)
70
110
13)
90
13)
Sweden 2.60
24
14)
Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
70-110
1) 11)
80/90
1)
110
90
Switzer-
land
2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over
3.5 t
15)
50
50
80/100
1)
80/100
1)
120
100
Serbia
and Mon-
tenegro
2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
60
60
80/100
1)
80
100
80
Slovakia 2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
60
60
90
80
130
80
Slovenia 2.55 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
80/100
1)
80
100
80
Spain 2.55 12 50
70/80
1)
90
Czech Re-
public
2.50 12 Up to 3.5 t
Over 3.5 t
50
50
90
80
130
80
Turkey 2.50 10 50 80 90
Ukraine 2.50 12 60
90
13)
110
13)
Hungary 2.50 12 Up to 2.5 t
Over 2.5 t
50
50
90/110
1)
70
130
80
Cyprus 2.55 12 50 80 100
1)
On expressways, on roads with more than one lane in each direction
2)
Vehicles over 7.5 tons max. permissible weight require a tachograph
3)
Recommended speed: 130 km/h
4)
Since 1995, for the first time, vehicles up to an unladen weight of 1875 kg and vehi-
cles up to 3.5 t perm gross weight with appropriate equipment (ABS, driver airbag,
seat belts on all seats) can drive max. 100 km/h
5)
On wet roads, reduce speed by 10 km/h, on motorways by 20 km/h
6)
On unmade roads (gravel): 80 km/h
7)
In wet conditions, reduce speed by 20 km/h
8)
Drivers who don't have their driver's licence for the full year, must not drive faster
than max. 75 km/h when out of town or 90 km/h on motorways
Country Max. dimen-
sions in me-
ters
Gross
weight
In
built-
up ar-
eas
Outside
built-up ar-
eas
Motor-
way
Width Lgth.
268 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Helpful notes
17
Date 06/2008
Source: ADAC
Specifications without guarantee
17.4 Driving with low beam in European countries
17.5 Sleeping in the vehicle away from camping areas
9)
On main roads 2.55 m, on roads marked "B" 2.20 m
10)
Between 10 p.m. and 5 a.m. the speed limit on the following motorways is
100 km/h: A10 (Tauernautobahn), A12 (Inntalautobahn), A13 (Brennerautobahn),
A14 (Rheintalautobahn)
11)
According to traffic signs
12)
Drivers who have had their driver's licence for less than one year must not drive
faster than 90 km/h. Corresponding stickers (available from ACP offices) must be
affixed in a clearly visible position on the rear of the vehicle
13)
Drivers who have had their driver's licence for less than two years must not drive
faster than 70 km/h
14)
Swedish campsites often require the motorhome to have a closed waste water
system
15)
A heavy goods vehicle supplement must be paid on all roads for all vehicles
exceeding 3.5 tons max. permissible weight
In many European countries, it is compulsory to drive with the vehicle's
lights on even during the day. Regulations vary between countries.
Motoring organisations or consulates can provide you with the relevant
information.
Country Sleeping on
roads and
fields
Sleeping on
privately
owned
lands
Comments
Yes No Yes No
Belgium X X On highway rest areas
max. 24 hours permitted
Bulgaria X X
Denmark X X On streets and squares only up
to 11 hours with a parking disc
Germany X X Staying overnight for one night
to restore driving ability is per-
mitted. There may be regional
and local limitations
Finland X X Possible with the permission of
the land owner
France X X Permission from the local au-
thorities or the owner of the land
is required. Parking and staying
overnight on free areas is pro-
hibited
Greece X X Staying overnight for one night
at designated areas on the na-
tional route Patras-Athens-
Thessaloniki is permitted
Great Britain X X
269Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Helpful notes
17
Ireland X X
Italy X X Staying overnight for one night
at car parks and service stations
is allowed. Observe the local
regulations. Parking and staying
overnight on free areas is pro-
hibited
Croatia X X
Luxembourg X X
Macedonia X X
Netherlands X X Overnight stays on streets and
squares is allowed in some bor-
oughs
Norway X X Officially prohibited on rest are-
as and cultivated grounds. Trav-
elling on dirt roads is prohibited
Austria X X Staying overnight for one night
to restore driving ability is per-
mitted, but not in nature re-
serves. Observe regional and
local restrictions. Generally for-
bidden in Tyrol
Poland X X Requires property owner's per-
mission
Portugal X X Staying overnight for one night
on motorway service stations
and car parks under 10 hours
are tolerated
Romania X X
Russia X X
Sweden X X Not on agriculture areas or in
the vicinity of houses. Driving on
open fields is prohibited
Switzerland X X One overnight stay at highway
rest areas and in some cantons
is tolerated
Serbia and
Montenegro
X X
Slovakia X X Overnight stays on private land
are only allowed if a toilet is
present
Slovenia X X
Spain X X Some regional prohibitions ap-
ply, especially on beaches
Czech Repub-
lic
X X Overnight stays on private land
are only allowed if a toilet is
present
Country Sleeping on
roads and
fields
Sleeping on
privately
owned
lands
Comments
Yes No Yes No
270 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Helpful notes
17
Specifications without guarantee
17.6 Gas supply in European countries
General tips Always observe the following instructions:
Only go on vacation with completely filled gas bottles.
Use all of the gas bottles' capacity.
Take along adapter sets (available in camping supply stores) for filling gas
bottles in foreign countries and for connecting the gas pressure regulator
to foreign gas bottles.
During the cold time of the year observe filling with propane gas component
(butane does not gas below 0 °C).
Use blue bottles from the firm Campingaz (distributed world-wide). Only
use gas bottles with safety valves.
When bottles from other countries are used, check the gas bottle compart-
ments to see if the gas bottles fit into them. Gas bottles from other countries
do not always display the same size as your own gas bottles.
17.7 Toll regulations in European countries
Many European countries have introduced a mandatory toll system. The toll
regulations and how they are collected vary greatly from country to country.
Nevertheless, ignorance is no excuse. Penalties can be quite severe.
As is the case with traffic regulations, the vehicle driver is required to be
familiar with the toll formalities before starting out on a trip. For example, in
Austria the vignette does not meet the toll requirements for vehicles that weigh
more than 3.5 t. There, a so-called "Go-Box" must be obtained and charged.
Contact your automobile club or the Internet for further information.
17.8 Tips on staying overnight safely during travel
Prudent behaviour is the most important protective measure for insuring a safe
night in the motorhome.
Turkey X X
Ukraine X X
Hungary X X Staying overnight on privately
owned land is permitted only
with police certification
Country Sleeping on
roads and
fields
Sleeping on
privately
owned
lands
Comments
Yes No Yes No
In Europe, there are several different connection systems for gas bottles. It
is not always possible to fill or exchange your gas bottles in a foreign
country. Get information about the connection system in the country you
are travelling to before embarking on your journey, e.g. at a motoring club
or in the trade press.
Windscreens with solar filters can affect the functioning of automatic toll
collection systems (e.g. Go-Box). This must be taken into account when
acquiring the appropriate device (e.g. Split-Go-Box).
271Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Helpful notes
17
The risk of thievery is reduced to a minimum when the following basic rules
are observed:
Before commencing the journey, close and lock all windows, doors and
skylights.
During high season do not spend the night at highway rest stops or parking
areas located along typical vacation routes.
Several vehicles on one site at the same time do not necessarily decrease
the chances of thievery occurring. Consult your own feelings about the
parking site.
Even if it is just for one night, go to a camping site.
When parking on open space keep emergency routes clear. The way to the
driver's seat should be clear. The ignition key should always be within
reach.
Only take with you those valuables which are absolutely necessary for the
journey. If possible, store valuables in a small safe and not in the immediate
vicinity of windows or doors.
Always lock up the vehicle.
17.9 Tips for winter campers
The following tips will help make your winter camping experience as agreeable
as possible.
Reserve your parking place in good time. Good winter camping sites are
often booked up early.
Do not start your trip without winter tyres.
Bring snow chains.
Choose your parking place with care. Observe the ground beneath you.
Snow and ice may melt.
When the vehicle has been positioned, release the handbrake to prevent
freezing.
No snow walls should be allowed to cover the built-in forced ventilation.
Keep the built-in forced ventilation free from snow and ice.
Make sure the air circulation is good. Good air circulation prevents mois-
ture from collecting and makes it easier to heat the living area.
Cover the single-paned driver's cabin window with insulation mats to avoid
thermal bridges.
Follow the instructions in the section "Gas supply in European countries".
Use a two-bottle system with automatic controller for the gas system, so
that the supply does not run out during the night.
Only operate the gas system using propane gas.
Do not use the space behind the heater as a storage compartment.
Never operate catalytic ovens or infra-red gas radiators in the interior of the
vehicle, since they consume oxygen for burning.
Lay the 240 V power cable in such a way that the cable cannot be frozen
or be damaged (e.g. during snow removal).
When it is snowing heavily, clear the roof of the vehicle of snow regularly.
A few centimetres of powdery snow serves as insulation, but wet snow
quickly becomes a heavy burden.
Before embarking on the return journey, remove all the snow from the roof
to avoid impeding vehicles behind you with a "snow flag".
17.10 Travel checklists
The following checklists will help that nothing important is left at home
although not everything on the checklists might be necessary.
272 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Helpful notes
17
Do not leave checking of documents (e.g. vehicle papers and information)
as well as checking the condition of the vehicle until just before com-
mencing the trip. Planning and checking documents well in advance will
save unnecessary trouble.
Object Object Object
Kitchen area
Wiping cloth Cleansing agent
(detergent)
Salad servers
Mug Dishcloths Chopping board
Turnspit Set of knifes and
forks for grilling
Bowls
Can opener Coffeepot Brush to wash the
dishes
Egg-cup Corkscrew Cloth to wash the
dishes
Ice cube tray Kitchen paper Matches
Lighter Spoons Cups
Bottle opener Knifes Plates
Air-tight storage
boxes
Garbage bags Thermos jug
Breakfast plate Frying pans Pots
Forks Stirring spoons Glasses
Bathroom/sanitary
items
Towels Toilet brush Toothbrush glass
Sanitary items Toilet paper
Living area
Dustbin Insect lamp Rain clothes
Road atlas Insect repellent First aid kit
Bath towels Deck of cards Travel guides/park-
ing guide
Bath shoes Broom Rucksack
Batteries Candles Sleeping bags
Bed sheets Dust pan Pencils and paper
Bed linen Coat-hangers Shoes
Laundry bag Clothes brush Shoe polish
Books Pillow Vacuum cleaner
Camping guide Map Flash light
Spare bulbs Medicine Pocket knife
Water bottle Music cassettes Table cloth
Binoculars Neck-supporting
pillow
Clothes pins
Fire extinguisher Sewing kit Clothesline
Gas bottle Radio
273Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Helpful notes
17
Vehicle/tools
Waste water con-
tainer
Fabric tape Screwdriver
Adapter socket Watering can for
drinking water
Current-measuring
instrument
CEE adapter Cable reel Step
Wire V-belt Wheel chocks
Spare wheel Glue First-aid kit
Spare lamps Universal pliers Vehicle jack
Spare fuses Compressor Hazard warning tri-
angle
Replacement wa-
ter pump
Luster terminals Warning sign
Hammer Loops Warning vest
Flat wrench Tube adapter Flashing hazard
warning light
Gas filling adapter Hose clips
Gas tube Snow chains (win-
ter)
Outside
Stay rope Camping table Lock
Bellows Luggage racks String
Camping chairs Grill Tent pegs/tighten-
ing ropes
Documents
List of addresses Registration book Identity card
Registration confir-
mation(s)
Driving licence Passport
Allergy certificate Green insurance
card
Writ of protection
Instruction manuals Vaccination certifi-
cate
Vignette/toll card
Instruction leaflets
for medicines
Credit card Visa
Object Object Object
274 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Helpful notes
17
275Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Index
12 V fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
For Dometic toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
For the starter battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
For Thetford toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
On the living area battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
12 V indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 136
12 V main switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 136, 138
12 V power supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 136, 138
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
240 V automatic circuit breaker
. . . . . . . . . . . . 147
240 V connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 142
Power cable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
240 V indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 136, 137
240 V power supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
A
Access ladder, bunk bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 96
Access ladder, overcab bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Access ladder, pull-down bed
. . . . . . . . . . . 92, 94
Accessories, fitting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Adapter cable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Additional equipment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Add-on parts see special equipment
. . . . . . . . . 20
Air conditioning unit
Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Air conditioning unit (Dometic)
Air current, adjusting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
LED
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Operating modes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Air conditioning unit (Truma)
Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Remote control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Timer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Air outlet nozzles, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
AL-KO rear axle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Appliances
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Manuals
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Armrest, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 47
Automatic power selection (AES)
. . . . . . 179, 185
Auxiliary heat exchanger (Arizona)
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
B
Backrest adjustment mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Basic equipment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Battery alarm
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 135, 140
Battery cut-off switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 129
Battery monitor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 130
Battery see starter battery and
living area battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Battery selector switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 129
Battery voltage, displaying
. . . . . . . . 131, 133, 138
Battery, wardrobe light, changing
. . . . . . . . . . 233
Beds
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Before the journey
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Bike rack
Load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Travelling with a loaded bike rack
. . . . . . . . 34
Blind, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Blind, skylight with snap latch
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Blind, window
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Boiler (Alde)
Emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Water, filling with
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Boiler (Truma)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 169
Emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168, 171
Operating modes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 169
Safety/drainage valve
. . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 169
Summer operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167, 170
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167, 170
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167, 170
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Water, filling with
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168, 171
Winter operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167, 170
Bonnet
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Index
276 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Check
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 243
Braking system, troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . 243
Branch block
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Breakdown services in Europe
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Bulbs, changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Ceiling lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Halogen spotlight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Living area lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Recessed halogen light
. . . . . . . . . . . 231, 232
Spotlight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Surface-mounted halogen light
. . . . . . . . . 232
Wardrobe light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Bunk bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 95
Access ladder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 96
Conversion
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 96
Safety net
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 96
Butane gas
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 112
C
Cable reel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Camping gas bottles, use
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 113
Camping in winter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Cap, water drain neck
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Capacity of the battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Caravan coupling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Blind
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Carpet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Curtains
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Driver's cabin insulation mat
. . . . . . . . . . . 215
Entrance step
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
External care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Extractor hood
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Furniture surfaces
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Gas cooker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
High-pressure cleaner, washing with
. . . . . 213
Hot-water heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
In the winter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Interior care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Lamps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Net curtains
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
PVC-floor covering
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Roman shade
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Seat belt
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Sink
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Synthetic parts, interior
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Teflon coverings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Temporary lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Toilets
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Underbody
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Upholstery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Vacuum toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Washing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Waste water tank
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Water system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Windows
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Winter lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Carpet, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Ceiling lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Central seating group
Extending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Sleeping conversion
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 100
Changing wheels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Charging current
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Checklist
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39, 221
Before the journey
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
For the journey
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Initial start-up after temporary lay-up
. . . . .223
Road safety
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Temporary lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Winter lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Children's beds
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 91, 93, 94, 95
Circulating pump
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Circulating pump,
setting the rotational speed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Circulation fan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151, 153
Cleaning
Water pipes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Water tank
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Cleaning see care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Closed circuit current
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Condensation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
On the double acrylic glass pane
. . . . . . . . .70
On the screwed
connections in the floor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Condensation water see condensation
. . . . . . . .70
Connecting cable see power cable
. . . . . . . . . .142
Conventional load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Conversion door
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61, 66
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Roman shade, closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Roman shade, opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Conversion door, inside
Locking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 64
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 64
277Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Index
Conversion door, outside
Locking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 62
Cooker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Curtains, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
D
Danger of suffocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 69
Dimensions, permissible
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Discharging current
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Displays
Battery voltage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 133, 138
Current
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Temperature
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Waste water tank level
. . . . . . . 132, 135, 140
Water tank level
. . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 135, 140
Disposal
Household waste
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Sewage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Waste water
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Dometic toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Flushing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Water tank, emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Water tank, filling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Door lock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 62
Doors
Conversion door
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Driver's door
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Lock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 62
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Double floor, load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Drain cock, water
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Drain neck, water
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Drinking water
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Drinking water filler neck
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Driver's cabin insulation mat, care
. . . . . . . . . 215
Driver's door
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Driver's door, inside
Locking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Driver's door, outside
Locking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Driver's seat
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Adjusting an appropriate
seating position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 47
Armrest, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 47
Turning it to driving position
. . . . . . . . . . 46, 47
Driving speed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Driving the motorhome
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
DuoControl switching facility
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Duomatic switching facility
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
During the journey
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
E
Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
240 V connection, troubleshooting
. . . . . . . 244
Entrance step, troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . 243
Explanation of terms
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Lighting, troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Electrically adjustable external mirrors
. . . . . . . 51
Entrance step
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 37, 57
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Extending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Pulling out
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Pushing in
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Retracting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Warning tone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Environmental tips
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Exterior lighting
Checking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
External care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
External connection see 240 V connection
. . . . 59
External flaps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Flap lock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Sliding drawer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 68
External gas connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
External mirrors, electrically adjustable
Adjusting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Mirror heater, switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Extractor hood
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Filter, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Index
278 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
F
Facing seating unit, sleeping conversion . . . . . . 99
Fault current protection switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Filling the tank
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Fire
Behaviour in the event of
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Extinguishing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Fire prevention
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Fire risks, avoidance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Fixed bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Fixed table
Moving in a crossways direction
. . . . . . . . . 85
Moving in a lengthways direction
. . . . . . . . . 85
Flap lock
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68
Elliptical-shaped
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68
With recessed handle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Flat screen, positioning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 88
Floor warming unit, electrical
Overload protection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Fluorescent tubes, changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Living area lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Room lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Folding mechanism, overcab bed
. . . . . . . . . . . 90
Forced ventilation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 69
Freezer compartment door locking mechanism
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Locking in the ventilation position
. . . . . . . 191
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Front bench seat,
sleeping conversion
. . . . . . . . .103, 104, 105, 106
Front passenger's seat
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Adjusting an appropriate
seating position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 47
Armrest, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 47
Turning it to driving position
. . . . . . . . . . 46, 47
Front seating group, sleeping conversion
. . . . 107
Fuel filler neck
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Furniture flaps, troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Furniture surfaces, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Fuse box see
240 V automatic circuit breaker
. . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Fuses
12 V fuses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
240 V fuse
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141, 147
For the Dometic toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
For the starter battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
For the Thetford toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
On the living area battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Fuses see 12 V fuses and 240 V fuse
. . . . . . .143
G
Gas bottle compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 112
Gas bottles
Changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 112
Gas connection, external
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Gas consumption
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Gas cooker
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Gas isolator taps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Symbols
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 149
Gas odour
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 111, 246
Gas oven
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174, 175
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Gas supply in European countries
. . . . . . . . . .270
Gas system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Defect
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 111, 246
General instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Hose break guard
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 111
Switching automatics
. . . . . . . . . . . . .116, 118
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Gas tube, check
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 112
General instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Guarantee
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Guarantee certificate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Guarantee conditions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
H
Halogen spotlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Handbrake
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Applying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Handling of tyres
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Headrests
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
279Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Index
Heat exchanger (Alde)
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Heat exchanger (Arizona)
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Heat exchangers, heater, replacement
. . . . . . 149
Heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Air outlet nozzles, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . 150
Circulation fan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 153
Heat exchangers, replacement
. . . . . . . . . 149
Hot air distribution
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Initial start-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Heater for the waste water tank
and waste water pipes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Heater, external mirrors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Heki skylight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Roman shade
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Ventilation position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Help on Europe's roads
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
High rate of gas consumption
. . . . . . 22, 111, 246
High-pressure cleaner, washing with
. . . . . . . 213
Hinged skylight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Locking in ventilation position
. . . . . . . . . . . 78
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Roman shade
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Hinged window
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Blind
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 72
Continuous ventilation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 72
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 72
Hose break guard, gas system
. . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Hot air distribution
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Hot-air heater
Circulation fan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 153
Operating modes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 153
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 154
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 153
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Hot-water heater
240 V electrical operation, selecting
. . . . . 156
Adjustment menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Auxiliary circulating pump
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Fluid level, checking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Gas and 240 V electrical operation,
selecting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Gas operation, selecting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Heat exchanger
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Heater, switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Heater, switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Heating fluid, topping up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Heating system, bleeding
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Maintenance work
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Operating unit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Rotational speed, circulating pump
. . . . . . 158
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Start screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Tool menus
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
I
Independent vehicle heater
Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Programming
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Indicator lamp, 12 V power supply
. . . . . . 133, 136
Indicator lamp,
240 V power supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 136, 137
Indicator lamp, toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 206, 207, 208
Individual seats, conversion for sleeping
. . . . . 109
Information stickers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Initial start-up
After temporary lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
After winter lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Inner door, troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Insect screen door
Extending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Folding in
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Insect screen, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Insect screen, conversion door
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Insect screen, Heki skylight
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Insect screen, hinged skylight
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Index
280 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Insect screen, windows
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 74
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Insect screen, wind-up skylight
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Inspection records
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Inspection work
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Inspections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Inspection plan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Records
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Interior care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Interior lighting
Bulbs, changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
K
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
L
Ladder, bunk bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 96
Ladder, overcab bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Ladder, pull-down bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 94
Ladder, rear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Lamps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 228
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Operating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Lay-up
Temporary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Winter lay-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Leakage water inside the vehicle
. . . . . . . . . . . 255
Lift-off table
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Conversion to bed foundation
. . . . . . . . . . . 87
Light switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Lighting
Lamps, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Lights see bulbs, changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Living area battery
Battery alarm
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132, 135, 140
Charging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Charging current, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . 135
Discharging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Discharging current, displaying
. . . . . . . . . 135
Fuses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244, 245
Voltage, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . .131, 133, 138
Living area lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Bike rack
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Double floor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Load rack, extendable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Rear garage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Rear storage space
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Roof rack
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Load rack for roof loads
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Load rack, extendable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Load see also payload
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Lock
Conversion door
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61, 62
External flap
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Low beam
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
L-seating group, sleeping conversion
. . . . . . . .108
M
Maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Air conditioning unit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Air conditioning unit (Dometic)
. . . . . . . . . .228
Air conditioning unit (Truma)
. . . . . . . . . . . .228
AL-KO rear axle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Hot-water heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Independent vehicle heater
. . . . . . . . . . . .227
Mass in ready-to-drive condition
. . . . . . . . . .27, 29
Maximum permissible gross weight
. . . . . . .27, 29
Mechanical steady legs
Extending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 59
Length, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 59
Retracting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 59
Microwave oven
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
N
Net curtains, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
No gas
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Nose weight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
O
Odour seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Off-load voltage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Oil level, checking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Operating modes
Air conditioning unit (Dometic)
. . . . . . . . . .163
Boiler (Truma)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166, 169
281Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Index
Hot-air heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 153
Refrigerator
. . . . . . . . 178, 179, 182, 183, 187
Switching automatics,
gas system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118, 119
Oven see gas cooker or
gas oven
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 174, 175
Overcab bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Access ladder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Folding downwards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Folding mechanism
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Folding upwards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Safety net
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Overloading
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
P
Panel (IT 20-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
12 V main switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Battery voltage, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Filling level of the waste water tank,
displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Filling level of the water tank,
displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Panel (IT 992)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
12 V main switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Battery voltage, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Filling level of the waste water tank,
displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Filling level of the water tank,
displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Switch for water pump
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Panel (MP 20-T)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
12 V main switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
240 V indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Alarms
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Battery displays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Tank display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Tank heater switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Temperature display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Time display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Panel see also displays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130, 133
Payload
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Calculation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Composition
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Example calculation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 29
Payload see also load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Permissible gross weight see
maximum permissible gross weight
. . . . . . . . . 26
Permitted mass
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Personal equipment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Power cable for the 240 V connection
. . . . . . . 142
Propane gas
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 112
Pull-down bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 93
Access ladder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 94
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 93
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 93
Retaining straps, tightening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Safety net
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
PVC-floor covering
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
PVC-floor covering, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
R
Rear axle load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Rear garage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Rear ladder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Folding downwards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Folding upwards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Rear storage space
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Recessed halogen light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231, 232
Refrigerator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 177
12 V operation,
switching on/off
. . . . . . . . .179, 183, 185, 189
240 V operation,
switching on/off
. . . . . . . . .179, 183, 184, 189
Change-over between
energy sources
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, 186
Door lock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189, 190
Frame heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Gas operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Gas operation, switching off
. . . . 179, 182, 184
Gas operation, switching on
. . . . 178, 182, 184
Operating modes
. . . .178, 179, 182, 183, 187
Operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 187
Refrigerating temperature control
. . . 181, 186
Switching off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 249, 250, 251
Ventilation grill, removal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Refrigerator door locking mechanism
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190, 191, 192
Locking in the
ventilation position
. . . . . . . . . . . 190, 191, 192
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190, 191, 192
Refrigerator ventilation grill, removal
. . . . . . . . 177
Registration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Remote control, air conditioning unit
(Truma)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Risk of frost damage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 193, 200
Index
282 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Road safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Checklist
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Notes for
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Roman shade, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Roman shade, driver's cabin
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Roman shade, Heki skylight
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Roman shade, hinged skylight
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Roman shade, window of conversion door
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Roman shade, windows
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Roman shade, wind-up skylight
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Roof load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Roof rack, load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Roof rail
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Room lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Round seating group,
sleeping conversion
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101, 102
S
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Cooker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Electrical system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Fire prevention
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Gas bottles
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Gas system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 111
Hot-water heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Road safety
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Towing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Water system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Safety net, bunk bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 96
Safety net, overcab bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Safety net, pull-down bed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 94
Safety/drainage valve boiler
. . . . . . . . . . . 166, 169
Sanitary fittings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Seat belts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Adjusting correctly
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Fastening correctly
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Seating arrangement
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Seating groups
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Seats, rotating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Serial number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Sewage tank, emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Shower
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Sink, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Skylight with snap latch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76, 77
Blind
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76, 77
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76, 77
Skylights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75, 78
Sleeping conversion
Central seating group
. . . . . . . . . . 97, 98, 100
Facing seating unit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Front bench seat
. . . . . . . . 103, 104, 105, 106
Front seating group
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Individual seats
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
L-seating group
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Round seating group
. . . . . . . . . . . . .101, 102
Sliding drawer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 68
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Sliding window
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Snow chains
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Spare parts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Spare wheel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Underneath the vehicle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Spare wheel support
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Special equipment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Description
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Marking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Weight details
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Speed limits
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Spotlight
Shifting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Turning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Starter battery
Battery alarm
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Charging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Fuses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Voltage, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . 131, 133, 138
Staying overnight
Away from camping areas
. . . . . . . . . . . . .268
During travel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
283Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Index
Steady legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Extending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 59
Length, adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Retracting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 59
Supports see steady legs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Surface-mounted halogen light
. . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Suspension table
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 83
Conversion to bed foundation
. . . . . . . . 82, 83
Extending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 83
Reducing size
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 83
Switch for water pump
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Switching automatics, gas system
. . . . . 116, 118
Swivel table
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Conversion to bed foundation
. . . . . . . . . . . 84
Fastening to the floor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Symbols
For instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Gas isolator taps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 149
Synthetic parts in the toilet
and living areas, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
T
Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Table, fixed
Locking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Moving in a lengthways direction
. . . . . . . . 86
Table-top, folding to the side
. . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Tank alarm
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Tank heater, switching on and off
. . . . . . . . . . 141
Tank lid see fuel filler neck
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Teflon coverings, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Television
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 87
Positioning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Pulling out
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Storing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Swiveling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Temperature display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Thetford cassette, retaining clip
. . . . . . . . . . . 210
Thetford toilet
Emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Flushing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206, 207
Fuse
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206, 207
Water tank, emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Water tank, filling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Time, displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Tips
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Fuse
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146, 147
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Water tank, emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Toilet cassette
Emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Removing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Unlocking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Toilet compartment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Ventilation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Toilet compartment, pull-out
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Toll regulations in European countries
. . . . . . . 270
Total discharge
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Towing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
General instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Traffic rules in foreign countries
. . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Transformer/rectifier (EBL 101)
. . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Functions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Transformer/rectifier (EBL 99)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Functions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Travel checklists
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Travel cots suitable
for children
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90, 91, 93, 94, 95
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
12 V power supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
240 V connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Air conditioning unit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Air conditioning unit (Dometic)
. . . . . . . . . . 254
Air conditioning unit (Truma)
. . . . . . . . . . . 254
Battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Body
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Boiler (Alde)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Boiler (Truma)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Braking system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Cooker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Electrical system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Entrance step
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Extractor hood
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Furniture flaps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Gas cooker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Gas oven
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Gas system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Index
284 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Hot-air heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Hot-water heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Inner door
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Lighting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Living area battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Microwave oven
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Refrigerator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249, 250, 251
Starter battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Vacuum toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Water supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
TV cabinet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Tyre change see changing wheels
. . . . . . . . . . 239
Tyre specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Tyres
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Excessive wear
. . . . . . . . . . .21, 39, 237, 241
General instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Handling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Identification
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Load-carrying capacity
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Tyre pressure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Tyre selection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
U
Underbody, maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Unladen weight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Upholstery, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
V
Vacuum toilet
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Flushing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Indicator lamps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Putting into operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Valve, emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Vario toilet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Converting into a shower cubicle
. . . . . . . . 204
Converting into toilet compartment
. . . . . . 204
Vehicle identification plate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Vehicle manuals and documents
. . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Vehicle, washing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Ventilation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Toilet compartment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Volume of waste water,
displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132, 135, 140
Volume of water, displaying
. . . . . . .132, 135, 140
W
Wardrobe light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Warning stickers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Washer fluid, filling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Washing with a high-pressure cleaner
. . . . . . .213
Waste gas vent on the right hand side
of the vehicle.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150, 166
Waste water tank
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197, 198
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197, 198
Filling level, displaying
. . . . . . . 132, 135, 140
Heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Waste water tap
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197, 198
Water drainage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Water pipes, cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Water pump
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193, 199
Water pump, switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Water supply
General
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Water system
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Disinfect
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Drinking water filler neck
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Emptying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Filling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Water tank
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Filling level, displaying
. . . . . . . 132, 135, 140
Water drainage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Water, draining
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Water, filling with
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Water tank see also water system
. . . . . . . . . .194
Weatherproof guarantee
Conditions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Inspection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Inspection plan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Inspection stamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Weight details for special equipment
. . . . . . . .259
Wheel chocks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Wheel rim size
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Wheel rim type
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Wheels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Window winders, electrical
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
285Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
Index
Window, conversion door
Roman shade, closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Roman shade, opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Windows
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Blind
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 74
Roman shade
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 75
Wind-up skylight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Insect screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Roman shade
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Winter care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Winter operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Writing and reading rest
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Index
286 Motorcaravan - 09-09 - DET-0033-08EN
… 255 …


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Dethleffs 2010 Motorhome at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Dethleffs 2010 Motorhome in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 4,56 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Dethleffs 2010 Motorhome

Dethleffs 2010 Motorhome User Manual - German - 282 pages

Dethleffs 2010 Motorhome User Manual - Dutch - 286 pages

Dethleffs 2010 Motorhome User Manual - French - 300 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info